Move man pages from patches to a local hierarchy

35 files changed, 6831 insertions, 7333 deletions

diff --git a/debian/changelog b/debian/changelog
index 67cafcc..4545a30 100644
--- a/debian/changelog
+++ b/debian/changelog
@@ -1,3 +1,11 @@
+inetutils (2:1.8-5) UNRELEASED; urgency=low
+
+  * Move man pages from patches to actual files under debian/local/man/ to
+    ease their modification, given that upstream has rejected including
+    useful man pages there.
+
+ -- Guillem Jover <guillem@debian.org>  Sat, 05 Nov 2011 00:28:58 +0100
+
 inetutils (2:1.8-4) unstable; urgency=low
 
   * Add new inetutils-inetd default configuration file for the init script,
diff --git a/debian/inetutils-ftpd.manpages b/debian/inetutils-ftpd.manpages
index 40ad2a9..1c5602b 100644
--- a/debian/inetutils-ftpd.manpages
+++ b/debian/inetutils-ftpd.manpages
@@ -1 +1 @@
-debian/tmp/usr/share/man/man8/ftpd.8
+debian/local/man/ftpd.8
diff --git a/debian/inetutils-ping.manpages b/debian/inetutils-ping.manpages
index 005a15a..b8ed6d9 100644
--- a/debian/inetutils-ping.manpages
+++ b/debian/inetutils-ping.manpages
@@ -1,2 +1,2 @@
-debian/tmp/usr/share/man/man8/ping.8
+debian/local/man/ping.8
 man/ping6.1
diff --git a/debian/inetutils-syslogd.manpages b/debian/inetutils-syslogd.manpages
index 9df89c5..b9c5b6a 100644
--- a/debian/inetutils-syslogd.manpages
+++ b/debian/inetutils-syslogd.manpages
@@ -1,2 +1,2 @@
-debian/tmp/usr/share/man/man5/syslog.conf.5
-debian/tmp/usr/share/man/man8/syslogd.8
+debian/local/man/syslog.conf.5
+debian/local/man/syslogd.8
diff --git a/debian/inetutils-talkd.manpages b/debian/inetutils-talkd.manpages
index 6ae7cec..1625d6e 100644
--- a/debian/inetutils-talkd.manpages
+++ b/debian/inetutils-talkd.manpages
@@ -1 +1 @@
-debian/tmp/usr/share/man/man8/talkd.8
+debian/local/man/talkd.8
diff --git a/debian/inetutils-telnetd.manpages b/debian/inetutils-telnetd.manpages
index 08fb04b..52e7b6f 100644
--- a/debian/inetutils-telnetd.manpages
+++ b/debian/inetutils-telnetd.manpages
@@ -1 +1 @@
-debian/tmp/usr/share/man/man8/telnetd.8
+debian/local/man/telnetd.8
diff --git a/debian/local/man/ftp.1 b/debian/local/man/ftp.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f05718c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/ftp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,1155 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1989, 1990, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)ftp.1	8.3 (Berkeley) 10/9/94
+.\"
+.Dd October 9, 1994
+.Dt FTP 1
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm ftp
+.Nd
+.Tn ARPANET
+file transfer program
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm ftp
+.Op Fl v
+.Op Fl d
+.Op Fl i
+.Op Fl n
+.Op Fl g
+.Op Ar host
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Ftp
+is the user interface to the
+.Tn ARPANET
+standard File Transfer Protocol.
+The program allows a user to transfer files to and from a
+remote network site.
+.Pp
+Options may be specified at the command line, or to the
+command interpreter.
+.Bl -tag -width flag
+.It Fl v
+Verbose option forces
+.Nm ftp
+to show all responses from the remote server, as well
+as report on data transfer statistics.
+.It Fl n
+Restrains
+.Nm ftp
+from attempting \*(Lqauto-login\*(Rq upon initial connection.
+If auto-login is enabled,
+.Nm ftp
+will check the
+.Pa .netrc
+(see below) file in the user's home directory for an entry describing
+an account on the remote machine.
+If no entry exists,
+.Nm ftp
+will prompt for the remote machine login name (default is the user
+identity on the local machine), and, if necessary, prompt for a password
+and an account with which to login.
+.It Fl i
+Turns off interactive prompting during
+multiple file transfers.
+.It Fl d
+Enables debugging.
+.It Fl g
+Disables file name globbing.
+.El
+.Pp
+The client host with which
+.Nm ftp
+is to communicate may be specified on the command line.
+If this is done,
+.Nm ftp
+will immediately attempt to establish a connection to an
+.Tn FTP
+server on that host; otherwise,
+.Nm ftp
+will enter its command interpreter and await instructions
+from the user.
+When
+.Nm ftp
+is awaiting commands from the user the prompt
+.Ql ftp>
+is provided to the user.
+The following commands are recognized
+by
+.Nm ftp  :
+.Bl -tag -width Fl
+.It Ic \&! Op Ar command Op Ar args
+Invoke an interactive shell on the local machine.
+If there are arguments, the first is taken to be a command to execute
+directly, with the rest of the arguments as its arguments.
+.It Ic \&$ Ar macro-name Op Ar args
+Execute the macro
+.Ar macro-name
+that was defined with the
+.Ic macdef
+command.
+Arguments are passed to the macro unglobbed.
+.It Ic account Op Ar passwd
+Supply a supplemental password required by a remote system for access
+to resources once a login has been successfully completed.
+If no argument is included, the user will be prompted for an account
+password in a non-echoing input mode.
+.It Ic append Ar local-file Op Ar remote-file
+Append a local file to a file on the remote machine.
+If
+.Ar remote-file
+is left unspecified, the local file name is used in naming the
+remote file after being altered by any
+.Ic ntrans
+or
+.Ic nmap
+setting.
+File transfer uses the current settings for
+.Ic type  ,
+.Ic format ,
+.Ic mode  ,
+and
+.Ic structure .
+.It Ic ascii
+Set the file transfer
+.Ic type
+to network
+.Tn ASCII .
+This is the default type.
+.It Ic bell
+Arrange that a bell be sounded after each file transfer
+command is completed.
+.It Ic binary
+Set the file transfer
+.Ic type
+to support binary image transfer.
+.It Ic bye
+Terminate the
+.Tn FTP
+session with the remote server
+and exit
+.Nm ftp  .
+An end of file will also terminate the session and exit.
+.It Ic case
+Toggle remote computer file name case mapping during
+.Ic mget
+commands.
+When
+.Ic case
+is on (default is off), remote computer file names with all letters in
+upper case are written in the local directory with the letters mapped
+to lower case.
+.It Ic \&cd Ar remote-directory
+Change the working directory on the remote machine
+to
+.Ar remote-directory  .
+.It Ic cdup
+Change the remote machine working directory to the parent of the
+current remote machine working directory.
+.It Ic chmod Ar mode file-name
+Change the permission modes of the file
+.Ar file-name
+on the remote
+sytem to
+.Ar mode  .
+.It Ic close
+Terminate the
+.Tn FTP
+session with the remote server, and
+return to the command interpreter.
+Any defined macros are erased.
+.It Ic \&cr
+Toggle carriage return stripping during
+ascii type file retrieval.
+Records are denoted by a carriage return/linefeed sequence
+during ascii type file transfer.
+When
+.Ic \&cr
+is on (the default), carriage returns are stripped from this
+sequence to conform with the
+.Ux
+single linefeed record
+delimiter.
+Records on
+.Pf non\- Ns Ux
+remote systems may contain single linefeeds;
+when an ascii type transfer is made, these linefeeds may be
+distinguished from a record delimiter only when
+.Ic \&cr
+is off.
+.It Ic delete Ar remote-file
+Delete the file
+.Ar remote-file
+on the remote machine.
+.It Ic debug Op Ar debug-value
+Toggle debugging mode.
+If an optional
+.Ar debug-value
+is specified it is used to set the debugging level.
+When debugging is on,
+.Nm ftp
+prints each command sent to the remote machine, preceded
+by the string
+.Ql \-\->
+.It Xo
+.Ic dir
+.Op Ar remote-directory
+.Op Ar local-file
+.Xc
+Print a listing of the directory contents in the
+directory,
+.Ar remote-directory  ,
+and, optionally, placing the output in
+.Ar local-file  .
+If interactive prompting is on,
+.Nm ftp
+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
+target local file for receiving
+.Ic dir
+output.
+If no directory is specified, the current working
+directory on the remote machine is used.
+If no local
+file is specified, or
+.Ar local-file
+is
+.Fl  ,
+output comes to the terminal.
+.It Ic disconnect
+A synonym for
+.Ar close  .
+.It Ic form Ar format
+Set the file transfer
+.Ic form
+to
+.Ar format  .
+The default format is \*(Lqfile\*(Rq.
+.It Ic get Ar remote-file Op Ar local-file
+Retrieve the
+.Ar remote-file
+and store it on the local machine.
+If the local
+file name is not specified, it is given the same
+name it has on the remote machine, subject to
+alteration by the current
+.Ic case  ,
+.Ic ntrans ,
+and
+.Ic nmap
+settings.
+The current settings for
+.Ic type  ,
+.Ic form ,
+.Ic mode  ,
+and
+.Ic structure
+are used while transferring the file.
+.It Ic glob
+Toggle filename expansion for
+.Ic mdelete  ,
+.Ic mget
+and
+.Ic mput  .
+If globbing is turned off with
+.Ic glob  ,
+the file name arguments
+are taken literally and not expanded.
+Globbing for
+.Ic mput
+is done as in
+.Xr csh 1 .
+For
+.Ic mdelete
+and
+.Ic mget  ,
+each remote file name is expanded
+separately on the remote machine and the lists are not merged.
+Expansion of a directory name is likely to be
+different from expansion of the name of an ordinary file:
+the exact result depends on the foreign operating system and ftp server,
+and can be previewed by doing
+.Ql mls remote-files \-
+Note:
+.Ic mget
+and
+.Ic mput
+are not meant to transfer
+entire directory subtrees of files.
+That can be done by
+transferring a
+.Xr tar 1
+archive of the subtree (in binary mode).
+.It Ic hash Op Ar size
+Toggle hash-sign (``#'') printing for each data block
+transferred.
+The 
+.Ar size
+of a data block can optionally be specified.  If not given, it defaults to 1024 bytes.
+.It Ic help Op Ar command
+Print an informative message about the meaning of
+.Ar command  .
+If no argument is given,
+.Nm ftp
+prints a list of the known commands.
+.It Ic idle Op Ar seconds
+Set the inactivity timer on the remote server to
+.Ar seconds
+seconds.
+If
+.Ar seconds
+is omitted, the current inactivity timer is printed.
+.It Ic lcd Op Ar directory
+Change the working directory on the local machine.
+If
+no
+.Ar directory
+is specified, the user's home directory is used.
+.It Xo
+.Ic \&ls
+.Op Ar remote-directory
+.Op Ar local-file
+.Xc
+Print a listing of the contents of a
+directory on the remote machine.
+The listing includes any system-dependent information that the server
+chooses to include; for example, most
+.Ux
+systems will produce
+output from the command
+.Ql ls \-l .
+(See also
+.Ic nlist . )
+If
+.Ar remote-directory
+is left unspecified, the current working directory is used.
+If interactive prompting is on,
+.Nm ftp
+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
+target local file for receiving
+.Ic \&ls
+output.
+If no local file is specified, or if
+.Ar local-file
+is
+.Sq Fl ,
+the output is sent to the terminal.
+.It Ic macdef Ar macro-name
+Define a macro.
+Subsequent lines are stored as the macro
+.Ar macro-name  ;
+a null line (consecutive newline characters
+in a file or
+carriage returns from the terminal) terminates macro input mode.
+There is a limit of 16 macros and 4096 total characters in all
+defined macros.
+Macros remain defined until a
+.Ic close
+command is executed.
+The macro processor interprets `$' and `\e' as special characters.
+A `$' followed by a number (or numbers) is replaced by the
+corresponding argument on the macro invocation command line.
+A `$' followed by an `i' signals that macro processor that the
+executing macro is to be looped.
+On the first pass `$i' is
+replaced by the first argument on the macro invocation command line,
+on the second pass it is replaced by the second argument, and so on.
+A `\e' followed by any character is replaced by that character.
+Use the `\e' to prevent special treatment of the `$'.
+.It Ic mdelete Op Ar remote-files
+Delete the
+.Ar remote-files
+on the remote machine.
+.It Ic mdir Ar remote-files local-file
+Like
+.Ic dir  ,
+except multiple remote files may be specified.
+If interactive prompting is on,
+.Nm ftp
+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
+target local file for receiving
+.Ic mdir
+output.
+.It Ic mget Ar remote-files
+Expand the
+.Ar remote-files
+on the remote machine
+and do a
+.Ic get
+for each file name thus produced.
+See
+.Ic glob
+for details on the filename expansion.
+Resulting file names will then be processed according to
+.Ic case  ,
+.Ic ntrans ,
+and
+.Ic nmap
+settings.
+Files are transferred into the local working directory,
+which can be changed with
+.Ql lcd directory ;
+new local directories can be created with
+.Ql "\&! mkdir directory" .
+.It Ic mkdir Ar directory-name
+Make a directory on the remote machine.
+.It Ic mls Ar remote-files local-file
+Like
+.Ic nlist  ,
+except multiple remote files may be specified,
+and the
+.Ar local-file
+must be specified.
+If interactive prompting is on,
+.Nm ftp
+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
+target local file for receiving
+.Ic mls
+output.
+.It Ic mode Op Ar mode-name
+Set the file transfer
+.Ic mode
+to
+.Ar mode-name  .
+The default mode is \*(Lqstream\*(Rq mode.
+.It Ic modtime Ar file-name
+Show the last modification time of the file on the remote machine.
+.It Ic mput Ar local-files
+Expand wild cards in the list of local files given as arguments
+and do a
+.Ic put
+for each file in the resulting list.
+See
+.Ic glob
+for details of filename expansion.
+Resulting file names will then be processed according to
+.Ic ntrans
+and
+.Ic nmap
+settings.
+.It Ic newer Ar file-name
+Get the file only if the modification time of the remote file is more
+recent that the file on the current system.
+If the file does not
+exist on the current system, the remote file is considered
+.Ic newer  .
+Otherwise, this command is identical to
+.Ar get  .
+.It Xo
+.Ic nlist
+.Op Ar remote-directory
+.Op Ar local-file
+.Xc
+Print a  list of the files in a
+directory on the remote machine.
+If
+.Ar remote-directory
+is left unspecified, the current working directory is used.
+If interactive prompting is on,
+.Nm ftp
+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
+target local file for receiving
+.Ic nlist
+output.
+If no local file is specified, or if
+.Ar local-file
+is
+.Fl  ,
+the output is sent to the terminal.
+.It Ic nmap Op Ar inpattern outpattern
+Set or unset the filename mapping mechanism.
+If no arguments are specified, the filename mapping mechanism is unset.
+If arguments are specified, remote filenames are mapped during
+.Ic mput
+commands and
+.Ic put
+commands issued without a specified remote target filename.
+If arguments are specified, local filenames are mapped during
+.Ic mget
+commands and
+.Ic get
+commands issued without a specified local target filename.
+This command is useful when connecting to a
+.No non\- Ns Ux
+remote computer
+with different file naming conventions or practices.
+The mapping follows the pattern set by
+.Ar inpattern
+and
+.Ar outpattern  .
+.Op Ar Inpattern
+is a template for incoming filenames (which may have already been
+processed according to the
+.Ic ntrans
+and
+.Ic case
+settings).
+Variable templating is accomplished by including the
+sequences `$1', `$2', ..., `$9' in
+.Ar inpattern  .
+Use `\\' to prevent this special treatment of the `$' character.
+All other characters are treated literally, and are used to determine the
+.Ic nmap
+.Op Ar inpattern
+variable values.
+For example, given
+.Ar inpattern
+$1.$2 and the remote file name "mydata.data", $1 would have the value
+"mydata", and $2 would have the value "data".
+The
+.Ar outpattern
+determines the resulting mapped filename.
+The sequences `$1', `$2', ...., `$9' are replaced by any value resulting
+from the
+.Ar inpattern
+template.
+The sequence `$0' is replace by the original filename.
+Additionally, the sequence
+.Ql Op Ar seq1 , Ar seq2
+is replaced by
+.Op Ar seq1
+if
+.Ar seq1
+is not a null string; otherwise it is replaced by
+.Ar seq2 .
+For example, the command
+.Pp
+.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
+nmap $1.$2.$3 [$1,$2].[$2,file]
+.Ed
+.Pp
+would yield
+the output filename "myfile.data" for input filenames "myfile.data" and
+"myfile.data.old", "myfile.file" for the input filename "myfile", and
+"myfile.myfile" for the input filename ".myfile".
+Spaces may be included in
+.Ar outpattern  ,
+as in the example: `nmap $1 sed "s/  *$//" > $1' .
+Use the `\e' character to prevent special treatment
+of the `$','[','[', and `,' characters.
+.It Ic ntrans Op Ar inchars Op Ar outchars
+Set or unset the filename character translation mechanism.
+If no arguments are specified, the filename character
+translation mechanism is unset.
+If arguments are specified, characters in
+remote filenames are translated during
+.Ic mput
+commands and
+.Ic put
+commands issued without a specified remote target filename.
+If arguments are specified, characters in
+local filenames are translated during
+.Ic mget
+commands and
+.Ic get
+commands issued without a specified local target filename.
+This command is useful when connecting to a
+.No non\- Ns Ux
+remote computer
+with different file naming conventions or practices.
+Characters in a filename matching a character in
+.Ar inchars
+are replaced with the corresponding character in
+.Ar outchars  .
+If the character's position in
+.Ar inchars
+is longer than the length of
+.Ar outchars  ,
+the character is deleted from the file name.
+.It Ic open Ar host Op Ar port
+Establish a connection to the specified
+.Ar host
+.Tn FTP
+server.
+An optional port number may be supplied,
+in which case,
+.Nm ftp
+will attempt to contact an
+.Tn FTP
+server at that port.
+If the
+.Ic auto-login
+option is on (default),
+.Nm ftp
+will also attempt to automatically log the user in to
+the
+.Tn FTP
+server (see below).
+.It Ic passive
+Toggle passive mode.  If passive mode is turned on
+(default is off), the ftp client will
+send a
+.Dv PASV
+command for all data connections instead of the usual
+.Dv PORT
+command.  The
+.Dv PASV
+command requests that the remote server open a port for the data connection
+and return the address of that port.  The remote server listens on that
+port and the client connects to it.  When using the more traditional
+.Dv PORT
+command, the client listens on a port and sends that address to the remote
+server, who connects back to it.  Passive mode is useful when using
+.Nm ftp
+through a gateway router or host that controls the directionality of
+traffic.
+(Note that though ftp servers are required to support the
+.Dv PASV
+command by RFC 1123, some do not.)
+.It Ic prompt
+Toggle interactive prompting.
+Interactive prompting
+occurs during multiple file transfers to allow the
+user to selectively retrieve or store files.
+If prompting is turned off (default is on), any
+.Ic mget
+or
+.Ic mput
+will transfer all files, and any
+.Ic mdelete
+will delete all files.
+.It Ic proxy Ar ftp-command
+Execute an ftp command on a secondary control connection.
+This command allows simultaneous connection to two remote ftp
+servers for transferring files between the two servers.
+The first
+.Ic proxy
+command should be an
+.Ic open  ,
+to establish the secondary control connection.
+Enter the command "proxy ?" to see other ftp commands executable on the
+secondary connection.
+The following commands behave differently when prefaced by
+.Ic proxy  :
+.Ic open
+will not define new macros during the auto-login process,
+.Ic close
+will not erase existing macro definitions,
+.Ic get
+and
+.Ic mget
+transfer files from the host on the primary control connection
+to the host on the secondary control connection, and
+.Ic put  ,
+.Ic mput ,
+and
+.Ic append
+transfer files from the host on the secondary control connection
+to the host on the primary control connection.
+Third party file transfers depend upon support of the ftp protocol
+.Dv PASV
+command by the server on the secondary control connection.
+.It Ic put Ar local-file Op Ar remote-file
+Store a local file on the remote machine.
+If
+.Ar remote-file
+is left unspecified, the local file name is used
+after processing according to any
+.Ic ntrans
+or
+.Ic nmap
+settings
+in naming the remote file.
+File transfer uses the
+current settings for
+.Ic type  ,
+.Ic format ,
+.Ic mode  ,
+and
+.Ic structure  .
+.It Ic pwd
+Print the name of the current working directory on the remote
+machine.
+.It Ic quit
+A synonym for
+.Ic bye  .
+.It Ic quote Ar arg1 arg2 ...
+The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the remote
+.Tn FTP
+server.
+.It Ic recv Ar remote-file Op Ar local-file
+A synonym for get.
+.It Ic reget Ar remote-file Op Ar local-file
+Reget acts like get, except that if
+.Ar local-file
+exists and is
+smaller than
+.Ar remote-file  ,
+.Ar local-file
+is presumed to be
+a partially transferred copy of
+.Ar remote-file
+and the transfer
+is continued from the apparent point of failure.
+This command
+is useful when transferring very large files over networks that
+are prone to dropping connections.
+.It Ic remotehelp Op Ar command-name
+Request help from the remote
+.Tn FTP
+server.
+If a
+.Ar command-name
+is specified it is supplied to the server as well.
+.It Ic remotestatus Op Ar file-name
+With no arguments, show status of remote machine.
+If
+.Ar file-name
+is specified, show status of
+.Ar file-name
+on remote machine.
+.It Xo
+.Ic rename
+.Op Ar from
+.Op Ar to
+.Xc
+Rename the file
+.Ar from
+on the remote machine, to the file
+.Ar to  .
+.It Ic reset
+Clear reply queue.
+This command re-synchronizes command/reply sequencing with the remote
+ftp server.
+Resynchronization may be necessary following a violation of the ftp protocol
+by the remote server.
+.It Ic restart Ar marker
+Restart the immediately following
+.Ic get
+or
+.Ic put
+at the
+indicated
+.Ar marker  .
+On
+.Ux
+systems, marker is usually a byte
+offset into the file.
+.It Ic rmdir Ar directory-name
+Delete a directory on the remote machine.
+.It Ic runique
+Toggle storing of files on the local system with unique filenames.
+If a file already exists with a name equal to the target
+local filename for a
+.Ic get
+or
+.Ic mget
+command, a ".1" is appended to the name.
+If the resulting name matches another existing file,
+a ".2" is appended to the original name.
+If this process continues up to ".99", an error
+message is printed, and the transfer does not take place.
+The generated unique filename will be reported.
+Note that
+.Ic runique
+will not affect local files generated from a shell command
+(see below).
+The default value is off.
+.It Ic send Ar local-file Op Ar remote-file
+A synonym for put.
+.It Ic sendport
+Toggle the use of
+.Dv PORT
+commands.
+By default,
+.Nm ftp
+will attempt to use a
+.Dv PORT
+command when establishing
+a connection for each data transfer.
+The use of
+.Dv PORT
+commands can prevent delays
+when performing multiple file transfers.
+If the
+.Dv PORT
+command fails,
+.Nm ftp
+will use the default data port.
+When the use of
+.Dv PORT
+commands is disabled, no attempt will be made to use
+.Dv PORT
+commands for each data transfer.
+This is useful
+for certain
+.Tn FTP
+implementations which do ignore
+.Dv PORT
+commands but, incorrectly, indicate they've been accepted.
+.It Ic site Ar arg1 arg2 ...
+The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the remote
+.Tn FTP
+server as a
+.Dv SITE
+command.
+.It Ic size Ar file-name
+Return size of
+.Ar file-name
+on remote machine.
+.It Ic status
+Show the current status of
+.Nm ftp  .
+.It Ic struct Op Ar struct-name
+Set the file transfer
+.Ar structure
+to
+.Ar struct-name .
+By default \*(Lqstream\*(Rq structure is used.
+.It Ic sunique
+Toggle storing of files on remote machine under unique file names.
+Remote ftp server must support ftp protocol
+.Dv STOU
+command for
+successful completion.
+The remote server will report unique name.
+Default value is off.
+.It Ic system
+Show the type of operating system running on the remote machine.
+.It Ic tenex
+Set the file transfer type to that needed to
+talk to
+.Tn TENEX
+machines.
+.It Ic trace
+Toggle packet tracing.
+.It Ic type Op Ar type-name
+Set the file transfer
+.Ic type
+to
+.Ar type-name  .
+If no type is specified, the current type
+is printed.
+The default type is network
+.Tn ASCII .
+.It Ic umask Op Ar newmask
+Set the default umask on the remote server to
+.Ar newmask  .
+If
+.Ar newmask
+is omitted, the current umask is printed.
+.It Xo
+.Ic user Ar user-name
+.Op Ar password
+.Op Ar account
+.Xc
+Identify yourself to the remote
+.Tn FTP
+server.
+If the
+.Ar password
+is not specified and the server requires it,
+.Nm ftp
+will prompt the user for it (after disabling local echo).
+If an
+.Ar account
+field is not specified, and the
+.Tn FTP
+server
+requires it, the user will be prompted for it.
+If an
+.Ar account
+field is specified, an account command will
+be relayed to the remote server after the login sequence
+is completed if the remote server did not require it
+for logging in.
+Unless
+.Nm ftp
+is invoked with \*(Lqauto-login\*(Rq disabled, this
+process is done automatically on initial connection to
+the
+.Tn FTP
+server.
+.It Ic verbose
+Toggle verbose mode.
+In verbose mode, all responses from
+the
+.Tn FTP
+server are displayed to the user.
+In addition,
+if verbose is on, when a file transfer completes, statistics
+regarding the efficiency of the transfer are reported.
+By default,
+verbose is on.
+.It Ic ? Op Ar command
+A synonym for help.
+.El
+.Pp
+Command arguments which have embedded spaces may be quoted with
+quote `"' marks.
+.Sh ABORTING A FILE TRANSFER
+To abort a file transfer, use the terminal interrupt key
+(usually Ctrl-C).
+Sending transfers will be immediately halted.
+Receiving transfers will be halted by sending a ftp protocol
+.Dv ABOR
+command to the remote server, and discarding any further data received.
+The speed at which this is accomplished depends upon the remote
+server's support for
+.Dv ABOR
+processing.
+If the remote server does not support the
+.Dv ABOR
+command, an
+.Ql ftp>
+prompt will not appear until the remote server has completed
+sending the requested file.
+.Pp
+The terminal interrupt key sequence will be ignored when
+.Nm ftp
+has completed any local processing and is awaiting a reply
+from the remote server.
+A long delay in this mode may result from the ABOR processing described
+above, or from unexpected behavior by the remote server, including
+violations of the ftp protocol.
+If the delay results from unexpected remote server behavior, the local
+.Nm ftp
+program must be killed by hand.
+.Sh FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS
+Files specified as arguments to
+.Nm ftp
+commands are processed according to the following rules.
+.Bl -enum
+.It
+If the file name
+.Sq Fl
+is specified, the
+.Ar stdin
+(for reading) or
+.Ar stdout
+(for writing) is used.
+.It
+If the first character of the file name is
+.Sq \&| ,
+the
+remainder of the argument is interpreted as a shell command.
+.Nm Ftp
+then forks a shell, using
+.Xr popen 3
+with the argument supplied, and reads (writes) from the stdout
+(stdin).
+If the shell command includes spaces, the argument
+must be quoted; e.g.
+\*(Lq" ls -lt"\*(Rq.
+A particularly
+useful example of this mechanism is: \*(Lqdir more\*(Rq.
+.It
+Failing the above checks, if ``globbing'' is enabled,
+local file names are expanded
+according to the rules used in the
+.Xr csh  1  ;
+c.f. the
+.Ic glob
+command.
+If the
+.Nm ftp
+command expects a single local file (.e.g.
+.Ic put  ) ,
+only the first filename generated by the "globbing" operation is used.
+.It
+For
+.Ic mget
+commands and
+.Ic get
+commands with unspecified local file names, the local filename is
+the remote filename, which may be altered by a
+.Ic case  ,
+.Ic ntrans ,
+or
+.Ic nmap
+setting.
+The resulting filename may then be altered if
+.Ic runique
+is on.
+.It
+For
+.Ic mput
+commands and
+.Ic put
+commands with unspecified remote file names, the remote filename is
+the local filename, which may be altered by a
+.Ic ntrans
+or
+.Ic nmap
+setting.
+The resulting filename may then be altered by the remote server if
+.Ic sunique
+is on.
+.El
+.Sh FILE TRANSFER PARAMETERS
+The FTP specification specifies many parameters which may
+affect a file transfer.
+The
+.Ic type
+may be one of \*(Lqascii\*(Rq, \*(Lqimage\*(Rq (binary),
+\*(Lqebcdic\*(Rq, and \*(Lqlocal byte size\*(Rq (for
+.Tn PDP Ns -10's
+and
+.Tn PDP Ns -20's
+mostly).
+.Nm Ftp
+supports the ascii and image types of file transfer,
+plus local byte size 8 for
+.Ic tenex
+mode transfers.
+.Pp
+.Nm Ftp
+supports only the default values for the remaining
+file transfer parameters:
+.Ic mode  ,
+.Ic form ,
+and
+.Ic struct  .
+.Sh THE .netrc FILE
+The
+.Pa .netrc
+file contains login and initialization information
+used by the auto-login process.
+It resides in the user's home directory.
+The following tokens are recognized; they may be separated by spaces,
+tabs, or new-lines:
+.Bl -tag -width password
+.It Ic machine Ar name
+Identify a remote machine
+.Ar name .
+The auto-login process searches the
+.Pa .netrc
+file for a
+.Ic machine
+token that matches the remote machine specified on the
+.Nm ftp
+command line or as an
+.Ic open
+command argument.
+Once a match is made, the subsequent
+.Pa .netrc
+tokens are processed,
+stopping when the end of file is reached or another
+.Ic machine
+or a
+.Ic default
+token is encountered.
+.It Ic default
+This is the same as
+.Ic machine
+.Ar name
+except that
+.Ic default
+matches any name.
+There can be only one
+.Ic default
+token, and it must be after all
+.Ic machine
+tokens.
+This is normally used as:
+.Pp
+.Dl default login anonymous password user@site
+.Pp
+thereby giving the user
+.Ar automatic
+anonymous ftp login to
+machines not specified in
+.Pa .netrc .
+This can be overridden
+by using the
+.Fl n
+flag to disable auto-login.
+.It Ic login Ar name
+Identify a user on the remote machine.
+If this token is present, the auto-login process will initiate
+a login using the specified
+.Ar name .
+.It Ic password Ar string
+Supply a password.
+If this token is present, the auto-login process will supply the
+specified string if the remote server requires a password as part
+of the login process.
+Note that if this token is present in the
+.Pa .netrc
+file for any user other
+than
+.Ar anonymous  ,
+.Nm ftp
+will abort the auto-login process if the
+.Pa .netrc
+is readable by
+anyone besides the user.
+.It Ic account Ar string
+Supply an additional account password.
+If this token is present, the auto-login process will supply the
+specified string if the remote server requires an additional
+account password, or the auto-login process will initiate an
+.Dv ACCT
+command if it does not.
+.It Ic macdef Ar name
+Define a macro.
+This token functions like the
+.Nm ftp
+.Ic macdef
+command functions.
+A macro is defined with the specified name; its contents begin with the
+next
+.Pa .netrc
+line and continue until a null line (consecutive new-line
+characters) is encountered.
+If a macro named
+.Ic init
+is defined, it is automatically executed as the last step in the
+auto-login process.
+.El
+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+.Nm Ftp
+utilizes the following environment variables.
+.Bl -tag -width Fl
+.It Ev HOME
+For default location of a
+.Pa .netrc
+file, if one exists.
+.It Ev SHELL
+For default shell.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ftpd 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm ftp
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
+.Sh BUGS
+Correct execution of many commands depends upon proper behavior
+by the remote server.
+.Pp
+An error in the treatment of carriage returns
+in the
+.Bx 4.2
+ascii-mode transfer code
+has been corrected.
+This correction may result in incorrect transfers of binary files
+to and from
+.Bx 4.2
+servers using the ascii type.
+Avoid this problem by using the binary image type.
diff --git a/debian/local/man/ftpd.8 b/debian/local/man/ftpd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e842141
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/ftpd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,300 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1988, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)ftpd.8	8.3 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
+.\"
+.Dd June 1, 1994
+.Dt FTPD 8
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm ftpd
+.Nd
+Internet File Transfer Protocol server 
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm ftpd
+.Op Fl dlADq
+.Op Fl T Ar maxtimeout
+.Op Fl t Ar timeout
+.Op Fl a Ar login-name
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Ftpd
+is the
+Internet File Transfer Protocol
+server process.  The server uses the
+.Tn TCP
+protocol
+and listens at the port specified in the
+.Dq ftp
+service specification; see
+.Xr services 5 .
+.Pp
+Available options:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Fl d
+Debugging information is written to the syslog 
+using LOG_FTP.
+.It Fl l
+Each successful and failed
+.Xr ftp 1
+session is logged using syslog with a facility of LOG_FTP.
+If this option is specified twice, the retrieve (get), store (put), append,
+delete, make directory, remove directory and rename operations and
+their filename arguments are also logged.
+.It Fl A 
+Only anonymous login is allowed.
+.It Fl D
+ftpd enters daemon-mode. That allows ftpd to be run without inetd.
+.It Fl q
+Quiet mode. No information about the version of the ftpd is given to the 
+client.
+.It Fl T
+A client may also request a different timeout period;
+the maximum period allowed may be set to
+.Ar timeout
+seconds with the
+.Fl T
+option.
+The default limit is 2 hours.
+.It Fl t
+The inactivity timeout period is set to
+.Ar timeout
+seconds (the default is 15 minutes).
+.It Fl a
+Give anonymous an other 
+.Ar login-name 
+(anonymous and ftpd will still work).
+.El
+.Pp
+The file
+.Pa /etc/nologin
+can be used to disable ftp access.
+If the file exists,
+.Nm
+displays it and exits.
+If the file
+.Pa /etc/ftpwelcome
+exists,
+.Nm
+prints it before issuing the
+.Dq ready
+message.
+If the file
+.Pa /etc/motd
+exists,
+.Nm
+prints it after a successful login.
+.Pp
+The ftp server currently supports the following ftp requests.
+The case of the requests is ignored.
+.Bl -column "Request" -offset indent
+.It Request Ta "Description"
+.It ABOR Ta "abort previous command"
+.It ACCT Ta "specify account (ignored)"
+.It ALLO Ta "allocate storage (vacuously)"
+.It APPE Ta "append to a file"
+.It CDUP Ta "change to parent of current working directory"
+.It CWD Ta "change working directory"
+.It DELE Ta "delete a file"
+.It HELP Ta "give help information"
+.It LIST Ta "give list files in a directory" Pq Dq Li "ls -lgA"
+.It MKD Ta "make a directory"
+.It MDTM Ta "show last modification time of file"
+.It MODE Ta "specify data transfer" Em mode
+.It NLST Ta "give name list of files in directory"
+.It NOOP Ta "do nothing"
+.It PASS Ta "specify password"
+.It PASV Ta "prepare for server-to-server transfer"
+.It PORT Ta "specify data connection port"
+.It PWD Ta "print the current working directory"
+.It QUIT Ta "terminate session"
+.It REST Ta "restart incomplete transfer"
+.It RETR Ta "retrieve a file"
+.It RMD Ta "remove a directory"
+.It RNFR Ta "specify rename-from file name"
+.It RNTO Ta "specify rename-to file name"
+.It SITE Ta "non-standard commands (see next section)"
+.It SIZE Ta "return size of file"
+.It STAT Ta "return status of server"
+.It STOR Ta "store a file"
+.It STOU Ta "store a file with a unique name"
+.It STRU Ta "specify data transfer" Em structure
+.It SYST Ta "show operating system type of server system"
+.It TYPE Ta "specify data transfer" Em type
+.It USER Ta "specify user name"
+.It XCUP Ta "change to parent of current working directory (deprecated)"
+.It XCWD Ta "change working directory (deprecated)"
+.It XMKD Ta "make a directory (deprecated)"
+.It XPWD Ta "print the current working directory (deprecated)"
+.It XRMD Ta "remove a directory (deprecated)"
+.El
+.Pp
+The following non-standard or
+.Tn UNIX
+specific commands are supported
+by the
+SITE request.
+.Pp
+.Bl -column Request -offset indent
+.It Sy Request Ta Sy Description
+.It UMASK Ta change umask, e.g. ``SITE UMASK 002''
+.It IDLE Ta set idle-timer, e.g. ``SITE IDLE 60''
+.It CHMOD Ta change mode of a file, e.g. ``SITE CHMOD 755 filename''
+.It HELP Ta give help information.
+.El
+.Pp
+The remaining ftp requests specified in Internet RFC 959
+are
+recognized, but not implemented.
+MDTM and SIZE are not specified in RFC 959, but will appear in the
+next updated FTP RFC.
+.Pp
+The ftp server will abort an active file transfer only when the
+ABOR
+command is preceded by a Telnet "Interrupt Process" (IP)
+signal and a Telnet "Synch" signal in the command Telnet stream,
+as described in Internet RFC 959.
+If a
+STAT
+command is received during a data transfer, preceded by a Telnet IP
+and Synch, transfer status will be returned.
+.Pp
+.Nm Ftpd
+interprets file names according to the
+.Dq globbing
+conventions used by
+.Xr csh 1 .
+This allows users to utilize the metacharacters
+.Dq Li \&*?[]{}~ .
+.Pp
+.Nm Ftpd
+authenticates users according to three rules.
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -offset indent
+.It
+The login name must be in the password data base,
+.Pa /etc/passwd ,
+and not have a null password.
+In this case a password must be provided by the client before any
+file operations may be performed.
+.It
+The login name must not appear in the file
+.Pa /etc/ftpusers .
+.It
+The user must have a standard shell returned by
+.Xr getusershell 3 .
+.It
+If the user name is
+.Dq anonymous
+or
+.Dq ftp ,
+an
+anonymous ftp account must be present in the password
+file (user
+.Dq ftp ) .
+In this case the user is allowed
+to log in by specifying any password (by convention an email address for
+the user should be used as the password).
+.El
+.Pp
+In the last case,
+.Nm ftpd
+takes special measures to restrict the client's access privileges.
+The server performs a
+.Xr chroot 2
+to the home directory of the
+.Dq ftp
+user.
+In order that system security is not breached, it is recommended
+that the
+.Dq ftp
+subtree be constructed with care, following these rules:
+.Bl -tag -width "~ftp/pub" -offset indent
+.It Pa ~ftp
+Make the home directory owned by
+.Dq root
+and unwritable by anyone.
+.ne 1i
+.It Pa ~ftp/bin
+Make this directory owned by
+.Dq root
+and unwritable by anyone (mode 555).
+The program
+.Xr ls 1
+must be present to support the list command.
+This program should be mode 111.
+.It Pa ~ftp/etc
+Make this directory owned by
+.Dq root
+and unwritable by anyone (mode 555).
+The files
+.Xr passwd 5
+and
+.Xr group 5
+must be present for the
+.Xr ls
+command to be able to produce owner names rather than numbers.
+The password field in
+.Xr passwd
+is not used, and should not contain real passwords.
+The file
+.Pa motd ,
+if present, will be printed after a successful login.
+These files should be mode 444.
+.It Pa ~ftp/pub
+Make this directory mode 777 and owned by
+.Dq ftp .
+Guests
+can then place files which are to be accessible via the anonymous
+account in this directory.
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /etc/ftpwelcome -compact
+.It Pa /etc/ftpusers
+List of unwelcome/restricted users.
+.It Pa /etc/ftpwelcome
+Welcome notice.
+.It Pa /etc/motd
+Welcome notice after login.
+.It Pa /etc/nologin
+Displayed and access refused.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ftp 1 ,
+.Xr getusershell 3 ,
+.Xr syslogd 8
+.Sh BUGS
+The server must run as the super-user
+to create sockets with privileged port numbers.  It maintains
+an effective user id of the logged in user, reverting to
+the super-user only when binding addresses to sockets.  The
+possible security holes have been extensively
+scrutinized, but are possibly incomplete.
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/inetd.8 b/debian/local/man/inetd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f81d189
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/inetd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,452 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993, 1994
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)inetd.8	8.4 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
+.\"
+.Dd October 21, 2006
+.Dt INETD 8
+.Os BSD 4.4
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm inetd
+.Nd internet
+.Dq super-server
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm inetd
+.Op Fl d
+.Op Fl R Ar rate
+.Op Fl -environment
+.Op Fl -resolve
+.Op Ar configuration_files ...
+.Sh WARNING
+The information in this man page may be inaccurate or incomplete.  The
+authoritative documentation for the
+.Nm inetd
+utility is contained in
+.Pa inetutils.info
+document.  To access it from your command line, type
+.Pp
+\fBinfo inetd\fR
+.Pp
+The online copy of the documentation is available at the following
+address:
+.Pp
+http://www.gnu.org/software/inetutils/manual.
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Nm inetd
+program
+should be run at boot time by
+.Pa /etc/rc
+(see
+.Xr rc 8 ) .
+It then listens for connections on certain
+internet sockets.  When a connection is found on one
+of its sockets, it decides what service the socket
+corresponds to, and invokes a program to service the request.
+The server program is invoked with the service socket
+as its standard input, output and error descriptors.
+After the program is
+finished,
+.Nm inetd
+continues to listen on the socket (except in some cases which
+will be described below).  Essentially,
+.Nm inetd
+allows running one daemon to invoke several others,
+reducing load on the system.
+.Pp
+The options available for
+.Nm inetd:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Fl d, -debug
+Turns on debugging.
+.It Fl -environment
+Pass local and remote address data via environment variables. See
+\fBENVIRONMENT\fP below.
+.It Fl R, -rate Ar rate
+Specifies the maximum number of times a service can be invoked
+in one minute; the default is 40.
+.It Fl -resolve
+Resolve local and remote IP addresses and pass them to the server program
+via \fBTCPLOCALHOST\fP and \fBTCPREMOTEHOST\fP environment variables. See
+\fBENVIRONMENT\fP below. This option implies \fB--environment\fP.
+.It Fl -version
+Shows the version.
+.It Fl -help
+Shows the help.
+.El
+.Pp
+Upon execution,
+.Nm inetd
+reads its configuration information from a configuration
+file on the command line, by default,
+.Pa /etc/inetd.conf and /etc/inetd.d .
+If the configuration pathname is a directory, all the files in the
+directory are read like a configuration file. All of the configuration
+files are read and merged.  There must be an entry for each field in
+the configuration file, with entries for each field separated by a tab
+or a space.  Comments are denoted by a ``#'' at the beginning of a
+line.  The fields of the configuration file are as follows:
+.Pp
+.Bd -unfilled -offset indent -compact
+service name
+socket type
+protocol
+wait/nowait[.max]
+user
+server program
+server program arguments
+.Ed
+.Pp
+There are two types of services that
+.Nm inetd
+can start: standard and TCPMUX.
+A standard service has a well-known port assigned to it;
+it may be a service that implements an official Internet standard or is a
+BSD-specific service.
+As described in
+.Tn RFC 1078 ,
+TCPMUX services are nonstandard services that do not have a
+well-known port assigned to them.
+They are invoked from
+.Nm inetd
+when a program connects to the
+.Dq tcpmux
+well-known port and specifies
+the service name.
+This feature is useful for adding locally-developed servers.
+.Pp
+The
+.Em service-name
+entry is the name of a valid service in
+the file
+.Pa /etc/services .
+For
+.Dq internal
+services (discussed below), the service
+name
+.Em must
+be the official name of the service (that is, the first entry in
+.Pa /etc/services ) .
+For TCPMUX services, the value of the
+.Em service-name
+field consists of the string
+.Dq tcpmux
+followed by a slash and the
+locally-chosen service name.
+The service names listed in
+.Pa /etc/services
+and the name
+.Dq help
+are reserved.
+Try to choose unique names for your TCPMUX services by prefixing them with
+your organization's name and suffixing them with a version number.
+.Pp
+The
+.Em socket-type
+should be one of
+.Dq stream ,
+.Dq dgram ,
+.Dq raw ,
+.Dq rdm ,
+or
+.Dq seqpacket ,
+depending on whether the socket is a stream, datagram, raw,
+reliably delivered message, or sequenced packet socket.
+TCPMUX services must use
+.Dq stream .
+.Pp
+The
+.Em protocol
+must be a valid protocol as given in
+.Pa /etc/protocols .
+Examples might be
+.Dq tcp
+or
+.Dq udp .
+TCPMUX services must use
+.Dq tcp .
+.Pp
+The
+.Em wait/nowait[.max]
+entry specifies whether the server that is invoked by inetd will take over
+the socket associated with the service access point, and thus whether
+.Nm inetd
+should wait for the server to exit before listening for new service
+requests.
+Datagram servers must use
+.Dq wait ,
+as they are always invoked with the original datagram socket bound
+to the specified service address.
+These servers must read at least one datagram from the socket
+before exiting.
+If a datagram server connects
+to its peer, freeing the socket so
+.Nm inetd
+can received further messages on the socket, it is said to be
+a
+.Dq multi-threaded
+server;
+it should read one datagram from the socket and create a new socket
+connected to the peer.
+It should fork, and the parent should then exit
+to allow
+.Nm inetd
+to check for new service requests to spawn new servers.
+Datagram servers which process all incoming datagrams
+on a socket and eventually time out are said to be
+.Dq single-threaded .
+.Xr Comsat 8 ,
+.Pq Xr biff 1
+and
+.Xr talkd 8
+are both examples of the latter type of
+datagram server.
+.Xr Tftpd 8
+is an example of a multi-threaded datagram server.
+The optional
+.Dq max
+suffix (separated from
+.Dq wait
+or
+.Dq nowait
+by a dot) specifies the maximum number of times a service can be invoked
+in one minute; the default is 40.
+If a service exceeds this limit,
+.Nm
+will log the problem
+and stop servicing requests for the specific service for ten minutes.
+See also the
+.Fl R
+option above.
+.Pp
+Servers using stream sockets generally are multi-threaded and
+use the
+.Dq nowait
+entry.
+Connection requests for these services are accepted by
+.Nm inetd ,
+and the server is given only the newly-accepted socket connected
+to a client of the service.
+Most stream-based services operate in this manner.
+Stream-based servers that use
+.Dq wait
+are started with the listening service socket, and must accept
+at least one connection request before exiting.
+Such a server would normally accept and process incoming connection
+requests until a timeout.
+TCPMUX services must use
+.Dq nowait .
+.Pp
+The optional
+.Dq max
+suffix (separated from
+.Dq wait
+or
+.Dq nowait
+by a dot) is a decimal number that specifies the maximum number of server
+instances that may be spawned from
+.Nm inetd
+within an interval of 60 seconds.  It overrides the settings of the
+\fB-R\fP command line option. 
+.Pp
+The
+.Em user
+entry should contain the user name of the user as whom the server
+should run.  This allows for servers to be given less permission
+than root.
+.Pp
+The
+.Em server-program
+entry should contain the pathname of the program which is to be
+executed by
+.Nm inetd
+when a request is found on its socket.  If
+.Nm inetd
+provides this service internally, this entry should
+be
+.Dq internal .
+.Pp
+The
+.Em server program arguments
+should be just as arguments
+normally are, starting with argv[0], which is the name of
+the program.  If the service is provided internally, the
+word
+.Dq internal
+should take the place of this entry.
+.Pp
+The
+.Nm inetd
+program
+provides several
+.Dq trivial
+services internally by use of
+routines within itself.  These services are
+.Dq echo ,
+.Dq discard ,
+.Dq chargen
+(character generator),
+.Dq daytime
+(human readable time), and
+.Dq time
+(machine readable time,
+in the form of the number of seconds since midnight, January
+1, 1900).  All of these services are tcp based.  For
+details of these services, consult the appropriate
+.Tn RFC
+from the Network Information Center.
+.Pp
+The
+.Nm inetd
+program
+rereads its configuration file when it receives a hangup signal,
+.Dv SIGHUP .
+Services may be added, deleted or modified when the configuration file
+is reread.
+.Sh TCPMUX
+.Pp
+.Tn RFC 1078
+describes the TCPMUX protocol:
+``A TCP client connects to a foreign host on TCP port 1.  It sends the
+service name followed by a carriage-return line-feed <CRLF>.  The
+service name is never case sensitive.  The server replies with a
+single character indicating positive (+) or negative (\-)
+acknowledgment, immediately followed by an optional message of
+explanation, terminated with a <CRLF>.  If the reply was positive,
+the selected protocol begins; otherwise the connection is closed.''
+The program is passed the TCP connection as file descriptors 0 and 1.
+.Pp
+If the TCPMUX service name begins with a ``+'',
+.Nm inetd
+returns the positive reply for the program.
+This allows you to invoke programs that use stdin/stdout
+without putting any special server code in them.
+.Pp
+The special service name
+.Dq help
+causes
+.Nm inetd
+to list TCPMUX services in
+.Pa inetd.conf .
+.ne 1i
+.Sh "ENVIRONMENT"
+If a connection is made with a streaming protocol (TCP) and if
+\fB--environment\fP option has been given, inetd will set
+the following environment variables before starting the program:
+.Pp
+\fBPROTO\fP: always "TCP".
+.Pp
+\fBTCPLOCALIP\fP: the local IP address of the interface which accepted the connection.
+.Pp
+\fBTCPLOCALPORT\fP: the port number on which the TCP connection was established.
+.Pp
+\fBTCPREMOTEIP\fP: the IP address of the remote client.
+.Pp
+\fBTCPREMOTEPORT\fP: the port number on the client side of the TCP connection.
+.Pp
+In addition, if given the \fB--remote\fP option,
+.Nm inetd
+will set the following environment variables:
+.Pp
+\fBTCPLOCALHOST\fP: the DNS name of \fITCPLOCALIP\fR.
+.Pp
+\fBTCPREMOTEHOST\fP: the DNS name of \fITCPREMOTEIP\fR.
+.Sh "EXAMPLES"
+.Pp
+Here are several example service entries for the various types of services:
+.Bd -literal
+ftp           stream  tcp   nowait root  /usr/libexec/ftpd       ftpd -l
+ntalk         dgram   udp   wait   root  /usr/libexec/ntalkd     ntalkd
+tcpmux/+date  stream  tcp   nowait guest /bin/date               date
+tcpmux/phonebook stream tcp nowait guest /usr/local/bin/phonebook phonebook
+.Ed
+.Sh "ERROR MESSAGES"
+The
+.Nm inetd
+server
+logs error messages using
+.Xr syslog 3 .
+Important error messages and their explanations are:
+.Bd -literal
+\fIservice\fP/\fIprotocol\fP server failing (looping), service terminated.
+.Ed
+The number of requests for the specified service in the past minute
+exceeded the limit. The limit exists to prevent a broken program
+or a malicious user from swamping the system.
+This message may occur for several reasons:
+1) there are lots of hosts requesting the service within a short time period,
+2) a 'broken' client program is requesting the service too frequently,
+3) a malicious user is running a program to invoke the service in
+a 'denial of service' attack, or
+4) the invoked service program has an error that causes clients
+to retry quickly.
+Use the
+.Op Fl R
+option,
+as described above, to change the rate limit.
+Once the limit is reached, the service will be
+reenabled automatically in 10 minutes.
+.sp
+.Bd -literal
+\fIservice\fP/\fIprotocol\fP: No such user '\fIuser\fP', service ignored
+\fIservice\fP/\fIprotocol\fP: getpwnam: \fIuser\fP: No such user
+.Ed
+No entry for
+.Em user
+exists in the
+.Pa passwd
+file. The first message
+occurs when
+.Nm inetd
+(re)reads the configuration file. The second message occurs when the
+service is invoked.
+.sp
+.Bd -literal
+\fIservice\fP: can't set uid \fInumber\fP
+\fIservice\fP: can't set gid \fInumber\fP
+.Ed
+The user or group ID for the entry's
+.Em user
+is invalid.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr comsat 8 ,
+.Xr fingerd 8 ,
+.Xr ftpd 8 ,
+.Xr rexecd 8 ,
+.Xr rlogind 8 ,
+.Xr rshd 8 ,
+.Xr telnetd 8 ,
+.Xr tftpd 8
+.Sh BUGS
+The environment variables (see \fBENVIRONMENT\fP) are set only for
+TCP IPv4 nowait connections.
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.3 .
+TCPMUX is based on code and documentation by Mark Lottor.
diff --git a/debian/local/man/logger.1 b/debian/local/man/logger.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..539fc57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/logger.1
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)logger.1	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/6/93
+.\"
+.Dd June 6, 1993
+.Dt LOGGER 1
+.Os BSD 4.3
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm logger
+.Nd make entries in the system log
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm logger
+.Op Fl is
+.Op Fl f Ar file
+.Op Fl p Ar pri
+.Op Fl t Ar tag
+.Op Ar message ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Logger
+provides a shell command interface to the
+.Xr syslog  3
+system log module.
+.Pp
+Options:
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "message"
+.It Fl i
+Log the process id of the logger process
+with each line.
+.It Fl s
+Log the message to standard error, as well as the system log.
+.It Fl f Ar file
+Log the specified file.
+.It Fl p Ar pri
+Enter the message with the specified priority.
+The priority may be specified numerically or as a ``facility.level''
+pair.
+For example, ``\-p local3.info'' logs the message(s) as
+.Ar info Ns rmational
+level in the
+.Ar local3
+facility.
+The default is ``user.notice.''
+.It Fl t Ar tag
+Mark every line in the log with the specified
+.Ar tag  .
+.It Ar message
+Write the message to log; if not specified, and the
+.Fl f
+flag is not
+provided, standard input is logged.
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Nm logger
+utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs.
+.Sh EXAMPLES
+.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
+logger System rebooted
+
+logger \-p local0.notice \-t HOSTIDM \-f /dev/idmc
+.Ed
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr syslog 3 ,
+.Xr syslogd 8
+.Sh STANDARDS
+The
+.Nm logger
+command is expected to be
+.St -p1003.2
+compatible.
diff --git a/debian/local/man/ls.1 b/debian/local/man/ls.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04231ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/ls.1
@@ -0,0 +1,446 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ls.1,v 1.23 2000/03/24 21:41:08 aaron Exp $
+.\"	$NetBSD: ls.1,v 1.14 1995/12/05 02:44:01 jtc Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1994
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+.\" the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)ls.1	8.7 (Berkeley) 7/29/94
+.\"
+.Dd July 29, 1994
+.Dt LS 1
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm ls
+.Nd list directory contents
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm ls
+.Op Fl 1ACFLRSTWacdfgiklmnopqrstux
+.Op Ar file ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+For each operand that names a
+.Ar file
+of a type other than
+directory,
+.Nm
+displays its name as well as any requested,
+associated information.
+For each operand that names a
+.Ar file
+of type directory,
+.Nm
+displays the names of files contained
+within that directory, as well as any requested, associated
+information.
+.Pp
+If no operands are given, the contents of the current
+directory are displayed.
+If more than one operand is given,
+non-directory operands are displayed first; directory
+and non-directory operands are sorted separately and in
+lexicographical order.
+.Pp
+The options are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width indent
+.It Fl A
+List all entries except for
+.Dq \&.
+and
+.Dq \&.. .
+Always set for the super-user.
+.It Fl C
+Force multi-column output; this is the default when output is to a terminal.
+.It Fl F
+Display a slash
+.Pq Sq /
+immediately after each pathname that is a directory,
+an asterisk
+.Pq Sq \&*
+after each that is executable,
+an at sign
+.Pq Sq @
+after each symbolic link,
+a percent sign
+.Pq Sq %
+after each whiteout,
+an equal sign
+.Pq Sq =
+after each socket,
+and a vertical bar
+.Pq Sq \&|
+after each that is a FIFO.
+.It Fl L
+If argument is a symbolic link, list the file or directory the link references
+rather than the link itself.
+.It Fl R
+Recursively list subdirectories encountered.
+.It Fl S
+Sort by size, largest file first.
+.It Fl T
+Display complete time information for the file, including
+month, day, hour, minute, second, and year.
+This option has no effect unless one of the long format
+.Pq Fl l , Fl n
+options is also specified.
+.It Fl W
+Display whiteouts when scanning directories.
+.It Fl a
+Include directory entries whose names begin with a
+dot
+.Pq Sq \&. .
+.It Fl c
+Use time file's status was last changed instead of last modification
+time for sorting
+.Pq Fl t
+or printing
+.Pq Fl l , Fl n .
+.It Fl d
+Directories are listed as plain files (not searched recursively) and
+symbolic links in the argument list are not indirected through.
+.It Fl f
+Output is not sorted.
+.It Fl g
+Does nothing; kept for compatibility with older versions of
+.Xr ls 1 .
+.It Fl i
+For each file, print its inode number.
+.It Fl k
+Modifies the
+.Fl s
+option, causing the sizes to be reported in kilobytes.
+Overrides any value specified by the
+.Ev BLOCKSIZE
+environment variable.
+.It Fl l
+(The lowercase letter
+.Dq ell. Ns )
+List in long format (see below).
+If the output is to a terminal, a total sum of all file
+sizes is output on a line before the long listing.
+.It Fl m
+Stream output format; list files across the page, separated by commas.
+.It Fl n
+List in long format as in
+.Fl l ,
+but retain user and group IDs in a numeric format.
+.It Fl o
+Include the file flags in a long format
+.Pq Fl l , Fl n
+output.
+.It Fl p
+Display a slash
+.Pq Sq \&/
+immediately after each pathname that is a directory.
+.It Fl q
+Force printing of non-graphic characters in file names as
+the character
+.Dq ? ;
+this is the default when output is to a terminal.
+.It Fl r
+Reverse the order of the sort to get reverse
+lexicographical order or the smallest or oldest entries first.
+.It Fl s
+Display the number of file system blocks actually used by each file,
+where partial units are rounded up to the next integer value.
+Blocks are 512 bytes unless overridden by the
+.Fl k
+flag or
+.Ev BLOCKSIZE
+environment variable.
+.It Fl t
+Sort by time modified (most recently modified
+first) before sorting the operands in lexicographical
+order.
+.It Fl u
+Use file's last access time
+instead of last modification time
+for sorting
+.Pq Fl t
+or printing
+.Pq Fl l , Fl n .
+.It Fl x
+Multi-column output sorted across the page rather than down the page.
+.It Fl \&1
+(The numeric digit
+.Dq one. Ns )
+Force output to be one entry per line.
+This is the default when
+output is not to a terminal.
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Fl 1 ,
+.Fl C ,
+.Fl l ,
+and
+.Fl n
+options all override each other; the last one specified determines
+the format used.
+.Pp
+The
+.Fl c
+and
+.Fl u
+options override each other; the last one specified determines
+the file time used.
+The
+.Fl f
+option overrides any occurrence of either.
+.Pp
+By default,
+.Nm
+lists one entry per line to standard
+output; the exceptions are to terminals or when the
+.Fl C
+or
+.Fl m
+options are specified.
+.Pp
+File information is displayed with one or more
+<blank>s separating the information associated with the
+.Fl i ,
+.Fl s ,
+.Fl l ,
+and
+.Fl n
+options.
+.Ss The Long Format
+If the
+.Fl l
+or
+.Fl n
+options are given, the following information
+is displayed for each file:
+mode,
+number of links,
+owner,
+group,
+size in bytes,
+time of last modification
+.Pq Dq mmm dd HH:MM ,
+and the pathname.
+In addition, for each directory whose contents are displayed, the first
+line displayed is the total number of blocks used by the files in the
+directory.
+Blocks are 512 bytes unless overridden by the
+.Fl k
+option or
+.Ev BLOCKSIZE
+environment variable.
+.Pp
+If the owner or group name is not a known user or group name, respectively,
+or the
+.Fl n
+option is given, the numeric ID is displayed.
+.Pp
+If the file is a character special or block special file,
+the major and minor device numbers for the file are displayed
+in the size field.
+.Pp
+If the
+.Fl T
+option is given, the time of last modification is displayed using the
+format
+.Dq mmm dd HH:MM:SS CCYY .
+.Pp
+If the file is a symbolic link, the pathname of the
+linked-to file is preceded by
+.Dq \-> .
+.Pp
+The file mode printed under the
+.Fl l
+or
+.Fl n
+options consists of the entry type, owner permissions, and group
+permissions.
+The entry type character describes the type of file, as follows:
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width 4n -offset indent -compact
+.It Sy b
+block special file
+.It Sy c
+character special file
+.It Sy d
+directory
+.It Sy l
+symbolic link
+.It Sy s
+socket link
+.It Sy p
+.Tn FIFO
+.It Sy w
+whiteout
+.It Sy \-
+regular file
+.El
+.Pp
+The next three fields
+are three characters each:
+owner permissions,
+group permissions, and
+other permissions.
+Each field has three character positions:
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -offset indent -compact
+.It
+If
+.Sy r ,
+the file is readable; if
+.Sy \- ,
+it is not readable.
+.It
+If
+.Sy w ,
+the file is writable; if
+.Sy \- ,
+it is not writable.
+.It
+The first of the following that applies:
+.Bl -tag -width 4n -offset indent
+.It Sy S
+If in the owner permissions, the file is not executable and
+set-user-ID mode is set.
+If in the group permissions, the file is not executable
+and set-group-ID mode is set.
+.It Sy s
+If in the owner permissions, the file is executable
+and set-user-ID mode is set.
+If in the group permissions, the file is executable
+and setgroup-ID mode is set.
+.It Sy x
+The file is executable or the directory is
+searchable.
+.It Sy \-
+The file is neither readable, writable, executable,
+nor set-user-ID, nor set-group-ID, nor sticky (see below).
+.El
+.Pp
+These next two apply only to the third character in the last group
+(other permissions):
+.Bl -tag -width 4n -offset indent
+.It Sy T
+The sticky bit is set
+(mode
+.Li 1000 ) ,
+but neither executable nor searchable (see
+.Xr chmod 1
+or
+.Xr sticky 8 ) .
+.It Sy t
+The sticky bit is set (mode
+.Li 1000 ) ,
+and is searchable or executable
+(see
+.Xr chmod 1
+or
+.Xr sticky 8 ) .
+.El
+.El
+.Pp
+In addition, if the
+.Fl o
+option is specified, the file flags (see
+.Xr chflags 1 )
+are displayed as comma-separated strings in front of the file size,
+abbreviated as follows:
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width 8n -offset indent -compact
+.It \&-
+no flags
+.It uappnd
+user append-only
+.It uchg
+user immutable
+.It nodump
+do not dump
+.It opaque
+opaque file
+.It sappnd
+system append-only
+.It arch
+archived
+.It schg
+system immutable
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Nm
+utility exits 0 on success or >0 if an error occurred.
+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+The following environment variables affect the execution of
+.Nm ls :
+.Bl -tag -width BLOCKSIZE
+.It Ev BLOCKSIZE
+If the environment variable
+.Ev BLOCKSIZE
+is set, and the
+.Fl k
+option is not specified, the block counts
+(see
+.Fl s )
+will be displayed in units of that size block.
+.It COLUMNS
+If this variable contains a string representing a
+decimal integer, it is used as the
+column position width for displaying
+multiple-text-column output.
+The
+.Nm
+utility calculates how
+many pathname text columns to display
+based on the width provided
+(see
+.Fl C ) .
+.It Ev TZ
+The timezone to use when displaying dates.
+See
+.Xr environ 7
+for more information.
+.El
+.Sh COMPATIBILITY
+The group field is now automatically included in the long listing for
+files in order to be compatible with the
+.St -p1003.2
+specification.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr chflags 1 ,
+.Xr chmod 1 ,
+.Xr symlink 7 ,
+.Xr sticky 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+An
+.Nm
+utility appeared in
+.At v5 .
+.Sh STANDARDS
+The
+.Nm
+utility is expected to be a superset of the
+.St -p1003.2
+specification.
diff --git a/debian/local/man/ping.8 b/debian/local/man/ping.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2382365
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/ping.8
@@ -0,0 +1,328 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)ping.8	8.3 (Berkeley) 4/28/95
+.\"
+.Dd April 28, 1995
+.Dt PING 8
+.Os BSD 4.3
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm ping
+.Nd send
+.Tn ICMP ECHO_REQUEST
+packets to network hosts
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm ping
+.Op Fl Rdfnqrv
+.Op Fl c Ar count
+.Op Fl i Ar wait
+.Op Fl l Ar preload
+.Op Fl p Ar pattern
+.Op Fl s Ar packetsize
+.Ar host
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Ping
+uses the
+.Tn ICMP
+protocol's mandatory
+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
+datagram to elicit an
+.Tn ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE
+from a host or gateway.
+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
+datagrams (``pings'') have an IP and
+.Tn ICMP
+header,
+followed by a
+.Dq struct timeval
+and then an arbitrary number of ``pad'' bytes used to fill out the
+packet.
+The options are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Fl c Ar count
+Stop after sending (and receiving)
+.Ar count
+.Tn ECHO_RESPONSE
+packets.
+.It Fl d
+Set the
+.Dv SO_DEBUG
+option on the socket being used.
+.It Fl f
+Flood ping.
+Outputs packets as fast as they come back or one hundred times per second,
+whichever is more.
+For every
+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
+sent a period ``.'' is printed, while for every
+.Tn ECHO_REPLY
+received a backspace is printed.
+This provides a rapid display of how many packets are being dropped.
+Only the super-user may use this option.
+.Bf -emphasis
+This can be very hard on a network and should be used with caution.
+.Ef
+.It Fl i Ar wait
+Wait
+.Ar wait
+seconds
+.Em between sending each packet .
+The default is to wait for one second between each packet.
+This option is incompatible with the
+.Fl f
+option.
+.It Fl l Ar preload
+If
+.Ar preload
+is specified,
+.Nm ping
+sends that many packets as fast as possible before falling into its normal
+mode of behavior.
+.It Fl n
+Numeric output only.
+No attempt will be made to lookup symbolic names for host addresses.
+.It Fl p Ar pattern
+You may specify up to 16 ``pad'' bytes to fill out the packet you send.
+This is useful for diagnosing data-dependent problems in a network.
+For example,
+.Dq Li \-p ff
+will cause the sent packet to be filled with all
+ones.
+.It Fl q
+Quiet output.
+Nothing is displayed except the summary lines at startup time and
+when finished.
+.It Fl R
+Record route.
+Includes the
+.Tn RECORD_ROUTE
+option in the
+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
+packet and displays
+the route buffer on returned packets.
+Note that the IP header is only large enough for nine such routes.
+Many hosts ignore or discard this option.
+.It Fl r
+Bypass the normal routing tables and send directly to a host on an attached
+network.
+If the host is not on a directly-attached network, an error is returned.
+This option can be used to ping a local host through an interface
+that has no route through it (e.g., after the interface was dropped by
+.Xr routed 8 ) .
+.It Fl s Ar packetsize
+Specifies the number of data bytes to be sent.  
+The default is 56, which translates into 64
+.Tn ICMP
+data bytes when combined
+with the 8 bytes of
+.Tn ICMP
+header data.
+.It Fl v
+Verbose output.
+.Tn ICMP
+packets other than
+.Tn ECHO_RESPONSE
+that are received are listed.
+.El
+.Pp
+When using
+.Nm ping
+for fault isolation, it should first be run on the local host, to verify
+that the local network interface is up and running.
+Then, hosts and gateways further and further away should be ``pinged''.
+Round-trip times and packet loss statistics are computed.
+If duplicate packets are received, they are not included in the packet
+loss calculation, although the round trip time of these packets is used
+in calculating the minimum/average/maximum round-trip time numbers.
+When the specified number of packets have been sent (and received) or
+if the program is terminated with a
+.Dv SIGINT ,
+a brief summary is displayed.
+.Pp
+This program is intended for use in network testing, measurement and
+management.
+Because of the load it can impose on the network, it is unwise to use
+.Nm ping
+during normal operations or from automated scripts.
+.Sh ICMP PACKET DETAILS
+An IP header without options is 20 bytes.
+An
+.Tn ICMP
+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
+packet contains an additional 8 bytes worth
+of
+.Tn ICMP
+header followed by an arbitrary amount of data.
+When a
+.Ar packetsize
+is given, this indicated the size of this extra piece of data (the
+default is 56).
+Thus the amount of data received inside of an IP packet of type
+.Tn ICMP
+.Tn ECHO_REPLY
+will always be 8 bytes more than the requested data space
+(the
+.Tn ICMP
+header).
+.Pp
+If the data space is at least eight bytes large,
+.Nm ping
+uses the first eight bytes of this space to include a timestamp which
+it uses in the computation of round trip times.
+If less than eight bytes of pad are specified, no round trip times are
+given.
+.Sh DUPLICATE AND DAMAGED PACKETS
+.Nm Ping
+will report duplicate and damaged packets.
+Duplicate packets should never occur, and seem to be caused by
+inappropriate link-level retransmissions.
+Duplicates may occur in many situations and are rarely (if ever) a
+good sign, although the presence of low levels of duplicates may not
+always be cause for alarm.
+.Pp
+Damaged packets are obviously serious cause for alarm and often
+indicate broken hardware somewhere in the
+.Nm ping
+packet's path (in the network or in the hosts).
+.Sh TRYING DIFFERENT DATA PATTERNS
+The (inter)network layer should never treat packets differently depending
+on the data contained in the data portion.
+Unfortunately, data-dependent problems have been known to sneak into
+networks and remain undetected for long periods of time.
+In many cases the particular pattern that will have problems is something
+that doesn't have sufficient ``transitions'', such as all ones or all
+zeros, or a pattern right at the edge, such as almost all zeros.
+It isn't necessarily enough to specify a data pattern of all zeros (for
+example) on the command line because the pattern that is of interest is
+at the data link level, and the relationship between what you type and
+what the controllers transmit can be complicated.
+.Pp
+This means that if you have a data-dependent problem you will probably
+have to do a lot of testing to find it.
+If you are lucky, you may manage to find a file that either can't be sent
+across your network or that takes much longer to transfer than other
+similar length files.
+You can then examine this file for repeated patterns that you can test
+using the
+.Fl p
+option of
+.Nm ping .
+.Sh TTL DETAILS
+The
+.Tn TTL
+value of an IP packet represents the maximum number of IP routers
+that the packet can go through before being thrown away.
+In current practice you can expect each router in the Internet to decrement
+the
+.Tn TTL
+field by exactly one.
+.Pp
+The
+.Tn TCP/IP
+specification states that the
+.Tn TTL
+field for
+.Tn TCP
+packets should
+be set to 60, but many systems use smaller values (4.3
+.Tn BSD
+uses 30, 4.2 used
+15).
+.Pp
+The maximum possible value of this field is 255, and most Unix systems set
+the
+.Tn TTL
+field of
+.Tn ICMP ECHO_REQUEST
+packets to 255.
+This is why you will find you can ``ping'' some hosts, but not reach them
+with
+.Xr telnet 1
+or
+.Xr ftp 1 .
+.Pp
+In normal operation ping prints the ttl value from the packet it receives.
+When a remote system receives a ping packet, it can do one of three things
+with the
+.Tn TTL
+field in its response:
+.Bl -bullet
+.It
+Not change it; this is what Berkeley Unix systems did before the
+.Bx 4.3 tahoe
+release.
+In this case the
+.Tn TTL
+value in the received packet will be 255 minus the
+number of routers in the round-trip path.
+.It
+Set it to 255; this is what current Berkeley Unix systems do.
+In this case the
+.Tn TTL
+value in the received packet will be 255 minus the
+number of routers in the path
+.Xr from
+the remote system
+.Em to
+the
+.Nm ping Ns Em ing
+host.
+.It
+Set it to some other value.
+Some machines use the same value for
+.Tn ICMP
+packets that they use for
+.Tn TCP
+packets, for example either 30 or 60.
+Others may use completely wild values.
+.El
+.Sh BUGS
+Many Hosts and Gateways ignore the
+.Tn RECORD_ROUTE
+option.
+.Pp
+The maximum IP header length is too small for options like
+.Tn RECORD_ROUTE
+to
+be completely useful.
+There's not much that that can be done about this, however.
+.Pp
+Flood pinging is not recommended in general, and flood pinging the
+broadcast address should only be done under very controlled conditions.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr netstat 1 ,
+.Xr ifconfig 8 ,
+.Xr routed 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/rcp.1 b/debian/local/man/rcp.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6283dbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/rcp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)rcp.1	8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93
+.\"
+.Dd May 31, 1993
+.Dt RCP 1
+.Os BSD 4.3r
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rcp
+.Nd remote file copy
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm rcp
+.Op Fl Kpx
+.Op Fl k Ar realm
+.Ar file1 file2
+.Nm rcp
+.Op Fl Kprx
+.Op Fl k Ar realm
+.Ar file ...
+.Ar directory
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Rcp
+copies files between machines.  Each
+.Ar file
+or
+.Ar directory
+argument is either a remote file name of the
+form ``rname@rhost:path'', or a local file name (containing no `:' characters,
+or a `/' before any `:'s).
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width flag
+.It Fl K
+The
+.Fl K
+option turns off all Kerberos authentication.
+.It Fl k
+The
+.Fl k
+option requests
+.Nm rcp
+to obtain tickets
+for the remote host in realm
+.Ar realm
+instead of the remote host's realm as determined by
+.Xr krb_realmofhost  3  .
+.It Fl p
+The
+.Fl p
+option causes
+.Nm rcp
+to attempt to preserve (duplicate) in its copies the modification
+times and modes of the source files, ignoring the
+.Ar umask  .
+By default, the mode and owner of
+.Ar file2
+are preserved if it already existed; otherwise the mode of the source file
+modified by the
+.Xr umask  2
+on the destination host is used.
+.It Fl r
+If any of the source files are directories,
+.Nm rcp
+copies each subtree rooted at that name; in this case
+the destination must be a directory.
+.It Fl x
+The
+.Fl x
+option turns on
+.Tn DES
+encryption for all data passed by
+.Nm rcp .
+This may impact response time and
+.Tn CPU
+utilization, but provides
+increased security.
+.El
+.Pp
+If
+.Ar path
+is not a full path name, it is interpreted relative to
+the login directory of the specified user
+.Ar ruser
+on
+.Ar rhost  ,
+or your current user name if no other remote user name is specified.
+A
+.Ar path
+on a remote host may be quoted (using \e, ", or \(aa)
+so that the metacharacters are interpreted remotely.
+.Pp
+.Nm Rcp
+does not prompt for passwords; it performs remote execution
+via
+.Xr rsh  1  ,
+and requires the same authorization.
+.Pp
+.Nm Rcp
+handles third party copies, where neither source nor target files
+are on the current machine.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr cp 1 ,
+.Xr ftp 1 ,
+.Xr rsh 1 ,
+.Xr rlogin 1
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm rcp
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
+The version of
+.Nm rcp
+described here
+has been reimplemented with Kerberos in
+.Bx 4.3 Reno .
+.Sh BUGS
+Doesn't detect all cases where the target of a copy might
+be a file in cases where only a directory should be legal.
+.Pp
+Is confused by any output generated by commands in a
+.Pa \&.login ,
+.Pa \&.profile ,
+or
+.Pa \&.cshrc
+file on the remote host.
+.Pp
+The destination user and hostname may have to be specified as
+``rhost.rname'' when the destination machine is running the
+.Bx 4.2
+version of
+.Nm rcp  .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/rexecd.8 b/debian/local/man/rexecd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0790d3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/rexecd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)rexecd.8	8.3 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
+.\"
+.Dd June 1, 1994
+.Dt REXECD 8
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rexecd
+.Nd remote execution server
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm rexecd
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Rexecd
+is the server for the
+.Xr rexec 3
+routine.  The server provides remote execution facilities
+with authentication based on user names and
+passwords.
+.Pp
+.Nm Rexecd
+listens for service requests at the port indicated in
+the ``exec'' service specification; see
+.Xr services 5 .
+When a service request is received the following protocol
+is initiated:
+.Bl -enum
+.It
+The server reads characters from the socket up
+to a NUL
+.Pq Ql \e0
+byte.  The resultant string is
+interpreted as an
+.Tn ASCII
+number, base 10.
+.It
+If the number received in step 1 is non-zero,
+it is interpreted as the port number of a secondary
+stream to be used for the
+.Em stderr .
+A second connection is then created to the specified
+port on the client's machine.
+.It
+A NUL terminated user name of at most 16 characters
+is retrieved on the initial socket.
+.It
+A NUL terminated, unencrypted password of at most
+16 characters is retrieved on the initial socket.
+.It
+A NUL terminated command to be passed to a
+shell is retrieved on the initial socket.  The length of
+the command is limited by the upper bound on the size of
+the system's argument list.
+.It
+.Nm Rexecd
+then validates the user as is done at login time
+and, if the authentication was successful, changes
+to the user's home directory, and establishes the user
+and group protections of the user.
+If any of these steps fail the connection is
+aborted with a diagnostic message returned.
+.It
+A NUL byte is returned on the initial socket
+and the command line is passed to the normal login
+shell of the user.  The
+shell inherits the network connections established
+by
+.Nm rexecd .
+.El
+.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
+Except for the last one listed below,
+all diagnostic messages are returned on the initial socket,
+after which any network connections are closed.
+An error is indicated by a leading byte with a value of
+1 (0 is returned in step 7 above upon successful completion
+of all the steps prior to the command execution).
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Sy username too long
+The name is
+longer than 16 characters.
+.It Sy password too long
+The password is longer than 16 characters.
+.It Sy command too long
+The command line passed exceeds the size of the argument
+list (as configured into the system).
+.It Sy Login incorrect.
+No password file entry for the user name existed.
+.It Sy Password incorrect.
+The wrong password was supplied.
+.ne 1i
+.It Sy \&No remote directory.
+The
+.Xr chdir
+command to the home directory failed.
+.It Sy Try again.
+A
+.Xr fork
+by the server failed.
+.It Sy <shellname>: ...
+The user's login shell could not be started.
+This message is returned
+on the connection associated with the
+.Em stderr ,
+and is not preceded by a flag byte.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr rexec 3
+.Sh BUGS
+Indicating ``Login incorrect'' as opposed to ``Password incorrect''
+is a security breach which allows people to probe a system for users
+with null passwords.
+.Pp
+A facility to allow all data and password exchanges to be encrypted should be
+present.
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/rlogin.1 b/debian/local/man/rlogin.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98e6751
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/rlogin.1
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)rlogin.1	8.2 (Berkeley) 4/29/95
+.\"
+.Dd April 29, 1995
+.Dt RLOGIN 1
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rlogin
+.Nd remote login
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm rlogin
+.Op Fl 8EKLdx
+.Op Fl e Ar char
+.Op Fl k Ar realm
+.Op Fl l Ar username
+.Ar host
+.Nm rlogin
+.Op Fl 8EKLdx
+.Op Fl e Ar char
+.Op Fl k Ar realm
+.Ar username@host
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Rlogin
+starts a terminal session on a remote host
+.Ar host  .
+.Pp
+.Nm Rlogin
+first attempts to use the Kerberos authorization mechanism, described below.
+If the remote host does not supporting Kerberos the standard Berkeley
+.Pa rhosts
+authorization mechanism is used.
+The options are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width flag
+.It Fl 8
+The
+.Fl 8
+option allows an eight-bit input data path at all times; otherwise
+parity bits are stripped except when the remote side's stop and start
+characters are other than
+^S/^Q .
+.It Fl E
+The
+.Fl E
+option stops any character from being recognized as an escape character.
+When used with the
+.Fl 8
+option, this provides a completely transparent connection.
+.It Fl K
+The
+.Fl K
+option turns off all Kerberos authentication.
+.It Fl L
+The
+.Fl L
+option allows the rlogin session to be run in ``litout'' (see
+.Xr tty 4 )
+mode.
+.It Fl d
+The
+.Fl d
+option turns on socket debugging (see
+.Xr setsockopt 2 )
+on the TCP sockets used for communication with the remote host.
+.It Fl e
+The
+.Fl e
+option allows user specification of the escape character, which is
+``~'' by default.
+This specification may be as a literal character, or as an octal
+value in the form \ennn.
+.It Fl k
+The
+.FL k
+option requests rlogin to obtain tickets for the remote host
+in realm
+.Ar realm
+instead of the remote host's realm as determined by
+.Xr krb_realmofhost  3  .
+.It Fl x
+The
+.Fl x
+option turns on
+.Tn DES
+encryption for all data passed via the
+rlogin session.
+This may impact response time and
+.Tn CPU
+utilization, but provides
+increased security.
+.El
+.Pp
+A line of the form ``<escape char>.'' disconnects from the remote host.
+Similarly, the line ``<escape char>^Z'' will suspend the
+.Nm rlogin
+session, and ``<escape char><delayed-suspend char>'' suspends the
+send portion of the rlogin, but allows output from the remote system.
+By default, the tilde (``~'') character is the escape character, and
+normally control-Y (``^Y'') is the delayed-suspend character.
+.Pp
+All echoing takes place at the remote site, so that (except for delays)
+the
+.Nm rlogin
+is transparent.
+Flow control via ^S/^Q and flushing of input and output on interrupts
+are handled properly.
+.Sh KERBEROS AUTHENTICATION
+Each user may have a private authorization list in the file
+.Pa .klogin
+in their home directory.
+Each line in this file should contain a Kerberos principal name of the
+form
+.Ar principal.instance@realm  .
+If the originating user is authenticated to one of the principals named
+in
+.Pa .klogin ,
+access is granted to the account.
+The principal
+.Ar accountname.@localrealm
+is granted access if
+there is no
+.Pa .klogin
+file.
+Otherwise a login and password will be prompted for on the remote machine
+as in
+.Xr login  1  .
+To avoid certain security problems, the
+.Pa .klogin
+file must be owned by
+the remote user.
+.Pp
+If Kerberos authentication fails, a warning message is printed and the
+standard Berkeley
+.Nm rlogin
+is used instead.
+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+The following environment variable is utilized by
+.Nm rlogin :
+.Bl -tag -width TERM
+.It Ev TERM
+Determines the user's terminal type.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr rsh 1 ,
+.Xr kerberos 3 ,
+.Xr krb_sendauth 3 ,
+.Xr krb_realmofhost 3
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm rlogin
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
+.Sh BUGS
+.Nm Rlogin
+will be replaced by
+.Xr telnet  1
+in the near future.
+.Pp
+More of the environment should be propagated.
diff --git a/debian/local/man/rlogind.8 b/debian/local/man/rlogind.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..096c75f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/rlogind.8
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1989, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)rlogind.8	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93
+.\"
+.Dd June 4, 1993
+.Dt RLOGIND 8
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rlogind
+.Nd remote login server
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm rlogind
+.Op Fl aln
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Rlogind
+is the server for the
+.Xr rlogin 1
+program.  The server provides a remote login facility
+with authentication based on privileged port numbers from trusted hosts.
+.Pp
+Options supported by
+.Nm rlogind :
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Fl a
+Ask hostname for verification.
+.It Fl l
+Prevent any authentication based on the user's
+.Dq Pa .rhosts
+file, unless the user is logging in as the superuser.
+.It Fl n
+Disable keep-alive messages.
+.El
+.Pp
+.Nm Rlogind
+listens for service requests at the port indicated in
+the ``login'' service specification; see
+.Xr services 5 .
+When a service request is received the following protocol
+is initiated:
+.Bl -enum
+.It
+The server checks the client's source port.
+If the port is not in the range 512-1023, the server
+aborts the connection.
+.It
+The server checks the client's source address
+and requests the corresponding host name (see
+.Xr gethostbyaddr 3 ,
+.Xr hosts 5
+and
+.Xr named 8 ) .
+If the hostname cannot be determined,
+the dot-notation representation of the host address is used.
+If the hostname is in the same domain as the server (according to
+the last two components of the domain name),
+or if the
+.Fl a
+option is given,
+the addresses for the hostname are requested,
+verifying that the name and address correspond.
+Normal authentication is bypassed if the address verification fails.
+.El
+.Pp
+Once the source port and address have been checked,
+.Nm rlogind
+proceeds with the authentication process described in
+.Xr rshd 8 .
+It then allocates a pseudo terminal (see
+.Xr pty 4 ) ,
+and manipulates file descriptors so that the slave
+half of the pseudo terminal becomes the
+.Em stdin ,
+.Em stdout ,
+and
+.Em stderr
+for a login process.
+The login process is an instance of the
+.Xr login 1
+program, invoked with the
+.Fl f
+option if authentication has succeeded.
+If automatic authentication fails, the user is
+prompted to log in as if on a standard terminal line.
+.Pp
+The parent of the login process manipulates the master side of
+the pseudo terminal, operating as an intermediary
+between the login process and the client instance of the
+.Xr rlogin
+program.  In normal operation, the packet protocol described
+in
+.Xr pty 4
+is invoked to provide
+.Ql ^S/^Q
+type facilities and propagate
+interrupt signals to the remote programs.  The login process
+propagates the client terminal's baud rate and terminal type,
+as found in the environment variable,
+.Ql Ev TERM ;
+see
+.Xr environ 7 .
+The screen or window size of the terminal is requested from the client,
+and window size changes from the client are propagated to the pseudo terminal.
+.Pp
+Transport-level keepalive messages are enabled unless the
+.Fl n
+option is present.
+The use of keepalive messages allows sessions to be timed out
+if the client crashes or becomes unreachable.
+.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
+All initial diagnostic messages are indicated
+by a leading byte with a value of 1,
+after which any network connections are closed.
+If there are no errors before
+.Xr login
+is invoked, a null byte is returned as in indication of success.
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Sy Try again.
+A
+.Xr fork
+by the server failed.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr login 1 ,
+.Xr ruserok 3 ,
+.Xr rshd 8
+.Sh BUGS
+The authentication procedure used here assumes the integrity
+of each client machine and the connecting medium.  This is
+insecure, but is useful in an ``open'' environment.
+.Pp
+A facility to allow all data exchanges to be encrypted should be
+present.
+.Pp
+A more extensible protocol should be used.
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/rsh.1 b/debian/local/man/rsh.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd9c6bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/rsh.1
@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)rsh.1	8.2 (Berkeley) 4/29/95
+.\"
+.Dd April 29, 1995
+.Dt RSH 1
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rsh
+.Nd remote shell
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm rsh
+.Op Fl Kdnx
+.Op Fl k Ar realm
+.Op Fl l Ar username
+.Ar host
+.Nm rsh
+.Op Fl Kdnx
+.Op Fl k Ar realm
+.Ar username@host
+.Op command
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Rsh
+executes
+.Ar command
+on
+.Ar host  .
+.Pp
+.Nm Rsh
+copies its standard input to the remote command, the standard
+output of the remote command to its standard output, and the
+standard error of the remote command to its standard error.
+Interrupt, quit and terminate signals are propagated to the remote
+command;
+.Nm rsh
+normally terminates when the remote command does.
+The options are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width flag
+.It Fl K
+The
+.Fl K
+option turns off all Kerberos authentication.
+.It Fl d
+The
+.Fl d
+option turns on socket debugging (using
+.Xr setsockopt  2  )
+on the
+.Tn TCP
+sockets used for communication with the remote host.
+.It Fl k
+The
+.Fl k
+option causes
+.Nm rsh
+to obtain tickets for the remote host in
+.Ar realm
+instead of the remote host's realm as determined by
+.Xr krb_realmofhost  3  .
+.It Fl l
+By default, the remote username is the same as the local username.
+The
+.Fl l
+option or the
+.Pa username@host
+format allow the remote name to be specified.
+Kerberos authentication is used, and authorization is determined
+as in
+.Xr rlogin  1  .
+.It Fl n
+The
+.Fl n
+option redirects input from the special device
+.Pa /dev/null
+(see the
+.Sx BUGS
+section of this manual page).
+.It Fl x
+The
+.Fl x
+option turns on
+.Tn DES
+encryption for all data exchange.
+This may introduce a significant delay in response time.
+.El
+.Pp
+If no
+.Ar command
+is specified, you will be logged in on the remote host using
+.Xr rlogin  1  .
+.Pp
+Shell metacharacters which are not quoted are interpreted on local machine,
+while quoted metacharacters are interpreted on the remote machine.
+For example, the command
+.Pp
+.Dl rsh otherhost cat remotefile >> localfile
+.Pp
+appends the remote file
+.Ar remotefile
+to the local file
+.Ar localfile ,
+while
+.Pp
+.Dl rsh otherhost cat remotefile \&">>\&" other_remotefile
+.Pp
+appends
+.Ar remotefile
+to
+.Ar other_remotefile .
+.\" .Pp
+.\" Many sites specify a large number of host names as commands in the
+.\" directory /usr/hosts.
+.\" If this directory is included in your search path, you can use the
+.\" shorthand ``host command'' for the longer form ``rsh host command''.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /etc/hosts -compact
+.It Pa /etc/hosts
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr rlogin 1 ,
+.Xr kerberos 3 ,
+.Xr krb_sendauth 3 ,
+.Xr krb_realmofhost 3
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm rsh
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
+.Sh BUGS
+If you are using
+.Xr csh  1
+and put a
+.Nm rsh
+in the background without redirecting its input away from the terminal,
+it will block even if no reads are posted by the remote command.
+If no input is desired you should redirect the input of
+.Nm rsh
+to
+.Pa /dev/null
+using the
+.Fl n
+option.
+.Pp
+You cannot run an interactive command
+(like
+.Xr rogue  6
+or
+.Xr vi  1  )
+using
+.Nm rsh  ;
+use
+.Xr rlogin  1
+instead.
+.Pp
+Stop signals stop the local
+.Nm rsh
+process only; this is arguably wrong, but currently hard to fix for reasons
+too complicated to explain here.
diff --git a/debian/local/man/rshd.8 b/debian/local/man/rshd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a252e40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/rshd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1989, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)rshd.8	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93
+.\"
+.Dd June 4, 1993
+.Dt RSHD 8
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rshd
+.Nd remote shell server
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm rshd
+.Op Fl alnL
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Nm rshd
+server
+is the server for the
+.Xr rcmd 3
+routine and, consequently, for the
+.Xr rsh 1
+program.  The server provides remote execution facilities
+with authentication based on privileged port numbers from trusted hosts.
+.Pp
+The
+.Nm rshd
+server
+listens for service requests at the port indicated in
+the ``cmd'' service specification; see
+.Xr services 5 .
+When a service request is received the following protocol
+is initiated:
+.Bl -enum
+.It
+The server checks the client's source port.
+If the port is not in the range 512-1023, the server
+aborts the connection.
+.It
+The server reads characters from the socket up
+to a null (`\e0') byte.  The resultant string is
+interpreted as an
+.Tn ASCII
+number, base 10.
+.It
+If the number received in step 2 is non-zero,
+it is interpreted as the port number of a secondary
+stream to be used for the
+.Em stderr .
+A second connection is then created to the specified
+port on the client's machine.  The source port of this
+second connection is also in the range 512-1023.
+.It
+The server checks the client's source address
+and requests the corresponding host name (see
+.Xr gethostbyaddr 3 ,
+.Xr hosts 5
+and
+.Xr named 8 ) .
+If the hostname cannot be determined,
+the dot-notation representation of the host address is used.
+If the hostname is in the same domain as the server (according to
+the last two components of the domain name),
+or if the
+.Fl a
+option is given,
+the addresses for the hostname are requested,
+verifying that the name and address correspond.
+If address verification fails, the connection is aborted
+with the message, ``Host address mismatch.''
+.It
+A null terminated user name of at most 16 characters
+is retrieved on the initial socket.  This user name
+is interpreted as the user identity on the
+.Em client Ns 's
+machine.
+.It
+A null terminated user name of at most 16 characters
+is retrieved on the initial socket.  This user name
+is interpreted as a user identity to use on the
+.Sy server Ns 's
+machine.
+.It
+A null terminated command to be passed to a
+shell is retrieved on the initial socket.  The length of
+the command is limited by the upper bound on the size of
+the system's argument list.
+.It
+.Nm Rshd
+then validates the user using
+.Xr ruserok 3 ,
+which uses the file
+.Pa /etc/hosts.equiv
+and the
+.Pa .rhosts
+file found in the user's home directory.  The
+.Fl l
+option prevents
+.Xr ruserok 3
+from doing any validation based on the user's ``.rhosts'' file,
+unless the user is the superuser.
+.It
+If the file
+.Pa /etc/nologin
+exists and the user is not the superuser,
+the connection is closed.
+.It
+A null byte is returned on the initial socket
+and the command line is passed to the normal login
+shell of the user.  The
+shell inherits the network connections established
+by
+.Nm rshd .
+.El
+.Pp
+Transport-level keepalive messages are enabled unless the
+.Fl n
+option is present.
+The use of keepalive messages allows sessions to be timed out
+if the client crashes or becomes unreachable.
+.Pp
+The
+.Fl L
+option causes all successful accesses to be logged to
+.Xr syslogd 8
+as
+.Li auth.info
+messages.
+.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
+Except for the last one listed below,
+all diagnostic messages
+are returned on the initial socket,
+after which any network connections are closed.
+An error is indicated by a leading byte with a value of
+1 (0 is returned in step 10 above upon successful completion
+of all the steps prior to the execution of the login shell).
+.Bl -tag -width indent
+.It Sy Locuser too long.
+The name of the user on the client's machine is
+longer than 16 characters.
+.It Sy Ruser too long.
+The name of the user on the remote machine is
+longer than 16 characters.
+.It Sy Command too long  .
+The command line passed exceeds the size of the argument
+list (as configured into the system).
+.It Sy Login incorrect.
+No password file entry for the user name existed.
+.It Sy Remote directory.
+The
+.Xr chdir
+command to the home directory failed.
+.It Sy Permission denied.
+The authentication procedure described above failed.
+.It Sy Can't make pipe.
+The pipe needed for the
+.Em stderr ,
+wasn't created.
+.It Sy Can't fork; try again.
+A
+.Xr fork
+by the server failed.
+.It Sy <shellname>: ...
+The user's login shell could not be started.  This message is returned
+on the connection associated with the
+.Em stderr ,
+and is not preceded by a flag byte.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr rsh 1 ,
+.Xr rcmd 3 ,
+.Xr ruserok 3
+.Sh BUGS
+The authentication procedure used here assumes the integrity
+of each client machine and the connecting medium.  This is
+insecure, but is useful in an ``open'' environment.
+.Pp
+A facility to allow all data exchanges to be encrypted should be
+present.
+.Pp
+A more extensible protocol (such as Telnet) should be used.
diff --git a/debian/local/man/syslog.conf.5 b/debian/local/man/syslog.conf.5
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..480c28e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/syslog.conf.5
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)syslog.conf.5	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/9/93
+.\"
+.Dd June 9, 1993
+.Dt SYSLOG.CONF 5
+.Os BSD 4.4
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm syslog.conf
+.Nd configuration file for
+.Xr syslogd 8
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Nm syslog.conf
+file is the configuration file for the
+.Xr syslogd 8
+program.
+It consists of lines with two fields: the
+.Em selector
+field which specifies the types of messages and priorities to which the
+line applies, and an
+.Em action
+field which specifies the action to be taken if a message
+.Xr syslogd
+receives matches the selection criteria.
+The
+.Em selector
+field is separated from the
+.Em action
+field by one or more tab or space characters. A rule can be splitted in
+several lines if all lines except the last are terminated with a backslash
+(``\'').
+.Pp
+The
+.Em Selectors
+function
+are encoded as a
+.Em facility ,
+a period (``.''), and a
+.Em level ,
+with no intervening white-space.
+Both the
+.Em facility
+and the
+.Em level
+are case insensitive.
+.Pp
+The
+.Em facility
+describes the part of the system generating the message, and is one of
+the following keywords: auth, authpriv, cron, daemon, kern, lpr, mail,
+mark, news, syslog, user, uucp and local0 through local7.
+These keywords (with the exception of mark) correspond to the
+similar
+.Dq Dv LOG_
+values specified to the
+.Xr openlog 3
+and
+.Xr syslog 3
+library routines.
+.Pp
+The
+.Em level
+describes the severity of the message, and is a keyword from the
+following ordered list (higher to lower): emerg, alert, crit, err,
+warning, notice and debug.
+These keywords correspond to the
+similar
+.Pq Dv LOG_
+values specified to the
+.Xr syslog
+library routine.
+.Pp
+See
+.Xr syslog 3
+for a further descriptions of both the
+.Em facility
+and
+.Em level
+keywords and their significance.
+.Pp
+If a received message matches the specified
+.Em facility
+and is of the specified
+.Em level
+.Em (or a higher level) ,
+the action specified in the
+.Em action
+field will be taken.
+.Pp
+Multiple
+.Em selectors
+may be specified for a single
+.Em action
+by separating them with semicolon (``;'') characters.
+It is important to note, however, that each
+.Em selector
+can modify the ones preceding it.
+.Pp
+Multiple
+.Em facilities
+may be specified for a single
+.Em level
+by separating them with comma (``,'') characters.
+.Pp
+An asterisk (``*'') can be used to specify all
+.Em facilities
+or all
+.Em levels .
+.Pp
+By default, a
+.Em level
+applies to all messages with the same or higher
+.Em level .
+The equal (``='') character can be prepended to a
+.Em level
+to restrict this line of the configuration file to messages
+with the very same
+.Em level .
+.Pp
+An exclamation mark (``!'') prepended to a
+.Em level
+or the asterisk means that this line of the configuration file does
+.Em not
+apply to the specified level (and higher ones). In conjunction with
+the equal sign, you can exclude single
+.Em levels
+as well.
+.Pp
+The special
+.Em facility
+``mark'' receives a message at priority ``info'' every 20 minutes
+(see
+.Xr syslogd 8 ) .
+This is not enabled by a
+.Em facility
+field containing an asterisk.
+.Pp
+The special
+.Em level
+``none'' disables a particular
+.Em facility .
+.Pp
+The
+.Em action
+field of each line specifies the action to be taken when the
+.Em selector
+field selects a message.
+There are five forms:
+.Bl -bullet
+.It
+A pathname (beginning with a leading slash).
+Selected messages are appended to the file.
+.Pp
+You may prepend a minus (``-'') to the path to omit syncing the file
+after each message log. This can cause data loss at system crashes, but
+increases performance for programs which use logging extensively.
+.It
+A named pipe (fifo), beginning with a vertical bar (``|'') followed
+by a pathname. The pipe must be created with
+.Xr mkfifo 8
+before syslogd reads its configuration file.
+This feature is especially useful fo debugging.
+.It
+A hostname (preceded by an at (``@'') sign).
+Selected messages are forwarded to the
+.Xr syslogd
+program on the named host.
+.It
+A comma separated list of users.
+Selected messages are written to those users
+if they are logged in.
+.It
+An asterisk.
+Selected messages are written to all logged-in users.
+.El
+.Pp
+Blank lines and lines whose first non-blank character is a hash (``#'')
+character are ignored.
+.Sh EXAMPLES
+.Pp
+A configuration file might appear as follows:
+.Bd -literal
+# Log all kernel messages, authentication messages of
+# level notice or higher and anything of level err or
+# higher to the console.
+# Don't log private authentication messages!
+*.err;kern.*;auth.notice;authpriv.none	/dev/console
+
+# Log anything (except mail) of level info or higher.
+# Don't log private authentication messages!
+*.info;mail.none;authpriv.none		/var/log/messages
+
+# The authpriv file has restricted access.
+authpriv.*						/var/log/secure
+
+# Log all the mail messages in one place.
+mail.*							/var/log/maillog
+
+# Everybody gets emergency messages, plus log them on another
+# machine.
+*.emerg							*
+*.emerg							@arpa.berkeley.edu
+
+# Root and Eric get alert and higher messages.
+*.alert							root,eric
+
+# Save mail and news errors of level err and higher in a
+# special file.
+uucp,news.crit						/var/log/spoolerr
+.Ed
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /etc/syslog.conf -compact
+.It Pa /etc/syslog.conf
+The
+.Xr syslogd 8
+configuration file.
+.El
+.Sh BUGS
+The effects of multiple selectors are sometimes not intuitive.
+For example ``mail.crit,*.err'' will select ``mail'' facility messages at
+the level of ``err'' or higher, not at the level of ``crit'' or higher.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr syslog 3 ,
+.Xr syslogd 8
diff --git a/debian/local/man/syslogd.8 b/debian/local/man/syslogd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f82ff89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/syslogd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)syslogd.8	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/6/93
+.\"
+.Dd June 6, 1993
+.Dt SYSLOGD 8
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm syslogd
+.Nd log systems messages
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm syslogd
+.Op Fl V
+.Op Fl a Ar socket
+.Op Fl d
+.Op Fl f Ar config_file
+.Op Fl h
+.Op Fl l Ar host_list
+.Op Fl m Ar mark_interval
+.Op Fl n
+.Op Fl p Ar log_socket
+.Op Fl r
+.Op Fl s Ar domain_list
+.Op Fl -no-klog
+.Op Fl -no-unixaf
+.Op Fl -no-forward
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Syslogd
+reads and logs messages to the system console, log files, other
+machines and/or users as specified by its configuration file.
+The options are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Fl V
+Print version number and exit.
+.It Fl -help
+Display help information and exit.
+.It Fl d
+Enter debug mode. syslogd does not put itself in the background, does
+not fork and shows debug information.
+.It Fl a
+Specify additional sockets from that syslogd has to listen to.
+This is needed if you are going to let some daemon run within
+a chroot()'ed environment. You can specify up to 19 additional
+sockets.
+.It \fB-f\fR, \fB--rcfile\fR=\fIFILE\fP
+Specify the pathname of an alternate configuration file;
+the default is system specific and displayed in the help output.
+.It \fB--rcdir\fR=\fIDIR\fP
+Specify the pathname of an alternate configuration directory;
+the default is system specific and displayed in the help output.
+.It \fB-h\fR, \fB--hop\fR
+Enable forwarding remote messages. By default syslogd will not
+forward messages it receives from remote hosts.
+.It Fl l
+A colon-seperated lists of hosts which should be considered local;
+they are logged by their hostnames instead by their FQDN.
+.It \fB-m\fR, \fB--mark\fR=\fIINTERVAL/fP
+Select the number of minutes between ``mark'' messages;
+the default is 20 minutes. Setting it to 0 disables timestamps.
+.It \fB-n\fR, \fB--no-detach\fR
+Suppress backgrounding and detachment of the daemon from its
+controlling terminal.
+.It \fB-p\fR, \fB--socket\fR=\fIPATH\fP
+Specify the pathname of an alternate log socket.
+The default is systemspecific and displayed in the help output.
+.It \fB-r\fR, \fB--inet\fR
+Enable to receive remote messages using an internet domain socket.
+The default is to not receive any messages from the network. Older
+version always accepted remote messages.
+.It Fl s
+A colon-seperated list of domainnames which should be stripped from
+the FQDNs of hosts when logging.
+.It Fl -no-klog
+Do not listen to the kernel log device. This is only supported on
+systems which define a kernel log device, on all others this is already
+the default, and the option will be silently ignored.
+.It Fl -no-unixaf
+Do not listen to any unix domain socket. This option overrides \-p and \-a.
+.It Fl -no-forward
+Do not forward any messages. This overrides \-h.
+.El
+.Pp
+.Nm Syslogd
+reads its configuration file when it starts up and whenever it
+receives a hangup signal.
+For information on the format of the configuration file,
+see
+.Xr syslog.conf 5 .
+.Pp
+.Nm Syslogd
+reads messages from the
+.Tn UNIX
+domain socket
+.Pa /dev/log ,
+from an Internet domain socket specified in
+.Pa /etc/services ,
+and from the one of the special devices
+.Pa /dev/klog
+or
+.Pa /proc/kmsg
+depending on the system (to read kernel messages). In a GNU/Linux system
+it will not parse the System.map and use it to annotate the kernel messages.
+.Pp
+.Nm Syslogd
+creates the file
+.Pa /var/run/syslog.pid ,
+and stores its process
+id there.
+This can be used to kill or reconfigure
+.Nm syslogd .
+.Pp
+The message sent to
+.Nm syslogd
+should consist of a single line.
+The message can contain a priority code, which should be a preceding
+decimal number in angle braces, for example,
+.Sq Aq 5.
+This priority code should map into the priorities defined in the
+include file
+.Aq Pa sys/syslog.h .
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /var/run/syslog.pid -compact
+.It Pa /etc/syslog.conf
+The configuration file.
+.It Pa /var/run/syslog.pid
+The process id of current
+.Nm syslogd .
+.It Pa /dev/log
+Name of the
+.Tn UNIX
+domain datagram log socket.
+.It Pa /dev/klog, /proc/kmsg
+The kernel log device.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr logger 1 ,
+.Xr syslog 3 ,
+.Xr services 5 ,
+.Xr syslog.conf 5
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/talk.1 b/debian/local/man/talk.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e636667
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/talk.1
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)talk.1	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/6/93
+.\"
+.Dd June 6, 1993
+.Dt TALK 1
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm talk
+.Nd talk to another user
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm talk
+.Ar person
+.Op Ar ttyname
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Talk
+is a visual communication program which copies lines from your
+terminal to that of another user.
+.Pp
+Options available:
+.Bl -tag -width ttyname
+.It Ar person
+If you wish to talk to someone on your own machine, then
+.Ar person
+is just the person's login name.  If you wish to talk to a user on
+another host, then
+.Ar person
+is of the form
+.Ql user@host .
+.It Ar ttyname
+If you wish to talk to a user who is logged in more than once, the
+.Ar ttyname
+argument may be used to indicate the appropriate terminal
+name, where
+.Ar ttyname
+is of the form
+.Ql ttyXX .
+.El
+.Pp
+When first called,
+.Nm talk
+sends the message
+.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
+Message from TalkDaemon@his_machine...
+talk: connection requested by your_name@your_machine.
+talk: respond with: talk your_name@your_machine
+.Ed
+.Pp
+to the user you wish to talk to. At this point, the recipient
+of the message should reply by typing
+.Pp
+.Dl talk \ your_name@your_machine
+.Pp
+It doesn't matter from which machine the recipient replies, as
+long as his login-name is the same.  Once communication is established,
+the two parties may type simultaneously, with their output appearing
+in separate windows.  Typing control-L
+.Ql ^L
+will cause the screen to
+be reprinted, while your erase, kill, and word kill characters will
+behave normally.  To exit, just type your interrupt character;
+.Nm talk
+then moves the cursor to the bottom of the screen and restores the
+terminal to its previous state.
+.Pp
+Permission to talk may be denied or granted by use of the
+.Xr mesg 1
+command.  At the outset talking is allowed.  Certain commands, in
+particular
+.Xr nroff 1
+and
+.Xr pr 1 ,
+disallow messages in order to
+prevent messy output.
+.Pp
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /var/run/utmp -compact
+.It Pa /etc/hosts
+to find the recipient's machine
+.It Pa /var/run/utmp
+to find the recipient's tty
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr mail 1 ,
+.Xr mesg 1 ,
+.Xr who 1 ,
+.Xr write 1
+.Sh BUGS
+The version of
+.Xr talk 1
+released with
+.Bx 4.3
+uses a protocol that
+is incompatible with the protocol used in the version released with
+.Bx 4.2 .
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/talkd.8 b/debian/local/man/talkd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8169176
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/talkd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)talkd.8	8.2 (Berkeley) 12/11/93
+.\"
+.Dd December 11, 1993
+.Dt TALKD 8
+.Os BSD 4.3
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm talkd
+.Nd remote user communication server
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm talkd
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Talkd
+is the server that notifies a user that someone else wants to
+initiate a conversation.
+It acts as a repository of invitations, responding to requests
+by clients wishing to rendezvous to hold a conversation.
+In normal operation, a client, the caller,
+initiates a rendezvous by sending a
+.Tn CTL_MSG
+to the server of
+type
+.Tn LOOK_UP
+(see
+.Aq Pa protocols/talkd.h ) .
+This causes the server to search its invitation
+tables to check if an invitation currently exists for the caller
+(to speak to the callee specified in the message).
+If the lookup fails,
+the caller then sends an
+.Tn ANNOUNCE
+message causing the server to
+broadcast an announcement on the callee's login ports requesting contact.
+When the callee responds, the local server uses the
+recorded invitation to respond with the appropriate rendezvous
+address and the caller and callee client programs establish a
+stream connection through which the conversation takes place.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr talk 1 ,
+.Xr write 1
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/telnet.1 b/debian/local/man/telnet.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa9a480
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/telnet.1
@@ -0,0 +1,1362 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)telnet.1	8.6 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
+.\"
+.Dd June 1, 1994
+.Dt TELNET 1
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm telnet
+.Nd user interface to the
+.Tn TELNET
+protocol
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm telnet
+.Op Fl 8EFKLacdfrx
+.Op Fl S Ar tos
+.Op Fl X Ar authtype
+.Op Fl e Ar escapechar
+.Op Fl k Ar realm
+.Op Fl l Ar user
+.Op Fl n Ar tracefile
+.Oo
+.Ar host
+.Op port
+.Oc
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Nm telnet
+command
+is used to communicate with another host using the
+.Tn TELNET
+protocol.
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is invoked without the
+.Ar host
+argument, it enters command mode,
+indicated by its prompt
+.Pq Nm telnet\&> .
+In this mode, it accepts and executes the commands listed below.
+If it is invoked with arguments, it performs an
+.Ic open
+command with those arguments.
+.Pp
+Options:
+.Bl -tag -width indent
+.It Fl 8
+Specifies an 8-bit data path.  This causes an attempt to
+negotiate the
+.Dv TELNET BINARY
+option on both input and output.
+.It Fl E
+Stops any character from being recognized as an escape character.
+.It Fl F
+If Kerberos V5 authentication is being used, the
+.Fl F
+option allows the local credentials to be forwarded
+to the remote system, including any credentials that
+have already been forwarded into the local environment.
+.It Fl K
+Specifies no automatic login to the remote system.
+.It Fl L
+Specifies an 8-bit data path on output.  This causes the
+BINARY option to be negotiated on output.
+.It Fl S Ar tos
+Sets the IP type-of-service (TOS) option for the telnet
+connection to the value
+.Ar tos,
+which can be a numeric TOS value
+or, on systems that support it, a symbolic
+TOS name found in the /etc/iptos file.
+.It Fl X Ar atype
+Disables the
+.Ar atype
+type of authentication.
+.It Fl a
+Attempt automatic login.
+Currently, this sends the user name via the
+.Ev USER
+variable
+of the
+.Ev ENVIRON
+option if supported by the remote system.
+The name used is that of the current user as returned by
+.Xr getlogin 2
+if it agrees with the current user ID,
+otherwise it is the name associated with the user ID.
+.It Fl c
+Disables the reading of the user's
+.Pa \&.telnetrc
+file.  (See the
+.Ic toggle skiprc
+command on this man page.)
+.It Fl d
+Sets the initial value of the
+.Ic debug
+toggle to
+.Dv TRUE
+.It Fl e Ar escape char
+Sets the initial
+.Nm
+.Nm telnet
+escape character to
+.Ar escape char.
+If
+.Ar escape char
+is omitted, then
+there will be no escape character.
+.It Fl f
+If Kerberos V5 authentication is being used, the
+.Fl f
+option allows the local credentials to be forwarded to the remote system.
+.ne 1i
+.It Fl k Ar realm
+If Kerberos authentication is being used, the
+.Fl k
+option requests that telnet obtain tickets for the remote host in
+realm realm instead of the remote host's realm, as determined
+by
+.Xr krb_realmofhost 3 .
+.It Fl l Ar user
+When connecting to the remote system, if the remote system
+understands the
+.Ev ENVIRON
+option, then
+.Ar user
+will be sent to the remote system as the value for the variable USER.
+This option implies the
+.Fl a
+option.
+This option may also be used with the
+.Ic open
+command.
+.It Fl n Ar tracefile
+Opens
+.Ar tracefile
+for recording trace information.
+See the
+.Ic set tracefile
+command below.
+.It Fl r
+Specifies a user interface similar to
+.Xr rlogin 1 .
+In this
+mode, the escape character is set to the tilde (~) character,
+unless modified by the -e option.
+.It Fl x
+Turns on encryption of the data stream if possible.  This
+option is not available outside of the United States and
+Canada.
+.It Ar host
+Indicates the official name, an alias, or the Internet address
+of a remote host.
+.It Ar port
+Indicates a port number (address of an application).  If a number is
+not specified, the default
+.Nm telnet
+port is used.
+.El
+.Pp
+When in rlogin mode, a line of the form ~.  disconnects from the
+remote host; ~ is the telnet escape character.
+Similarly, the line ~^Z suspends the telnet session.
+The line ~^] escapes to the normal telnet escape prompt.
+.Pp
+Once a connection has been opened,
+.Nm telnet
+will attempt to enable the
+.Dv TELNET LINEMODE
+option.
+If this fails, then
+.Nm telnet
+will revert to one of two input modes:
+either \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq
+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq
+depending on what the remote system supports.
+.Pp
+When
+.Dv LINEMODE
+is enabled, character processing is done on the
+local system, under the control of the remote system.  When input
+editing or character echoing is to be disabled, the remote system
+will relay that information.  The remote system will also relay
+changes to any special characters that happen on the remote
+system, so that they can take effect on the local system.
+.Pp
+In \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq mode, most
+text typed is immediately sent to the remote host for processing.
+.Pp
+In \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode, all text is echoed locally,
+and (normally) only completed lines are sent to the remote host.
+The \*(Lqlocal echo character\*(Rq (initially \*(Lq^E\*(Rq) may be used
+to turn off and on the local echo
+(this would mostly be used to enter passwords
+without the password being echoed).
+.Pp
+If the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option is enabled, or if the
+.Ic localchars
+toggle is
+.Dv TRUE
+(the default for \*(Lqold line by line\*(Lq; see below),
+the user's
+.Ic quit  ,
+.Ic intr ,
+and
+.Ic flush
+characters are trapped locally, and sent as
+.Tn TELNET
+protocol sequences to the remote side.
+If
+.Dv LINEMODE
+has ever been enabled, then the user's
+.Ic susp
+and
+.Ic eof
+are also sent as
+.Tn TELNET
+protocol sequences,
+and
+.Ic quit
+is sent as a
+.Dv TELNET ABORT
+instead of
+.Dv BREAK
+There are options (see
+.Ic toggle
+.Ic autoflush
+and
+.Ic toggle
+.Ic autosynch
+below)
+which cause this action to flush subsequent output to the terminal
+(until the remote host acknowledges the
+.Tn TELNET
+sequence) and flush previous terminal input
+(in the case of
+.Ic quit
+and
+.Ic intr  ) .
+.Pp
+While connected to a remote host,
+.Nm telnet
+command mode may be entered by typing the
+.Nm telnet
+\*(Lqescape character\*(Rq (initially \*(Lq^]\*(Rq).
+When in command mode, the normal terminal editing conventions are available.
+.Pp
+The following
+.Nm telnet
+commands are available.
+Only enough of each command to uniquely identify it need be typed
+(this is also true for arguments to the
+.Ic mode  ,
+.Ic set ,
+.Ic toggle  ,
+.Ic unset ,
+.Ic slc  ,
+.Ic environ ,
+and
+.Ic display
+commands).
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "mode type"
+.It Ic auth Ar argument ...
+The auth command manipulates the information sent through the
+.Dv TELNET AUTHENTICATE
+option.  Valid arguments for the
+auth command are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width "disable type"
+.It Ic disable Ar type
+Disables the specified type of authentication.  To
+obtain a list of available types, use the
+.Ic auth disable \&?
+command.
+.It Ic enable Ar type
+Enables the specified type of authentication.  To
+obtain a list of available types, use the
+.Ic auth enable \&?
+command.
+.It Ic status
+Lists the current status of the various types of
+authentication.
+.El
+.It Ic close
+Close a
+.Tn TELNET
+session and return to command mode.
+.It Ic display Ar argument ...
+Displays all, or some, of the
+.Ic set
+and
+.Ic toggle
+values (see below).
+.It Ic encrypt Ar argument ...
+The encrypt command manipulates the information sent through the
+.Dv TELNET ENCRYPT
+option.
+.Pp
+Note:  Because of export controls, the
+.Dv TELNET ENCRYPT
+option is not supported outside of the United States and Canada.
+.Pp
+Valid arguments for the encrypt command are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width Ar
+.It Ic disable Ar type Ic [input|output]
+Disables the specified type of encryption.  If you
+omit the input and output, both input and output
+are disabled.  To obtain a list of available
+types, use the
+.Ic encrypt disable \&?
+command.
+.It Ic enable Ar type Ic [input|output]
+Enables the specified type of encryption.  If you
+omit input and output, both input and output are
+enabled.  To obtain a list of available types, use the
+.Ic encrypt enable \&?
+command.
+.It Ic input
+This is the same as the
+.Ic encrypt start input
+command.
+.It Ic -input
+This is the same as the
+.Ic encrypt stop input
+command.
+.It Ic output
+This is the same as the
+.Ic encrypt start output
+command.
+.It Ic -output
+This is the same as the
+.Ic encrypt stop output
+command.
+.It Ic start Ic [input|output]
+Attempts to start encryption.  If you omit
+.Ic input
+and
+.Ic output,
+both input and output are enabled.  To
+obtain a list of available types, use the
+.Ic encrypt enable \&?
+command.
+.It Ic status
+Lists the current status of encryption.
+.It Ic stop Ic [input|output]
+Stops encryption.  If you omit input and output,
+encryption is on both input and output.
+.It Ic type Ar type
+Sets the default type of encryption to be used
+with later
+.Ic encrypt start
+or
+.Ic encrypt stop
+commands.
+.El
+.It Ic environ Ar arguments...
+The
+.Ic environ
+command is used to manipulate the
+the variables that my be sent through the
+.Dv TELNET ENVIRON
+option.
+The initial set of variables is taken from the users
+environment, with only the
+.Ev DISPLAY
+and
+.Ev PRINTER
+variables being exported by default.
+The
+.Ev USER
+variable is also exported if the
+.Fl a
+or
+.Fl l
+options are used.
+.br
+Valid arguments for the
+.Ic environ
+command are:
+.Bl -tag -width Fl
+.It Ic define Ar variable value
+Define the variable
+.Ar variable
+to have a value of
+.Ar value.
+Any variables defined by this command are automatically exported.
+The
+.Ar value
+may be enclosed in single or double quotes so
+that tabs and spaces may be included.
+.It Ic undefine Ar variable
+Remove
+.Ar variable
+from the list of environment variables.
+.It Ic export Ar variable
+Mark the variable
+.Ar variable
+to be exported to the remote side.
+.It Ic unexport Ar variable
+Mark the variable
+.Ar variable
+to not be exported unless
+explicitly asked for by the remote side.
+.It Ic list
+List the current set of environment variables.
+Those marked with a
+.Cm *
+will be sent automatically,
+other variables will only be sent if explicitly requested.
+.It Ic \&?
+Prints out help information for the
+.Ic environ
+command.
+.El
+.It Ic logout
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET LOGOUT
+option to the remote side.
+This command is similar to a
+.Ic close
+command; however, if the remote side does not support the
+.Dv LOGOUT
+option, nothing happens.
+If, however, the remote side does support the
+.Dv LOGOUT
+option, this command should cause the remote side to close the
+.Tn TELNET
+connection.
+If the remote side also supports the concept of
+suspending a user's session for later reattachment,
+the logout argument indicates that you
+should terminate the session immediately.
+.It Ic mode Ar type
+.Ar Type
+is one of several options, depending on the state of the
+.Tn TELNET
+session.
+The remote host is asked for permission to go into the requested mode.
+If the remote host is capable of entering that mode, the requested
+mode will be entered.
+.Bl -tag -width Ar
+.It Ic character
+Disable the
+.Dv TELNET LINEMODE
+option, or, if the remote side does not understand the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option, then enter \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Lq mode.
+.It Ic line
+Enable the
+.Dv TELNET LINEMODE
+option, or, if the remote side does not understand the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option, then attempt to enter \*(Lqold-line-by-line\*(Lq mode.
+.It Ic isig Pq Ic \-isig
+Attempt to enable (disable) the
+.Dv TRAPSIG
+mode of the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option.
+This requires that the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option be enabled.
+.It Ic edit Pq Ic \-edit
+Attempt to enable (disable) the
+.Dv EDIT
+mode of the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option.
+This requires that the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option be enabled.
+.It Ic softtabs Pq Ic \-softtabs
+Attempt to enable (disable) the
+.Dv SOFT_TAB
+mode of the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option.
+This requires that the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option be enabled.
+.ne 1i
+.It Ic litecho Pq Ic \-litecho
+Attempt to enable (disable) the
+.Dv LIT_ECHO
+mode of the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option.
+This requires that the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option be enabled.
+.It Ic \&?
+Prints out help information for the
+.Ic mode
+command.
+.El
+.It Xo
+.Ic open Ar host
+.Oo Op Fl l
+.Ar user
+.Oc Ns Oo Fl
+.Ar port Oc
+.Xc
+Open a connection to the named host.
+If no port number
+is specified,
+.Nm telnet
+will attempt to contact a
+.Tn TELNET
+server at the default port.
+The host specification may be either a host name (see
+.Xr hosts  5  )
+or an Internet address specified in the \*(Lqdot notation\*(Rq (see
+.Xr inet 3 ) .
+The
+.Op Fl l
+option may be used to specify the user name
+to be passed to the remote system via the
+.Ev ENVIRON
+option.
+When connecting to a non-standard port,
+.Nm telnet
+omits any automatic initiation of
+.Tn TELNET
+options.  When the port number is preceded by a minus sign,
+the initial option negotiation is done.
+After establishing a connection, the file
+.Pa \&.telnetrc
+in the
+users home directory is opened.  Lines beginning with a # are
+comment lines.  Blank lines are ignored.  Lines that begin
+without white space are the start of a machine entry.  The
+first thing on the line is the name of the machine that is
+being connected to.  The rest of the line, and successive
+lines that begin with white space are assumed to be
+.Nm telnet
+commands and are processed as if they had been typed
+in manually to the
+.Nm telnet
+command prompt.
+.It Ic quit
+Close any open
+.Tn TELNET
+session and exit
+.Nm telnet  .
+An end of file (in command mode) will also close a session and exit.
+.It Ic send Ar arguments
+Sends one or more special character sequences to the remote host.
+The following are the arguments which may be specified
+(more than one argument may be specified at a time):
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width escape
+.It Ic abort
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET ABORT
+(Abort
+processes)
+sequence.
+.It Ic ao
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET AO
+(Abort Output) sequence, which should cause the remote system to flush
+all output
+.Em from
+the remote system
+.Em to
+the user's terminal.
+.It Ic ayt
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET AYT
+(Are You There)
+sequence, to which the remote system may or may not choose to respond.
+.It Ic brk
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET BRK
+(Break) sequence, which may have significance to the remote
+system.
+.It Ic ec
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET EC
+(Erase Character)
+sequence, which should cause the remote system to erase the last character
+entered.
+.It Ic el
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET EL
+(Erase Line)
+sequence, which should cause the remote system to erase the line currently
+being entered.
+.It Ic eof
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET EOF
+(End Of File)
+sequence.
+.It Ic eor
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET EOR
+(End of Record)
+sequence.
+.It Ic escape
+Sends the current
+.Nm telnet
+escape character (initially \*(Lq^\*(Rq).
+.It Ic ga
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET GA
+(Go Ahead)
+sequence, which likely has no significance to the remote system.
+.It Ic getstatus
+If the remote side supports the
+.Dv TELNET STATUS
+command,
+.Ic getstatus
+will send the subnegotiation to request that the server send
+its current option status.
+.ne 1i
+.It Ic ip
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET IP
+(Interrupt Process) sequence, which should cause the remote
+system to abort the currently running process.
+.It Ic nop
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET NOP
+(No OPeration)
+sequence.
+.It Ic susp
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET SUSP
+(SUSPend process)
+sequence.
+.It Ic synch
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET SYNCH
+sequence.
+This sequence causes the remote system to discard all previously typed
+(but not yet read) input.
+This sequence is sent as
+.Tn TCP
+urgent
+data (and may not work if the remote system is a
+.Bx 4.2
+system -- if
+it doesn't work, a lower case \*(Lqr\*(Rq may be echoed on the terminal).
+.It Ic do Ar cmd
+.It Ic dont Ar cmd
+.It Ic will Ar cmd
+.It Ic wont Ar cmd
+Sends the
+.Dv TELNET DO
+.Ar cmd
+sequence.
+.Ar Cmd
+can be either a decimal number between 0 and 255,
+or a symbolic name for a specific
+.Dv TELNET
+command.
+.Ar Cmd
+can also be either
+.Ic help
+or
+.Ic \&?
+to print out help information, including
+a list of known symbolic names.
+.It Ic \&?
+Prints out help information for the
+.Ic send
+command.
+.El
+.It Ic set Ar argument value
+.It Ic unset Ar argument value
+The
+.Ic set
+command will set any one of a number of
+.Nm telnet
+variables to a specific value or to
+.Dv TRUE .
+The special value
+.Ic off
+turns off the function associated with
+the variable, this is equivalent to using the
+.Ic unset
+command.
+The
+.Ic unset
+command will disable or set to
+.Dv FALSE
+any of the specified functions.
+The values of variables may be interrogated with the
+.Ic display
+command.
+The variables which may be set or unset, but not toggled, are
+listed here.  In addition, any of the variables for the
+.Ic toggle
+command may be explicitly set or unset using
+the
+.Ic set
+and
+.Ic unset
+commands.
+.Bl -tag -width escape
+.It Ic ayt
+If
+.Tn TELNET
+is in localchars mode, or
+.Dv LINEMODE
+is enabled, and the status character is typed, a
+.Dv TELNET AYT
+sequence (see
+.Ic send ayt
+preceding) is sent to the
+remote host.  The initial value for the "Are You There"
+character is the terminal's status character.
+.It Ic echo
+This is the value (initially \*(Lq^E\*(Rq) which, when in
+\*(Lqline by line\*(Rq mode, toggles between doing local echoing
+of entered characters (for normal processing), and suppressing
+echoing of entered characters (for entering, say, a password).
+.It Ic eof
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is operating in
+.Dv LINEMODE
+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode, entering this character
+as the first character on a line will cause this character to be
+sent to the remote system.
+The initial value of the eof character is taken to be the terminal's
+.Ic eof
+character.
+.It Ic erase
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is in
+.Ic localchars
+mode (see
+.Ic toggle
+.Ic localchars
+below),
+.Sy and
+if
+.Nm telnet
+is operating in \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq mode, then when this
+character is typed, a
+.Dv TELNET EC
+sequence (see
+.Ic send
+.Ic ec
+above)
+is sent to the remote system.
+The initial value for the erase character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic erase
+character.
+.It Ic escape
+This is the
+.Nm telnet
+escape character (initially \*(Lq^[\*(Rq) which causes entry
+into
+.Nm telnet
+command mode (when connected to a remote system).
+.It Ic flushoutput
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is in
+.Ic localchars
+mode (see
+.Ic toggle
+.Ic localchars
+below)
+and the
+.Ic flushoutput
+character is typed, a
+.Dv TELNET AO
+sequence (see
+.Ic send
+.Ic ao
+above)
+is sent to the remote host.
+The initial value for the flush character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic flush
+character.
+.It Ic forw1
+.It Ic forw2
+If
+.Tn TELNET
+is operating in
+.Dv LINEMODE ,
+these are the
+characters that, when typed, cause partial lines to be
+forwarded to the remote system.  The initial value for
+the forwarding characters are taken from the terminal's
+eol and eol2 characters.
+.It Ic interrupt
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is in
+.Ic localchars
+mode (see
+.Ic toggle
+.Ic localchars
+below)
+and the
+.Ic interrupt
+character is typed, a
+.Dv TELNET IP
+sequence (see
+.Ic send
+.Ic ip
+above)
+is sent to the remote host.
+The initial value for the interrupt character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic intr
+character.
+.It Ic kill
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is in
+.Ic localchars
+mode (see
+.Ic toggle
+.Ic localchars
+below),
+.Ic and
+if
+.Nm telnet
+is operating in \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq mode, then when this
+character is typed, a
+.Dv TELNET EL
+sequence (see
+.Ic send
+.Ic el
+above)
+is sent to the remote system.
+The initial value for the kill character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic kill
+character.
+.It Ic lnext
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is operating in
+.Dv LINEMODE
+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Lq mode, then this character is taken to
+be the terminal's
+.Ic lnext
+character.
+The initial value for the lnext character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic lnext
+character.
+.It Ic quit
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is in
+.Ic localchars
+mode (see
+.Ic toggle
+.Ic localchars
+below)
+and the
+.Ic quit
+character is typed, a
+.Dv TELNET BRK
+sequence (see
+.Ic send
+.Ic brk
+above)
+is sent to the remote host.
+The initial value for the quit character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic quit
+character.
+.It Ic reprint
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is operating in
+.Dv LINEMODE
+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Lq mode, then this character is taken to
+be the terminal's
+.Ic reprint
+character.
+The initial value for the reprint character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic reprint
+character.
+.It Ic rlogin
+This is the rlogin escape character.
+If set, the normal
+.Tn TELNET
+escape character is ignored unless it is
+preceded by this character at the beginning of a line.
+This character, at the beginning of a line followed by
+a "."  closes the connection; when followed by a ^Z it
+suspends the telnet command.  The initial state is to
+disable the rlogin escape character.
+.It Ic start
+If the
+.Dv TELNET TOGGLE-FLOW-CONTROL
+option has been enabled,
+then this character is taken to
+be the terminal's
+.Ic start
+character.
+The initial value for the kill character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic start
+character.
+.It Ic stop
+If the
+.Dv TELNET TOGGLE-FLOW-CONTROL
+option has been enabled,
+then this character is taken to
+be the terminal's
+.Ic stop
+character.
+The initial value for the kill character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic stop
+character.
+.It Ic susp
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is in
+.Ic localchars
+mode, or
+.Dv LINEMODE
+is enabled, and the
+.Ic suspend
+character is typed, a
+.Dv TELNET SUSP
+sequence (see
+.Ic send
+.Ic susp
+above)
+is sent to the remote host.
+The initial value for the suspend character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic suspend
+character.
+.ne 1i
+.It Ic tracefile
+This is the file to which the output, caused by
+.Ic netdata
+or
+.Ic option
+tracing being
+.Dv TRUE ,
+will be written.  If it is set to
+.Dq Fl ,
+then tracing information will be written to standard output (the default).
+.It Ic worderase
+If
+.Nm telnet
+is operating in
+.Dv LINEMODE
+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Lq mode, then this character is taken to
+be the terminal's
+.Ic worderase
+character.
+The initial value for the worderase character is taken to be
+the terminal's
+.Ic worderase
+character.
+.It Ic \&?
+Displays the legal
+.Ic set
+.Pq Ic unset
+commands.
+.El
+.It Ic slc Ar state
+The
+.Ic slc
+command (Set Local Characters) is used to set
+or change the state of the the special
+characters when the
+.Dv TELNET LINEMODE
+option has
+been enabled.  Special characters are characters that get
+mapped to
+.Tn TELNET
+commands sequences (like
+.Ic ip
+or
+.Ic quit  )
+or line editing characters (like
+.Ic erase
+and
+.Ic kill  ) .
+By default, the local special characters are exported.
+.Bl -tag -width Fl
+.It Ic check
+Verify the current settings for the current special characters.
+The remote side is requested to send all the current special
+character settings, and if there are any discrepancies with
+the local side, the local side will switch to the remote value.
+.It Ic export
+Switch to the local defaults for the special characters.  The
+local default characters are those of the local terminal at
+the time when
+.Nm telnet
+was started.
+.It Ic import
+Switch to the remote defaults for the special characters.
+The remote default characters are those of the remote system
+at the time when the
+.Tn TELNET
+connection was established.
+.It Ic \&?
+Prints out help information for the
+.Ic slc
+command.
+.El
+.It Ic status
+Show the current status of
+.Nm telnet  .
+This includes the peer one is connected to, as well
+as the current mode.
+.It Ic toggle Ar arguments ...
+Toggle (between
+.Dv TRUE
+and
+.Dv FALSE )
+various flags that control how
+.Nm telnet
+responds to events.
+These flags may be set explicitly to
+.Dv TRUE
+or
+.Dv FALSE
+using the
+.Ic set
+and
+.Ic unset
+commands listed above.
+More than one argument may be specified.
+The state of these flags may be interrogated with the
+.Ic display
+command.
+Valid arguments are:
+.Bl -tag -width Ar
+.It Ic authdebug
+Turns on debugging information for the authentication code.
+.It Ic autoflush
+If
+.Ic autoflush
+and
+.Ic localchars
+are both
+.Dv TRUE ,
+then when the
+.Ic ao  ,
+or
+.Ic quit
+characters are recognized (and transformed into
+.Tn TELNET
+sequences; see
+.Ic set
+above for details),
+.Nm telnet
+refuses to display any data on the user's terminal
+until the remote system acknowledges (via a
+.Dv TELNET TIMING MARK
+option)
+that it has processed those
+.Tn TELNET
+sequences.
+The initial value for this toggle is
+.Dv TRUE
+if the terminal user had not
+done an "stty noflsh", otherwise
+.Dv FALSE
+(see
+.Xr stty  1  ) .
+.It Ic autodecrypt
+When the
+.Dv TELNET ENCRYPT
+option is negotiated, by
+default the actual encryption (decryption) of the data
+stream does not start automatically.  The autoencrypt
+(autodecrypt) command states that encryption of the
+output (input) stream should be enabled as soon as
+possible.
+.sp
+.Pp
+Note:  Because of export controls, the
+.Dv TELNET ENCRYPT
+option is not supported outside the United States and Canada.
+.It Ic autologin
+If the remote side supports the
+.Dv TELNET AUTHENTICATION
+option
+.Tn TELNET
+attempts to use it to perform automatic authentication.  If the
+.Dv AUTHENTICATION
+option is not supported, the user's login
+name are propagated through the
+.Dv TELNET ENVIRON
+option.
+This command is the same as specifying
+.Ar a
+option on the
+.Ic open
+command.
+.It Ic autosynch
+If
+.Ic autosynch
+and
+.Ic localchars
+are both
+.Dv TRUE ,
+then when either the
+.Ic intr
+or
+.Ic quit
+characters is typed (see
+.Ic set
+above for descriptions of the
+.Ic intr
+and
+.Ic quit
+characters), the resulting
+.Tn TELNET
+sequence sent is followed by the
+.Dv TELNET SYNCH
+sequence.
+This procedure
+.Ic should
+cause the remote system to begin throwing away all previously
+typed input until both of the
+.Tn TELNET
+sequences have been read and acted upon.
+The initial value of this toggle is
+.Dv FALSE .
+.It Ic binary
+Enable or disable the
+.Dv TELNET BINARY
+option on both input and output.
+.It Ic inbinary
+Enable or disable the
+.Dv TELNET BINARY
+option on input.
+.It Ic outbinary
+Enable or disable the
+.Dv TELNET BINARY
+option on output.
+.It Ic crlf
+If this is
+.Dv TRUE ,
+then carriage returns will be sent as
+.Li <CR><LF> .
+If this is
+.Dv FALSE ,
+then carriage returns will be send as
+.Li <CR><NUL> .
+The initial value for this toggle is
+.Dv FALSE .
+.It Ic crmod
+Toggle carriage return mode.
+When this mode is enabled, most carriage return characters received from
+the remote host will be mapped into a carriage return followed by
+a line feed.
+This mode does not affect those characters typed by the user, only
+those received from the remote host.
+This mode is not very useful unless the remote host
+only sends carriage return, but never line feed.
+The initial value for this toggle is
+.Dv FALSE .
+.It Ic debug
+Toggles socket level debugging (useful only to the
+.Ic super user  ) .
+The initial value for this toggle is
+.Dv FALSE .
+.It Ic encdebug
+Turns on debugging information for the encryption code.
+.It Ic localchars
+If this is
+.Dv TRUE ,
+then the
+.Ic flush  ,
+.Ic interrupt ,
+.Ic quit  ,
+.Ic erase ,
+and
+.Ic kill
+characters (see
+.Ic set
+above) are recognized locally, and transformed into (hopefully) appropriate
+.Tn TELNET
+control sequences
+(respectively
+.Ic ao  ,
+.Ic ip ,
+.Ic brk  ,
+.Ic ec ,
+and
+.Ic el  ;
+see
+.Ic send
+above).
+The initial value for this toggle is
+.Dv TRUE
+in \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode,
+and
+.Dv FALSE
+in \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq mode.
+When the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option is enabled, the value of
+.Ic localchars
+is ignored, and assumed to always be
+.Dv TRUE .
+If
+.Dv LINEMODE
+has ever been enabled, then
+.Ic quit
+is sent as
+.Ic abort  ,
+and
+.Ic eof and
+.Ic suspend
+are sent as
+.Ic eof and
+.Ic susp ,
+see
+.Ic send
+above).
+.It Ic netdata
+Toggles the display of all network data (in hexadecimal format).
+The initial value for this toggle is
+.Dv FALSE .
+.It Ic options
+Toggles the display of some internal
+.Nm telnet
+protocol processing (having to do with
+.Tn TELNET
+options).
+The initial value for this toggle is
+.Dv FALSE .
+.ne 1i
+.It Ic prettydump
+When the
+.Ic netdata
+toggle is enabled, if
+.Ic prettydump
+is enabled the output from the
+.Ic netdata
+command will be formatted in a more user readable format.
+Spaces are put between each character in the output, and the
+beginning of any
+.Tn TELNET
+escape sequence is preceded by a '*' to aid in locating them.
+.It Ic skiprc
+When the skiprc toggle is
+.Dv TRUE ,
+.Tn TELNET
+skips the reading of the
+.Pa \&.telnetrc
+file in the users home
+directory when connections are opened.  The initial
+value for this toggle is
+.Dv FALSE.
+.It Ic termdata
+Toggles the display of all terminal data (in hexadecimal format).
+The initial value for this toggle is
+.Dv FALSE .
+.It Ic verbose_encrypt
+When the
+.Ic verbose_encrypt
+toggle is
+.Dv TRUE ,
+.Tn TELNET
+prints out a message each time encryption is enabled or
+disabled.  The initial value for this toggle is
+.Dv FALSE.
+Note:  Because of export controls, data encryption
+is not supported outside of the United States and Canada.
+.It Ic \&?
+Displays the legal
+.Ic toggle
+commands.
+.El
+.It Ic z
+Suspend
+.Nm telnet  .
+This command only works when the user is using the
+.Xr csh  1  .
+.It Ic \&! Op Ar command
+Execute a single command in a subshell on the local
+system.  If
+.Ic command
+is omitted, then an interactive
+subshell is invoked.
+.It Ic \&? Op Ar command
+Get help.  With no arguments,
+.Nm telnet
+prints a help summary.
+If a command is specified,
+.Nm telnet
+will print the help information for just that command.
+.El
+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+.Nm Telnet
+uses at least the
+.Ev HOME ,
+.Ev SHELL ,
+.Ev DISPLAY ,
+and
+.Ev TERM
+environment variables.
+Other environment variables may be propagated
+to the other side via the
+.Dv TELNET ENVIRON
+option.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width ~/.telnetrc -compact
+.It Pa ~/.telnetrc
+user customized telnet startup values
+.El
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm Telnet
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
+.Sh NOTES
+.Pp
+On some remote systems, echo has to be turned off manually when in
+\*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode.
+.Pp
+In \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode or
+.Dv LINEMODE
+the terminal's
+.Ic eof
+character is only recognized (and sent to the remote system)
+when it is the first character on a line.
diff --git a/debian/local/man/telnetd.8 b/debian/local/man/telnetd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbd812a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/telnetd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,607 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)telnetd.8	8.4 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
+.\"
+.Dd June 1, 1994
+.Dt TELNETD 8
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm telnetd
+.Nd DARPA
+.Tn TELNET
+protocol server
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm /usr/libexec/telnetd
+.Op Fl BUhlkns
+.Op Fl D Ar debugmode
+.Op Fl I Ns Ar initid
+.Op Fl S Ar tos
+.Op Fl X Ar authtype
+.Op Fl a Ar authmode
+.Op Fl edebug
+.Op Fl r Ns Ar lowpty-highpty
+.Op Fl u Ar len
+.Op Fl debug Op Ar port
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Nm telnetd
+command is a server which supports the
+.Tn DARPA
+standard
+.Tn TELNET
+virtual terminal protocol.
+.Nm Telnetd
+is normally invoked by the internet server (see
+.Xr inetd 8 )
+for requests to connect to the
+.Tn TELNET
+port as indicated by the
+.Pa /etc/services
+file (see
+.Xr services 5 ) .
+The
+.Fl debug
+option may be used to start up
+.Nm telnetd
+manually, instead of through
+.Xr inetd 8 .
+If started up this way,
+.Ar port
+may be specified to run
+.Nm telnetd
+on an alternate
+.Tn TCP
+port number.
+.Pp
+The
+.Nm telnetd
+command accepts the following options:
+.Bl -tag -width "-a authmode"
+.It Fl a Ar authmode
+This option may be used for specifying what mode should
+be used for authentication.
+Note that this option is only useful if
+.Nm telnetd
+has been compiled with support for the
+.Dv AUTHENTICATION
+option.
+There are several valid values for
+.Ar authmode:
+.Bl -tag -width debug
+.It debug
+Turns on authentication debugging code.
+.It user
+Only allow connections when the remote user
+can provide valid authentication information
+to identify the remote user,
+and is allowed access to the specified account
+without providing a password.
+.It valid
+Only allow connections when the remote user
+can provide valid authentication information
+to identify the remote user.
+The
+.Xr login 1
+command will provide any additional user verification
+needed if the remote user is not allowed automatic
+access to the specified account.
+.It other
+Only allow connections that supply some authentication information.
+This option is currently not supported
+by any of the existing authentication mechanisms,
+and is thus the same as specifying
+.Fl a
+.Cm valid .
+.It none
+This is the default state.
+Authentication information is not required.
+If no or insufficient authentication information
+is provided, then the
+.Xr login 1
+program will provide the necessary user
+verification.
+.It off
+This disables the authentication code.
+All user verification will happen through the
+.Xr login 1
+program.
+.El
+.It Fl B
+Specifies bftp server mode.  In this mode,
+.Nm telnetd
+causes login to start a
+.Xr bftp 1
+session rather than the user's
+normal shell.  In bftp daemon mode normal
+logins are not supported, and it must be used
+on a port other than the normal
+.Tn TELNET
+port.
+.It Fl D Ar debugmode
+This option may be used for debugging purposes.
+This allows
+.Nm telnetd
+to print out debugging information
+to the connection, allowing the user to see what
+.Nm telnetd
+is doing.
+There are several possible values for
+.Ar debugmode:
+.Bl -tag -width exercise
+.It Cm options
+Prints information about the negotiation of
+.Tn TELNET
+options.
+.It Cm report
+Prints the
+.Cm options
+information, plus some additional information
+about what processing is going on.
+.It Cm netdata
+Displays the data stream received by
+.Nm telnetd.
+.It Cm ptydata
+Displays data written to the pty.
+.It Cm exercise
+Has not been implemented yet.
+.El
+.It Fl debug
+Enables debugging on each socket created by
+.Nm telnetd
+(see
+.Dv SO_DEBUG
+in
+.Xr socket 2 ) .
+.It Fl edebug
+If
+.Nm telnetd
+has been compiled with support for data encryption, then the
+.Fl edebug
+option may be used to enable encryption debugging code.
+.It Fl h
+Disables the printing of host-specific information before
+login has been completed.
+.It Fl I Ar initid
+This option is only applicable to
+.Tn UNICOS
+systems prior to 7.0.
+It specifies the
+.Dv ID
+from
+.Pa /etc/inittab
+to use when init starts login sessions.  The default
+.Dv ID
+is
+.Dv fe.
+.It Fl k
+This option is only useful if
+.Nm telnetd
+has been compiled with both linemode and kludge linemode
+support.  If the
+.Fl k
+option is specified, then if the remote client does not
+support the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option, then
+.Nm telnetd
+will operate in character at a time mode.
+It will still support kludge linemode, but will only
+go into kludge linemode if the remote client requests
+it.
+(This is done by by the client sending
+.Dv DONT SUPPRESS-GO-AHEAD
+and
+.Dv DONT ECHO . )
+The
+.Fl k
+option is most useful when there are remote clients
+that do not support kludge linemode, but pass the heuristic
+(if they respond with
+.Dv WILL TIMING-MARK
+in response to a
+.Dv DO TIMING-MARK)
+for kludge linemode support.
+.It Fl l
+Specifies line mode.  Tries to force clients to use line-
+at-a-time mode.
+If the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option is not supported, it will go
+into kludge linemode.
+.It Fl n
+Disable
+.Dv TCP
+keep-alives.  Normally
+.Nm telnetd
+enables the
+.Tn TCP
+keep-alive mechanism to probe connections that
+have been idle for some period of time to determine
+if the client is still there, so that idle connections
+from machines that have crashed or can no longer
+be reached may be cleaned up.
+.It Fl r Ar lowpty-highpty
+This option is only enabled when
+.Nm telnetd
+is compiled for
+.Dv UNICOS.
+It specifies an inclusive range of pseudo-terminal devices to
+use.  If the system has sysconf variable
+.Dv _SC_CRAY_NPTY
+configured, the default pty search range is 0 to
+.Dv _SC_CRAY_NPTY;
+otherwise, the default range is 0 to 128.  Either
+.Ar lowpty
+or
+.Ar highpty
+may be omitted to allow changing
+either end of the search range.  If
+.Ar lowpty
+is omitted, the - character is still required so that
+.Nm telnetd
+can differentiate
+.Ar highpty
+from
+.Ar lowpty .
+.It Fl s
+This option is only enabled if
+.Nm telnetd
+is compiled with support for
+.Tn SecurID
+cards.
+It causes the
+.Fl s
+option to be passed on to
+.Xr login 1 ,
+and thus is only useful if
+.Xr login 1
+supports the
+.Fl s
+flag to indicate that only
+.Tn SecurID
+validated logins are allowed, and is
+usually useful for controlling remote logins
+from outside of a firewall.
+.It Fl S Ar tos
+.It Fl u Ar len
+This option is used to specify the size of the field
+in the
+.Dv utmp
+structure that holds the remote host name.
+If the resolved host name is longer than
+.Ar len ,
+the dotted decimal value will be used instead.
+This allows hosts with very long host names that
+overflow this field to still be uniquely identified.
+Specifying
+.Fl u0
+indicates that only dotted decimal addresses
+should be put into the
+.Pa utmp
+file.
+.ne 1i
+.It Fl U
+This option causes
+.Nm telnetd
+to refuse connections from addresses that
+cannot be mapped back into a symbolic name
+via the
+.Xr gethostbyaddr 3
+routine.
+.It Fl X Ar authtype
+This option is only valid if
+.Nm telnetd
+has been built with support for the authentication option.
+It disables the use of
+.Ar authtype
+authentication, and
+can be used to temporarily disable
+a specific authentication type without having to recompile
+.Nm telnetd .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Nm Telnetd
+operates by allocating a pseudo-terminal device (see
+.Xr pty 4 )
+for a client, then creating a login process which has
+the slave side of the pseudo-terminal as
+.Dv stdin ,
+.Dv stdout
+and
+.Dv stderr .
+.Nm Telnetd
+manipulates the master side of the pseudo-terminal,
+implementing the
+.Tn TELNET
+protocol and passing characters
+between the remote client and the login process.
+.Pp
+When a
+.Tn TELNET
+session is started up,
+.Nm telnetd
+sends
+.Tn TELNET
+options to the client side indicating
+a willingness to do the
+following
+.Tn TELNET
+options, which are described in more detail below:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+DO AUTHENTICATION
+WILL ENCRYPT
+DO TERMINAL TYPE
+DO TSPEED
+DO XDISPLOC
+DO NEW-ENVIRON
+DO ENVIRON
+WILL SUPPRESS GO AHEAD
+DO ECHO
+DO LINEMODE
+DO NAWS
+WILL STATUS
+DO LFLOW
+DO TIMING-MARK
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The pseudo-terminal allocated to the client is configured
+to operate in
+.Dq cooked
+mode, and with
+.Dv XTABS and
+.Dv CRMOD
+enabled (see
+.Xr tty 4 ) .
+.Pp
+.Nm Telnetd
+has support for enabling locally the following
+.Tn TELNET
+options:
+.Bl -tag -width "DO AUTHENTICATION"
+.It "WILL ECHO"
+When the
+.Dv LINEMODE
+option is enabled, a
+.Dv WILL ECHO
+or
+.Dv WONT ECHO
+will be sent to the client to indicate the
+current state of terminal echoing.
+When terminal echo is not desired, a
+.Dv WILL ECHO
+is sent to indicate that
+.Tn telnetd
+will take care of echoing any data that needs to be
+echoed to the terminal, and then nothing is echoed.
+When terminal echo is desired, a
+.Dv WONT ECHO
+is sent to indicate that
+.Tn telnetd
+will not be doing any terminal echoing, so the
+client should do any terminal echoing that is needed.
+.It "WILL BINARY"
+Indicates that the client is willing to send a
+8 bits of data, rather than the normal 7 bits
+of the Network Virtual Terminal.
+.It "WILL SGA"
+Indicates that it will not be sending
+.Dv IAC GA,
+go ahead, commands.
+.It "WILL STATUS"
+Indicates a willingness to send the client, upon
+request, of the current status of all
+.Tn TELNET
+options.
+.It "WILL TIMING-MARK"
+Whenever a
+.Dv DO TIMING-MARK
+command is received, it is always responded
+to with a
+.Dv WILL TIMING-MARK
+.ne 1i
+.It "WILL LOGOUT"
+When a
+.Dv DO LOGOUT
+is received, a
+.Dv WILL LOGOUT
+is sent in response, and the
+.Tn TELNET
+session is shut down.
+.It "WILL ENCRYPT"
+Only sent if
+.Nm telnetd
+is compiled with support for data encryption, and
+indicates a willingness to decrypt
+the data stream.
+.El
+.Pp
+.Nm Telnetd
+has support for enabling remotely the following
+.Tn TELNET
+options:
+.Bl -tag -width "DO AUTHENTICATION"
+.It "DO BINARY"
+Sent to indicate that
+.Tn telnetd
+is willing to receive an 8 bit data stream.
+.It "DO LFLOW"
+Requests that the client handle flow control
+characters remotely.
+.It "DO ECHO"
+This is not really supported, but is sent to identify a 4.2BSD
+.Xr telnet 1
+client, which will improperly respond with
+.Dv WILL ECHO.
+If a
+.Dv WILL ECHO
+is received, a
+.Dv DONT ECHO
+will be sent in response.
+.It "DO TERMINAL-TYPE"
+Indicates a desire to be able to request the
+name of the type of terminal that is attached
+to the client side of the connection.
+.It "DO SGA"
+Indicates that it does not need to receive
+.Dv IAC GA,
+the go ahead command.
+.It "DO NAWS"
+Requests that the client inform the server when
+the window (display) size changes.
+.It "DO TERMINAL-SPEED"
+Indicates a desire to be able to request information
+about the speed of the serial line to which
+the client is attached.
+.It "DO XDISPLOC"
+Indicates a desire to be able to request the name
+of the X windows display that is associated with
+the telnet client.
+.It "DO NEW-ENVIRON"
+Indicates a desire to be able to request environment
+variable information, as described in RFC 1572.
+.It "DO ENVIRON"
+Indicates a desire to be able to request environment
+variable information, as described in RFC 1408.
+.It "DO LINEMODE"
+Only sent if
+.Nm telnetd
+is compiled with support for linemode, and
+requests that the client do line by line processing.
+.It "DO TIMING-MARK"
+Only sent if
+.Nm telnetd
+is compiled with support for both linemode and
+kludge linemode, and the client responded with
+.Dv WONT LINEMODE.
+If the client responds with
+.Dv WILL TM,
+the it is assumed that the client supports
+kludge linemode.
+Note that the
+.Op Fl k
+option can be used to disable this.
+.It "DO AUTHENTICATION"
+Only sent if
+.Nm telnetd
+is compiled with support for authentication, and
+indicates a willingness to receive authentication
+information for automatic login.
+.It "DO ENCRYPT"
+Only sent if
+.Nm telnetd
+is compiled with support for data encryption, and
+indicates a willingness to decrypt
+the data stream.
+.El
+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+.Sh FILES
+.Pa /etc/services
+.br
+.Pa /etc/inittab
+(UNICOS systems only)
+.br
+.Pa /etc/iptos
+(if supported)
+.br
+.Pa /usr/ucb/bftp
+(if supported)
+.Sh "SEE ALSO"
+.Xr telnet 1 ,
+.Xr login 1 ,
+.Xr bftp 1
+(if supported)
+.Sh STANDARDS
+.Bl -tag -compact -width RFC-1572
+.It Cm RFC-854
+.Tn TELNET
+PROTOCOL SPECIFICATION
+.It Cm RFC-855
+TELNET OPTION SPECIFICATIONS
+.It Cm RFC-856
+TELNET BINARY TRANSMISSION
+.It Cm RFC-857
+TELNET ECHO OPTION
+.It Cm RFC-858
+TELNET SUPPRESS GO AHEAD OPTION
+.It Cm RFC-859
+TELNET STATUS OPTION
+.It Cm RFC-860
+TELNET TIMING MARK OPTION
+.It Cm RFC-861
+TELNET EXTENDED OPTIONS - LIST OPTION
+.It Cm RFC-885
+TELNET END OF RECORD OPTION
+.It Cm RFC-1073
+Telnet Window Size Option
+.It Cm RFC-1079
+Telnet Terminal Speed Option
+.It Cm RFC-1091
+Telnet Terminal-Type Option
+.It Cm RFC-1096
+Telnet X Display Location Option
+.It Cm RFC-1123
+Requirements for Internet Hosts -- Application and Support
+.It Cm RFC-1184
+Telnet Linemode Option
+.It Cm RFC-1372
+Telnet Remote Flow Control Option
+.It Cm RFC-1416
+Telnet Authentication Option
+.It Cm RFC-1411
+Telnet Authentication: Kerberos Version 4
+.It Cm RFC-1412
+Telnet Authentication: SPX
+.It Cm RFC-1571
+Telnet Environment Option Interoperability Issues
+.It Cm RFC-1572
+Telnet Environment Option
+.El
+.Sh BUGS
+Some
+.Tn TELNET
+commands are only partially implemented.
+.Pp
+Because of bugs in the original 4.2 BSD
+.Xr telnet 1 ,
+.Nm telnetd
+performs some dubious protocol exchanges to try to discover if the remote
+client is, in fact, a 4.2 BSD
+.Xr telnet 1 .
+.Pp
+Binary mode
+has no common interpretation except between similar operating systems
+(Unix in this case).
+.Pp
+The terminal type name received from the remote client is converted to
+lower case.
+.Pp
+.Nm Telnetd
+never sends
+.Tn TELNET
+.Dv IAC GA
+(go ahead) commands.
diff --git a/debian/local/man/tftp.1 b/debian/local/man/tftp.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e47a78e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/tftp.1
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993, 1994
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)tftp.1	8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94
+.\"
+.Dd April 18, 1994
+.Dt TFTP 1
+.Os BSD 4.3
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm tftp
+.Nd trivial file transfer program
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm tftp
+.Op Ar host
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Tftp
+is the user interface to the Internet
+.Tn TFTP
+(Trivial File Transfer Protocol),
+which allows users to transfer files to and from a remote machine.
+The remote
+.Ar host
+may be specified on the command line, in which case
+.Nm tftp
+uses
+.Ar host
+as the default host for future transfers (see the
+.Cm connect
+command below).
+.Sh COMMANDS
+Once
+.Nm tftp
+is running, it issues the prompt
+.LI tftp>
+and recognizes the following commands:
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width verbose -compact
+.It Cm \&? Ar command-name ...
+Print help information.
+.Pp
+.It Cm ascii
+Shorthand for "mode ascii"
+.Pp
+.It Cm binary
+Shorthand for "mode binary"
+.Pp
+.It Cm connect Ar host-name Op Ar port
+Set the
+.Ar host
+(and optionally
+.Ar port )
+for transfers.
+Note that the
+.Tn TFTP
+protocol, unlike the
+.Tn FTP
+protocol,
+does not maintain connections between transfers; thus, the
+.Cm connect
+command does not actually create a connection,
+but merely remembers what host is to be used for transfers.
+You do not have to use the
+.Cm connect
+command; the remote host can be specified as part of the
+.Cm get
+or
+.Cm put
+commands.
+.Pp
+.It Cm get Ar filename
+.It Cm get Ar remotename localname
+.It Cm get Ar file1 file2 ...  fileN
+Get a file or set of files from the specified
+.Ar sources .
+.Ar Source
+can be in one of two forms:
+a filename on the remote host, if the host has already been specified,
+or a string of the form
+.Ar hosts:filename
+to specify both a host and filename at the same time.
+If the latter form is used,
+the last hostname specified becomes the default for future transfers.
+.Pp
+.It Cm mode Ar transfer-mode
+Set the mode for transfers;
+.Ar transfer-mode
+may be one of
+.Em ascii
+or
+.Em binary .
+The default is
+.Em ascii .
+.Pp
+.It Cm put Ar file
+.It Cm put Ar localfile remotefile
+.It Cm put Ar file1 file2 ... fileN remote-directory
+Put a file or set of files to the specified
+remote file or directory.
+The destination
+can be in one of two forms:
+a filename on the remote host, if the host has already been specified,
+or a string of the form
+.Ar hosts:filename
+to specify both a host and filename at the same time.
+If the latter form is used,
+the hostname specified becomes the default for future transfers.
+If the remote-directory form is used, the remote host is
+assumed to be a
+.Tn UNIX
+machine.
+.Pp
+.It Cm quit
+Exit
+.Nm tftp .
+An end of file also exits.
+.Pp
+.It Cm rexmt Ar retransmission-timeout
+Set the per-packet retransmission timeout, in seconds.
+.Pp
+.It Cm status
+Show current status.
+.Pp
+.It Cm timeout Ar total-transmission-timeout
+Set the total transmission timeout, in seconds.
+.Pp
+.It Cm trace
+Toggle packet tracing.
+.Pp
+.It Cm verbose
+Toggle verbose mode.
+.El
+.Sh BUGS
+.Pp
+Because there is no user-login or validation within
+the
+.Tn TFTP
+protocol, the remote site will probably have some
+sort of file-access restrictions in place.  The
+exact methods are specific to each site and therefore
+difficult to document here.
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.3 .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/tftpd.8 b/debian/local/man/tftpd.8
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac6a59a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/tftpd.8
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)tftpd.8	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93
+.\"
+.Dd June 4, 1993
+.Dt TFTPD 8
+.Os BSD 4.2
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm tftpd
+.Nd
+Internet Trivial File Transfer Protocol server
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm tftpd
+.Op Fl l
+.Op Fl n
+.Op Ar directory ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm Tftpd
+is a server which supports the
+Internet Trivial File Transfer
+Protocol (\c
+.Tn RFC 783).
+The
+.Tn TFTP
+server operates
+at the port indicated in the
+.Ql tftp
+service description;
+see
+.Xr services 5 .
+The server is normally started by
+.Xr inetd 8 .
+.Pp
+The use of
+.Xr tftp 1
+does not require an account or password on the remote system.
+Due to the lack of authentication information,
+.Nm tftpd
+will allow only publicly readable files to be
+accessed.
+Files containing the string ``/\|\fB.\|.\fP\|/'' are not allowed.
+Files may be written only if they already exist and are publicly writable.
+Note that this extends the concept of
+.Dq public
+to include
+all users on all hosts that can be reached through the network;
+this may not be appropriate on all systems, and its implications
+should be considered before enabling tftp service.
+The server should have the user ID with the lowest possible privilege.
+.Pp
+Access to files may be restricted by invoking
+.Nm tftpd
+with a list of directories by including up to 20 pathnames
+as server program arguments in
+.Pa /etc/inetd.conf .
+In this case access is restricted to files whose
+names are prefixed by the one of the given directories.
+The given directories are also treated as a search path for
+relative filename requests.
+.Pp
+The options are:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Fl l
+Logs all requests using
+.Xr syslog 3 .
+.It Fl n
+Suppresses negative acknowledgement of requests for nonexistent
+relative filenames.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr tftp 1 ,
+.Xr inetd 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/debian/local/man/whois.1 b/debian/local/man/whois.1
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7424da8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/local/man/whois.1
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+.TH WHOIS 1 "3 December 1999" "Marco d'Itri" "Debian GNU/Linux"
+.SH NAME
+whois \- client for the whois directory service
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.B whois
+[\~\fB-h\fP\~\fIHOST\fP\~]
+[\~\fB-p\fP\~ \fIPORT\fP\~]
+[\~\fB-aCFHlLMmrRSVx\fP\~]
+[\~\fB-g\fP\~\fISOURCE:FIRST-LAST\fP\~]
+[\~\fB-i\fP\~\fIATTR\fP\~]
+[\~\fB-S\fP\~\fISOURCE\fP\~]
+[\~\fB-T\fP\~\fITYPE\fP\~]
+.I object
+
+.B whois
+[\~\fI-t\fP\~]
+[\~\fI-v\fP\~]
+.I template
+.B whois
+[\~\fI-q\fP\~]
+.I keyword
+.PP
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\fBwhois\fP searches for an object in a \fIRFC-812\fP database.
+
+This version of the whois client tries to guess the right server to
+ask for the specified object. If no guess can be made it will connect
+to whois.internic.net for domains,
+.\" whois.networksolutions.com for nic handles,
+whois.arin.net for IPv4 addresses and whois.6bone.net for
+IPv6 addresses.
+.PP
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP 8
+.B \-h HOST
+Connect to HOST.
+.TP 8
+.B \-H
+Do not display the legal disclaimers some registries like to show you.
+.TP 8
+.B \-p PORT
+Connect to PORT.
+.TP 8
+.B \-V
+Be verbose.
+.TP 8
+Other options are flags understood by RIPE-like servers.
+.SH NOTES
+Please remember that \fIwhois.networksolutions.com\fP by default will
+only search in the domains database. If you want to search for hostnames,
+NIC handles or people names you have to prepend the appropriate keyword
+(\fIHO\fPst, \fIHA\fPndle or \fINA\fPme).
+.P
+If the \fI!\fP character is prepended to a NIC handle, the default
+server becomes \fIwhois.networksolutions.com\fP.
+.P
+When querying \fIwhois.arin.net\fP for AS numbers, the program will
+automatically convert the request in the appropriate format, inserting
+a space after the string "AS".
+.P
+When querying \fIwhois.ncst.ernet.in\fP for a string without spaces, the
+\fIdomain\fP keyword is prepended.
+.P
+When querying \fIwhois.corenic.net\fP, machine readable output is requested.
+.P
+RIPE-specific options are ignored when querying non-RIPE servers.
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.IP LANG
+When querying \fIwhois.nic.ad.jp\fP english text is requested unless the
+\fILANG\fP environment variable specifies a Japanese locale.
+.IP "WHOIS_SERVER"
+This server will be queried if the program cannot guess where the object
+is located. If the variable does not exist then
+\fIwhois.internic.net\fP will be queried.
+.IP "WHOIS_HIDE"
+If this variable is defined, legal disclaimers will be hidden even if
+the \fI-H\fP flag is not used.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+\fIRFC 812\fP: NICNAME/WHOIS
+.PP
+\fIRIPE-157\fP, \fIRIPE-189\fP: RIPE NCC Database Documentation
+.PP
+Detailed help on available flags can be found in \fIRIPE-157\fP or in
+the help file which can be obtained with the command:
+.IP
+.B whois -h whois.ripe.net HELP
+.SH HISTORY
+This program closely tracks the user interface of the whois client
+developed at RIPE by Ambrose Magee and others on the base of the
+original BSD client.
+I also added support for the protocol extensions developed by David
+Kessens of QWest for the 6bone server.
+.SH AUTHOR
+.B Whois
+and this man page were written by Marco d'Itri <\fImd@linux.it\fP>
+and are licensed under the GPL.
diff --git a/debian/patches/01_disable_useless_man_pages.patch b/debian/patches/01_disable_useless_man_pages.patch
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..713a8bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/patches/01_disable_useless_man_pages.patch
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+From 51aff90bccf50ebee86c7e4945f2b059f93aefd2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
+From: Guillem Jover <guillem@hadrons.org>
+Date: Wed, 9 Jun 2010 03:56:08 +0200
+Subject: [PATCH] Disable useless man pages
+
+---
+ Makefile.am         |    2 +-
+ configure.ac        |    2 -
+
+diff --git a/Makefile.am b/Makefile.am
+index 7af1c56..34d105b 100644
+--- a/Makefile.am
++++ b/Makefile.am
+@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ EXTRA_DIST = README-alpha paths ChangeLog.0
+ SUBDIRS = lib \
+ 	libinetutils libtelnet libicmp libls \
+ 	src telnet telnetd ftp ftpd talk talkd whois ping ifconfig \
+-	doc man \
++	doc \
+ 	tests
+ 
+ DISTCLEANFILES = pathdefs.make paths.defs $(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION).tar.gz
+diff --git a/configure.ac b/configure.ac
+index 2b60bde..f582074 100644
+--- a/configure.ac
++++ b/configure.ac
+@@ -133,7 +133,6 @@ AC_PROG_MAKE_SET
+ AC_PROG_RANLIB
+ AC_PROG_YACC
+ AC_PROG_LN_S
+-AM_MISSING_PROG(HELP2MAN, help2man, $missing_dir)
+ 
+ gl_INIT
+ 
+@@ -812,7 +811,6 @@ ping/Makefile
+ ifconfig/Makefile
+ ifconfig/system/Makefile
+ doc/Makefile
+-man/Makefile
+ tests/Makefile
+ confpaths.h:confpaths.h.in
+ ])
diff --git a/debian/patches/01_revert_manpage_removal.patch b/debian/patches/01_revert_manpage_removal.patch
deleted file mode 100644
index c521ebf..0000000
--- a/debian/patches/01_revert_manpage_removal.patch
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7160 +0,0 @@
-From 51aff90bccf50ebee86c7e4945f2b059f93aefd2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
-From: Guillem Jover <guillem@hadrons.org>
-Date: Wed, 9 Jun 2010 03:56:08 +0200
-Subject: [PATCH] Revert "2009-04-30  Alfred M. Szmidt  <ams@gnu.org>"
-
-This reverts commit fed208adedb4b336135f5f82f0a1430e4d25a4d1.
----
- Makefile.am         |    2 +-
- configure.ac        |    2 -
- ftp/Makefile.am     |    6 +
- ftp/ftp.1           | 1155 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
- ftpd/Makefile.am    |    8 +-
- ftpd/ftpd.8         |  300 +++++++++++
- whois/whois.1       |   96 ++++
- libls/Makefile.am   |    2 +
- libls/ls.1          |  446 +++++++++++++++++
- ping/Makefile.am    |    8 +
- ping/ping.8         |  328 +++++++++++++
- src/Makefile.am     |   37 ++
- src/inetd.8         |  439 +++++++++++++++++
- src/logger.1        |   96 ++++
- src/rcp.1           |  155 ++++++
- src/rexecd.8        |  145 ++++++
- src/rlogin.1        |  184 +++++++
- src/rlogind.8       |  164 ++++++
- src/rsh.1           |  183 +++++++
- src/rshd.8          |  205 ++++++++
- src/syslog.conf.5   |  251 ++++++++++
- src/syslogd.8       |  163 ++++++
- src/tftp.1          |  169 +++++++
- src/tftpd.8         |  102 ++++
- talk/Makefile.am    |    6 +
- talk/talk.1         |  125 +++++
- talkd/Makefile.am   |    6 +
- talkd/talkd.8       |   71 +++
- telnet/Makefile.am  |    6 +
- telnet/telnet.1     | 1362 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
- telnetd/Makefile.am |    7 +
- telnetd/telnetd.8   |  603 +++++++++++++++++++++++
- 32 files changed, 6827 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
- create mode 100644 ftp/ftp.1
- create mode 100644 ftpd/ftpd.8
- create mode 100644 whois/whois.1
- create mode 100644 libls/ls.1
- create mode 100755 ping/ping.8
- create mode 100644 src/inetd.8
- create mode 100644 src/logger.1
- create mode 100644 src/rcp.1
- create mode 100644 src/rexecd.8
- create mode 100644 src/rlogin.1
- create mode 100644 src/rlogind.8
- create mode 100644 src/rsh.1
- create mode 100644 src/rshd.8
- create mode 100644 src/syslog.conf.5
- create mode 100644 src/syslogd.8
- create mode 100644 src/tftp.1
- create mode 100644 src/tftpd.8
- create mode 100644 talk/talk.1
- create mode 100644 talkd/talkd.8
- create mode 100644 telnet/telnet.1
- create mode 100644 telnetd/telnetd.8
-
-diff --git a/Makefile.am b/Makefile.am
-index 7af1c56..34d105b 100644
---- a/Makefile.am
-+++ b/Makefile.am
-@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ EXTRA_DIST = README-alpha paths ChangeLog.0
- SUBDIRS = lib \
- 	libinetutils libtelnet libicmp libls \
- 	src telnet telnetd ftp ftpd talk talkd whois ping ifconfig \
--	doc man \
-+	doc \
- 	tests
- 
- DISTCLEANFILES = pathdefs.make paths.defs $(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION).tar.gz
-diff --git a/configure.ac b/configure.ac
-index 2b60bde..f582074 100644
---- a/configure.ac
-+++ b/configure.ac
-@@ -133,7 +133,6 @@ AC_PROG_MAKE_SET
- AC_PROG_RANLIB
- AC_PROG_YACC
- AC_PROG_LN_S
--AM_MISSING_PROG(HELP2MAN, help2man, $missing_dir)
- 
- gl_INIT
- 
-@@ -812,7 +811,6 @@ ping/Makefile
- ifconfig/Makefile
- ifconfig/system/Makefile
- doc/Makefile
--man/Makefile
- tests/Makefile
- confpaths.h:confpaths.h.in
- ])
-diff --git a/ftp/Makefile.am b/ftp/Makefile.am
-index 9693eed..53ea666 100644
---- a/ftp/Makefile.am
-+++ b/ftp/Makefile.am
-@@ -25,6 +25,12 @@ ftp_SOURCES = cmds.c cmdtab.c domacro.c ftp.c main.c ruserpass.c
- 
- noinst_HEADERS = extern.h ftp_var.h
- 
-+if ENABLE_ftp
-+man_MANS = ftp.1
-+endif
-+
-+EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
-+
- @PATHDEFS_MAKE@
- 
- INCLUDES = -I$(top_srcdir)/lib -I../lib -I$(top_srcdir)/libinetutils 
-diff --git a/ftp/ftp.1 b/ftp/ftp.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..f05718c
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/ftp/ftp.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,1155 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1989, 1990, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"	@(#)ftp.1	8.3 (Berkeley) 10/9/94
-+.\"
-+.Dd October 9, 1994
-+.Dt FTP 1
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm ftp
-+.Nd
-+.Tn ARPANET
-+file transfer program
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm ftp
-+.Op Fl v
-+.Op Fl d
-+.Op Fl i
-+.Op Fl n
-+.Op Fl g
-+.Op Ar host
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Ftp
-+is the user interface to the
-+.Tn ARPANET
-+standard File Transfer Protocol.
-+The program allows a user to transfer files to and from a
-+remote network site.
-+.Pp
-+Options may be specified at the command line, or to the
-+command interpreter.
-+.Bl -tag -width flag
-+.It Fl v
-+Verbose option forces
-+.Nm ftp
-+to show all responses from the remote server, as well
-+as report on data transfer statistics.
-+.It Fl n
-+Restrains
-+.Nm ftp
-+from attempting \*(Lqauto-login\*(Rq upon initial connection.
-+If auto-login is enabled,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will check the
-+.Pa .netrc
-+(see below) file in the user's home directory for an entry describing
-+an account on the remote machine.
-+If no entry exists,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will prompt for the remote machine login name (default is the user
-+identity on the local machine), and, if necessary, prompt for a password
-+and an account with which to login.
-+.It Fl i
-+Turns off interactive prompting during
-+multiple file transfers.
-+.It Fl d
-+Enables debugging.
-+.It Fl g
-+Disables file name globbing.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+The client host with which
-+.Nm ftp
-+is to communicate may be specified on the command line.
-+If this is done,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will immediately attempt to establish a connection to an
-+.Tn FTP
-+server on that host; otherwise,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will enter its command interpreter and await instructions
-+from the user.
-+When
-+.Nm ftp
-+is awaiting commands from the user the prompt
-+.Ql ftp>
-+is provided to the user.
-+The following commands are recognized
-+by
-+.Nm ftp  :
-+.Bl -tag -width Fl
-+.It Ic \&! Op Ar command Op Ar args
-+Invoke an interactive shell on the local machine.
-+If there are arguments, the first is taken to be a command to execute
-+directly, with the rest of the arguments as its arguments.
-+.It Ic \&$ Ar macro-name Op Ar args
-+Execute the macro
-+.Ar macro-name
-+that was defined with the
-+.Ic macdef
-+command.
-+Arguments are passed to the macro unglobbed.
-+.It Ic account Op Ar passwd
-+Supply a supplemental password required by a remote system for access
-+to resources once a login has been successfully completed.
-+If no argument is included, the user will be prompted for an account
-+password in a non-echoing input mode.
-+.It Ic append Ar local-file Op Ar remote-file
-+Append a local file to a file on the remote machine.
-+If
-+.Ar remote-file
-+is left unspecified, the local file name is used in naming the
-+remote file after being altered by any
-+.Ic ntrans
-+or
-+.Ic nmap
-+setting.
-+File transfer uses the current settings for
-+.Ic type  ,
-+.Ic format ,
-+.Ic mode  ,
-+and
-+.Ic structure .
-+.It Ic ascii
-+Set the file transfer
-+.Ic type
-+to network
-+.Tn ASCII .
-+This is the default type.
-+.It Ic bell
-+Arrange that a bell be sounded after each file transfer
-+command is completed.
-+.It Ic binary
-+Set the file transfer
-+.Ic type
-+to support binary image transfer.
-+.It Ic bye
-+Terminate the
-+.Tn FTP
-+session with the remote server
-+and exit
-+.Nm ftp  .
-+An end of file will also terminate the session and exit.
-+.It Ic case
-+Toggle remote computer file name case mapping during
-+.Ic mget
-+commands.
-+When
-+.Ic case
-+is on (default is off), remote computer file names with all letters in
-+upper case are written in the local directory with the letters mapped
-+to lower case.
-+.It Ic \&cd Ar remote-directory
-+Change the working directory on the remote machine
-+to
-+.Ar remote-directory  .
-+.It Ic cdup
-+Change the remote machine working directory to the parent of the
-+current remote machine working directory.
-+.It Ic chmod Ar mode file-name
-+Change the permission modes of the file
-+.Ar file-name
-+on the remote
-+sytem to
-+.Ar mode  .
-+.It Ic close
-+Terminate the
-+.Tn FTP
-+session with the remote server, and
-+return to the command interpreter.
-+Any defined macros are erased.
-+.It Ic \&cr
-+Toggle carriage return stripping during
-+ascii type file retrieval.
-+Records are denoted by a carriage return/linefeed sequence
-+during ascii type file transfer.
-+When
-+.Ic \&cr
-+is on (the default), carriage returns are stripped from this
-+sequence to conform with the
-+.Ux
-+single linefeed record
-+delimiter.
-+Records on
-+.Pf non\- Ns Ux
-+remote systems may contain single linefeeds;
-+when an ascii type transfer is made, these linefeeds may be
-+distinguished from a record delimiter only when
-+.Ic \&cr
-+is off.
-+.It Ic delete Ar remote-file
-+Delete the file
-+.Ar remote-file
-+on the remote machine.
-+.It Ic debug Op Ar debug-value
-+Toggle debugging mode.
-+If an optional
-+.Ar debug-value
-+is specified it is used to set the debugging level.
-+When debugging is on,
-+.Nm ftp
-+prints each command sent to the remote machine, preceded
-+by the string
-+.Ql \-\->
-+.It Xo
-+.Ic dir
-+.Op Ar remote-directory
-+.Op Ar local-file
-+.Xc
-+Print a listing of the directory contents in the
-+directory,
-+.Ar remote-directory  ,
-+and, optionally, placing the output in
-+.Ar local-file  .
-+If interactive prompting is on,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-+target local file for receiving
-+.Ic dir
-+output.
-+If no directory is specified, the current working
-+directory on the remote machine is used.
-+If no local
-+file is specified, or
-+.Ar local-file
-+is
-+.Fl  ,
-+output comes to the terminal.
-+.It Ic disconnect
-+A synonym for
-+.Ar close  .
-+.It Ic form Ar format
-+Set the file transfer
-+.Ic form
-+to
-+.Ar format  .
-+The default format is \*(Lqfile\*(Rq.
-+.It Ic get Ar remote-file Op Ar local-file
-+Retrieve the
-+.Ar remote-file
-+and store it on the local machine.
-+If the local
-+file name is not specified, it is given the same
-+name it has on the remote machine, subject to
-+alteration by the current
-+.Ic case  ,
-+.Ic ntrans ,
-+and
-+.Ic nmap
-+settings.
-+The current settings for
-+.Ic type  ,
-+.Ic form ,
-+.Ic mode  ,
-+and
-+.Ic structure
-+are used while transferring the file.
-+.It Ic glob
-+Toggle filename expansion for
-+.Ic mdelete  ,
-+.Ic mget
-+and
-+.Ic mput  .
-+If globbing is turned off with
-+.Ic glob  ,
-+the file name arguments
-+are taken literally and not expanded.
-+Globbing for
-+.Ic mput
-+is done as in
-+.Xr csh 1 .
-+For
-+.Ic mdelete
-+and
-+.Ic mget  ,
-+each remote file name is expanded
-+separately on the remote machine and the lists are not merged.
-+Expansion of a directory name is likely to be
-+different from expansion of the name of an ordinary file:
-+the exact result depends on the foreign operating system and ftp server,
-+and can be previewed by doing
-+.Ql mls remote-files \-
-+Note:
-+.Ic mget
-+and
-+.Ic mput
-+are not meant to transfer
-+entire directory subtrees of files.
-+That can be done by
-+transferring a
-+.Xr tar 1
-+archive of the subtree (in binary mode).
-+.It Ic hash Op Ar size
-+Toggle hash-sign (``#'') printing for each data block
-+transferred.
-+The 
-+.Ar size
-+of a data block can optionally be specified.  If not given, it defaults to 1024 bytes.
-+.It Ic help Op Ar command
-+Print an informative message about the meaning of
-+.Ar command  .
-+If no argument is given,
-+.Nm ftp
-+prints a list of the known commands.
-+.It Ic idle Op Ar seconds
-+Set the inactivity timer on the remote server to
-+.Ar seconds
-+seconds.
-+If
-+.Ar seconds
-+is omitted, the current inactivity timer is printed.
-+.It Ic lcd Op Ar directory
-+Change the working directory on the local machine.
-+If
-+no
-+.Ar directory
-+is specified, the user's home directory is used.
-+.It Xo
-+.Ic \&ls
-+.Op Ar remote-directory
-+.Op Ar local-file
-+.Xc
-+Print a listing of the contents of a
-+directory on the remote machine.
-+The listing includes any system-dependent information that the server
-+chooses to include; for example, most
-+.Ux
-+systems will produce
-+output from the command
-+.Ql ls \-l .
-+(See also
-+.Ic nlist . )
-+If
-+.Ar remote-directory
-+is left unspecified, the current working directory is used.
-+If interactive prompting is on,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-+target local file for receiving
-+.Ic \&ls
-+output.
-+If no local file is specified, or if
-+.Ar local-file
-+is
-+.Sq Fl ,
-+the output is sent to the terminal.
-+.It Ic macdef Ar macro-name
-+Define a macro.
-+Subsequent lines are stored as the macro
-+.Ar macro-name  ;
-+a null line (consecutive newline characters
-+in a file or
-+carriage returns from the terminal) terminates macro input mode.
-+There is a limit of 16 macros and 4096 total characters in all
-+defined macros.
-+Macros remain defined until a
-+.Ic close
-+command is executed.
-+The macro processor interprets `$' and `\e' as special characters.
-+A `$' followed by a number (or numbers) is replaced by the
-+corresponding argument on the macro invocation command line.
-+A `$' followed by an `i' signals that macro processor that the
-+executing macro is to be looped.
-+On the first pass `$i' is
-+replaced by the first argument on the macro invocation command line,
-+on the second pass it is replaced by the second argument, and so on.
-+A `\e' followed by any character is replaced by that character.
-+Use the `\e' to prevent special treatment of the `$'.
-+.It Ic mdelete Op Ar remote-files
-+Delete the
-+.Ar remote-files
-+on the remote machine.
-+.It Ic mdir Ar remote-files local-file
-+Like
-+.Ic dir  ,
-+except multiple remote files may be specified.
-+If interactive prompting is on,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-+target local file for receiving
-+.Ic mdir
-+output.
-+.It Ic mget Ar remote-files
-+Expand the
-+.Ar remote-files
-+on the remote machine
-+and do a
-+.Ic get
-+for each file name thus produced.
-+See
-+.Ic glob
-+for details on the filename expansion.
-+Resulting file names will then be processed according to
-+.Ic case  ,
-+.Ic ntrans ,
-+and
-+.Ic nmap
-+settings.
-+Files are transferred into the local working directory,
-+which can be changed with
-+.Ql lcd directory ;
-+new local directories can be created with
-+.Ql "\&! mkdir directory" .
-+.It Ic mkdir Ar directory-name
-+Make a directory on the remote machine.
-+.It Ic mls Ar remote-files local-file
-+Like
-+.Ic nlist  ,
-+except multiple remote files may be specified,
-+and the
-+.Ar local-file
-+must be specified.
-+If interactive prompting is on,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-+target local file for receiving
-+.Ic mls
-+output.
-+.It Ic mode Op Ar mode-name
-+Set the file transfer
-+.Ic mode
-+to
-+.Ar mode-name  .
-+The default mode is \*(Lqstream\*(Rq mode.
-+.It Ic modtime Ar file-name
-+Show the last modification time of the file on the remote machine.
-+.It Ic mput Ar local-files
-+Expand wild cards in the list of local files given as arguments
-+and do a
-+.Ic put
-+for each file in the resulting list.
-+See
-+.Ic glob
-+for details of filename expansion.
-+Resulting file names will then be processed according to
-+.Ic ntrans
-+and
-+.Ic nmap
-+settings.
-+.It Ic newer Ar file-name
-+Get the file only if the modification time of the remote file is more
-+recent that the file on the current system.
-+If the file does not
-+exist on the current system, the remote file is considered
-+.Ic newer  .
-+Otherwise, this command is identical to
-+.Ar get  .
-+.It Xo
-+.Ic nlist
-+.Op Ar remote-directory
-+.Op Ar local-file
-+.Xc
-+Print a  list of the files in a
-+directory on the remote machine.
-+If
-+.Ar remote-directory
-+is left unspecified, the current working directory is used.
-+If interactive prompting is on,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-+target local file for receiving
-+.Ic nlist
-+output.
-+If no local file is specified, or if
-+.Ar local-file
-+is
-+.Fl  ,
-+the output is sent to the terminal.
-+.It Ic nmap Op Ar inpattern outpattern
-+Set or unset the filename mapping mechanism.
-+If no arguments are specified, the filename mapping mechanism is unset.
-+If arguments are specified, remote filenames are mapped during
-+.Ic mput
-+commands and
-+.Ic put
-+commands issued without a specified remote target filename.
-+If arguments are specified, local filenames are mapped during
-+.Ic mget
-+commands and
-+.Ic get
-+commands issued without a specified local target filename.
-+This command is useful when connecting to a
-+.No non\- Ns Ux
-+remote computer
-+with different file naming conventions or practices.
-+The mapping follows the pattern set by
-+.Ar inpattern
-+and
-+.Ar outpattern  .
-+.Op Ar Inpattern
-+is a template for incoming filenames (which may have already been
-+processed according to the
-+.Ic ntrans
-+and
-+.Ic case
-+settings).
-+Variable templating is accomplished by including the
-+sequences `$1', `$2', ..., `$9' in
-+.Ar inpattern  .
-+Use `\\' to prevent this special treatment of the `$' character.
-+All other characters are treated literally, and are used to determine the
-+.Ic nmap
-+.Op Ar inpattern
-+variable values.
-+For example, given
-+.Ar inpattern
-+$1.$2 and the remote file name "mydata.data", $1 would have the value
-+"mydata", and $2 would have the value "data".
-+The
-+.Ar outpattern
-+determines the resulting mapped filename.
-+The sequences `$1', `$2', ...., `$9' are replaced by any value resulting
-+from the
-+.Ar inpattern
-+template.
-+The sequence `$0' is replace by the original filename.
-+Additionally, the sequence
-+.Ql Op Ar seq1 , Ar seq2
-+is replaced by
-+.Op Ar seq1
-+if
-+.Ar seq1
-+is not a null string; otherwise it is replaced by
-+.Ar seq2 .
-+For example, the command
-+.Pp
-+.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
-+nmap $1.$2.$3 [$1,$2].[$2,file]
-+.Ed
-+.Pp
-+would yield
-+the output filename "myfile.data" for input filenames "myfile.data" and
-+"myfile.data.old", "myfile.file" for the input filename "myfile", and
-+"myfile.myfile" for the input filename ".myfile".
-+Spaces may be included in
-+.Ar outpattern  ,
-+as in the example: `nmap $1 sed "s/  *$//" > $1' .
-+Use the `\e' character to prevent special treatment
-+of the `$','[','[', and `,' characters.
-+.It Ic ntrans Op Ar inchars Op Ar outchars
-+Set or unset the filename character translation mechanism.
-+If no arguments are specified, the filename character
-+translation mechanism is unset.
-+If arguments are specified, characters in
-+remote filenames are translated during
-+.Ic mput
-+commands and
-+.Ic put
-+commands issued without a specified remote target filename.
-+If arguments are specified, characters in
-+local filenames are translated during
-+.Ic mget
-+commands and
-+.Ic get
-+commands issued without a specified local target filename.
-+This command is useful when connecting to a
-+.No non\- Ns Ux
-+remote computer
-+with different file naming conventions or practices.
-+Characters in a filename matching a character in
-+.Ar inchars
-+are replaced with the corresponding character in
-+.Ar outchars  .
-+If the character's position in
-+.Ar inchars
-+is longer than the length of
-+.Ar outchars  ,
-+the character is deleted from the file name.
-+.It Ic open Ar host Op Ar port
-+Establish a connection to the specified
-+.Ar host
-+.Tn FTP
-+server.
-+An optional port number may be supplied,
-+in which case,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will attempt to contact an
-+.Tn FTP
-+server at that port.
-+If the
-+.Ic auto-login
-+option is on (default),
-+.Nm ftp
-+will also attempt to automatically log the user in to
-+the
-+.Tn FTP
-+server (see below).
-+.It Ic passive
-+Toggle passive mode.  If passive mode is turned on
-+(default is off), the ftp client will
-+send a
-+.Dv PASV
-+command for all data connections instead of the usual
-+.Dv PORT
-+command.  The
-+.Dv PASV
-+command requests that the remote server open a port for the data connection
-+and return the address of that port.  The remote server listens on that
-+port and the client connects to it.  When using the more traditional
-+.Dv PORT
-+command, the client listens on a port and sends that address to the remote
-+server, who connects back to it.  Passive mode is useful when using
-+.Nm ftp
-+through a gateway router or host that controls the directionality of
-+traffic.
-+(Note that though ftp servers are required to support the
-+.Dv PASV
-+command by RFC 1123, some do not.)
-+.It Ic prompt
-+Toggle interactive prompting.
-+Interactive prompting
-+occurs during multiple file transfers to allow the
-+user to selectively retrieve or store files.
-+If prompting is turned off (default is on), any
-+.Ic mget
-+or
-+.Ic mput
-+will transfer all files, and any
-+.Ic mdelete
-+will delete all files.
-+.It Ic proxy Ar ftp-command
-+Execute an ftp command on a secondary control connection.
-+This command allows simultaneous connection to two remote ftp
-+servers for transferring files between the two servers.
-+The first
-+.Ic proxy
-+command should be an
-+.Ic open  ,
-+to establish the secondary control connection.
-+Enter the command "proxy ?" to see other ftp commands executable on the
-+secondary connection.
-+The following commands behave differently when prefaced by
-+.Ic proxy  :
-+.Ic open
-+will not define new macros during the auto-login process,
-+.Ic close
-+will not erase existing macro definitions,
-+.Ic get
-+and
-+.Ic mget
-+transfer files from the host on the primary control connection
-+to the host on the secondary control connection, and
-+.Ic put  ,
-+.Ic mput ,
-+and
-+.Ic append
-+transfer files from the host on the secondary control connection
-+to the host on the primary control connection.
-+Third party file transfers depend upon support of the ftp protocol
-+.Dv PASV
-+command by the server on the secondary control connection.
-+.It Ic put Ar local-file Op Ar remote-file
-+Store a local file on the remote machine.
-+If
-+.Ar remote-file
-+is left unspecified, the local file name is used
-+after processing according to any
-+.Ic ntrans
-+or
-+.Ic nmap
-+settings
-+in naming the remote file.
-+File transfer uses the
-+current settings for
-+.Ic type  ,
-+.Ic format ,
-+.Ic mode  ,
-+and
-+.Ic structure  .
-+.It Ic pwd
-+Print the name of the current working directory on the remote
-+machine.
-+.It Ic quit
-+A synonym for
-+.Ic bye  .
-+.It Ic quote Ar arg1 arg2 ...
-+The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the remote
-+.Tn FTP
-+server.
-+.It Ic recv Ar remote-file Op Ar local-file
-+A synonym for get.
-+.It Ic reget Ar remote-file Op Ar local-file
-+Reget acts like get, except that if
-+.Ar local-file
-+exists and is
-+smaller than
-+.Ar remote-file  ,
-+.Ar local-file
-+is presumed to be
-+a partially transferred copy of
-+.Ar remote-file
-+and the transfer
-+is continued from the apparent point of failure.
-+This command
-+is useful when transferring very large files over networks that
-+are prone to dropping connections.
-+.It Ic remotehelp Op Ar command-name
-+Request help from the remote
-+.Tn FTP
-+server.
-+If a
-+.Ar command-name
-+is specified it is supplied to the server as well.
-+.It Ic remotestatus Op Ar file-name
-+With no arguments, show status of remote machine.
-+If
-+.Ar file-name
-+is specified, show status of
-+.Ar file-name
-+on remote machine.
-+.It Xo
-+.Ic rename
-+.Op Ar from
-+.Op Ar to
-+.Xc
-+Rename the file
-+.Ar from
-+on the remote machine, to the file
-+.Ar to  .
-+.It Ic reset
-+Clear reply queue.
-+This command re-synchronizes command/reply sequencing with the remote
-+ftp server.
-+Resynchronization may be necessary following a violation of the ftp protocol
-+by the remote server.
-+.It Ic restart Ar marker
-+Restart the immediately following
-+.Ic get
-+or
-+.Ic put
-+at the
-+indicated
-+.Ar marker  .
-+On
-+.Ux
-+systems, marker is usually a byte
-+offset into the file.
-+.It Ic rmdir Ar directory-name
-+Delete a directory on the remote machine.
-+.It Ic runique
-+Toggle storing of files on the local system with unique filenames.
-+If a file already exists with a name equal to the target
-+local filename for a
-+.Ic get
-+or
-+.Ic mget
-+command, a ".1" is appended to the name.
-+If the resulting name matches another existing file,
-+a ".2" is appended to the original name.
-+If this process continues up to ".99", an error
-+message is printed, and the transfer does not take place.
-+The generated unique filename will be reported.
-+Note that
-+.Ic runique
-+will not affect local files generated from a shell command
-+(see below).
-+The default value is off.
-+.It Ic send Ar local-file Op Ar remote-file
-+A synonym for put.
-+.It Ic sendport
-+Toggle the use of
-+.Dv PORT
-+commands.
-+By default,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will attempt to use a
-+.Dv PORT
-+command when establishing
-+a connection for each data transfer.
-+The use of
-+.Dv PORT
-+commands can prevent delays
-+when performing multiple file transfers.
-+If the
-+.Dv PORT
-+command fails,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will use the default data port.
-+When the use of
-+.Dv PORT
-+commands is disabled, no attempt will be made to use
-+.Dv PORT
-+commands for each data transfer.
-+This is useful
-+for certain
-+.Tn FTP
-+implementations which do ignore
-+.Dv PORT
-+commands but, incorrectly, indicate they've been accepted.
-+.It Ic site Ar arg1 arg2 ...
-+The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the remote
-+.Tn FTP
-+server as a
-+.Dv SITE
-+command.
-+.It Ic size Ar file-name
-+Return size of
-+.Ar file-name
-+on remote machine.
-+.It Ic status
-+Show the current status of
-+.Nm ftp  .
-+.It Ic struct Op Ar struct-name
-+Set the file transfer
-+.Ar structure
-+to
-+.Ar struct-name .
-+By default \*(Lqstream\*(Rq structure is used.
-+.It Ic sunique
-+Toggle storing of files on remote machine under unique file names.
-+Remote ftp server must support ftp protocol
-+.Dv STOU
-+command for
-+successful completion.
-+The remote server will report unique name.
-+Default value is off.
-+.It Ic system
-+Show the type of operating system running on the remote machine.
-+.It Ic tenex
-+Set the file transfer type to that needed to
-+talk to
-+.Tn TENEX
-+machines.
-+.It Ic trace
-+Toggle packet tracing.
-+.It Ic type Op Ar type-name
-+Set the file transfer
-+.Ic type
-+to
-+.Ar type-name  .
-+If no type is specified, the current type
-+is printed.
-+The default type is network
-+.Tn ASCII .
-+.It Ic umask Op Ar newmask
-+Set the default umask on the remote server to
-+.Ar newmask  .
-+If
-+.Ar newmask
-+is omitted, the current umask is printed.
-+.It Xo
-+.Ic user Ar user-name
-+.Op Ar password
-+.Op Ar account
-+.Xc
-+Identify yourself to the remote
-+.Tn FTP
-+server.
-+If the
-+.Ar password
-+is not specified and the server requires it,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will prompt the user for it (after disabling local echo).
-+If an
-+.Ar account
-+field is not specified, and the
-+.Tn FTP
-+server
-+requires it, the user will be prompted for it.
-+If an
-+.Ar account
-+field is specified, an account command will
-+be relayed to the remote server after the login sequence
-+is completed if the remote server did not require it
-+for logging in.
-+Unless
-+.Nm ftp
-+is invoked with \*(Lqauto-login\*(Rq disabled, this
-+process is done automatically on initial connection to
-+the
-+.Tn FTP
-+server.
-+.It Ic verbose
-+Toggle verbose mode.
-+In verbose mode, all responses from
-+the
-+.Tn FTP
-+server are displayed to the user.
-+In addition,
-+if verbose is on, when a file transfer completes, statistics
-+regarding the efficiency of the transfer are reported.
-+By default,
-+verbose is on.
-+.It Ic ? Op Ar command
-+A synonym for help.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+Command arguments which have embedded spaces may be quoted with
-+quote `"' marks.
-+.Sh ABORTING A FILE TRANSFER
-+To abort a file transfer, use the terminal interrupt key
-+(usually Ctrl-C).
-+Sending transfers will be immediately halted.
-+Receiving transfers will be halted by sending a ftp protocol
-+.Dv ABOR
-+command to the remote server, and discarding any further data received.
-+The speed at which this is accomplished depends upon the remote
-+server's support for
-+.Dv ABOR
-+processing.
-+If the remote server does not support the
-+.Dv ABOR
-+command, an
-+.Ql ftp>
-+prompt will not appear until the remote server has completed
-+sending the requested file.
-+.Pp
-+The terminal interrupt key sequence will be ignored when
-+.Nm ftp
-+has completed any local processing and is awaiting a reply
-+from the remote server.
-+A long delay in this mode may result from the ABOR processing described
-+above, or from unexpected behavior by the remote server, including
-+violations of the ftp protocol.
-+If the delay results from unexpected remote server behavior, the local
-+.Nm ftp
-+program must be killed by hand.
-+.Sh FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS
-+Files specified as arguments to
-+.Nm ftp
-+commands are processed according to the following rules.
-+.Bl -enum
-+.It
-+If the file name
-+.Sq Fl
-+is specified, the
-+.Ar stdin
-+(for reading) or
-+.Ar stdout
-+(for writing) is used.
-+.It
-+If the first character of the file name is
-+.Sq \&| ,
-+the
-+remainder of the argument is interpreted as a shell command.
-+.Nm Ftp
-+then forks a shell, using
-+.Xr popen 3
-+with the argument supplied, and reads (writes) from the stdout
-+(stdin).
-+If the shell command includes spaces, the argument
-+must be quoted; e.g.
-+\*(Lq" ls -lt"\*(Rq.
-+A particularly
-+useful example of this mechanism is: \*(Lqdir more\*(Rq.
-+.It
-+Failing the above checks, if ``globbing'' is enabled,
-+local file names are expanded
-+according to the rules used in the
-+.Xr csh  1  ;
-+c.f. the
-+.Ic glob
-+command.
-+If the
-+.Nm ftp
-+command expects a single local file (.e.g.
-+.Ic put  ) ,
-+only the first filename generated by the "globbing" operation is used.
-+.It
-+For
-+.Ic mget
-+commands and
-+.Ic get
-+commands with unspecified local file names, the local filename is
-+the remote filename, which may be altered by a
-+.Ic case  ,
-+.Ic ntrans ,
-+or
-+.Ic nmap
-+setting.
-+The resulting filename may then be altered if
-+.Ic runique
-+is on.
-+.It
-+For
-+.Ic mput
-+commands and
-+.Ic put
-+commands with unspecified remote file names, the remote filename is
-+the local filename, which may be altered by a
-+.Ic ntrans
-+or
-+.Ic nmap
-+setting.
-+The resulting filename may then be altered by the remote server if
-+.Ic sunique
-+is on.
-+.El
-+.Sh FILE TRANSFER PARAMETERS
-+The FTP specification specifies many parameters which may
-+affect a file transfer.
-+The
-+.Ic type
-+may be one of \*(Lqascii\*(Rq, \*(Lqimage\*(Rq (binary),
-+\*(Lqebcdic\*(Rq, and \*(Lqlocal byte size\*(Rq (for
-+.Tn PDP Ns -10's
-+and
-+.Tn PDP Ns -20's
-+mostly).
-+.Nm Ftp
-+supports the ascii and image types of file transfer,
-+plus local byte size 8 for
-+.Ic tenex
-+mode transfers.
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Ftp
-+supports only the default values for the remaining
-+file transfer parameters:
-+.Ic mode  ,
-+.Ic form ,
-+and
-+.Ic struct  .
-+.Sh THE .netrc FILE
-+The
-+.Pa .netrc
-+file contains login and initialization information
-+used by the auto-login process.
-+It resides in the user's home directory.
-+The following tokens are recognized; they may be separated by spaces,
-+tabs, or new-lines:
-+.Bl -tag -width password
-+.It Ic machine Ar name
-+Identify a remote machine
-+.Ar name .
-+The auto-login process searches the
-+.Pa .netrc
-+file for a
-+.Ic machine
-+token that matches the remote machine specified on the
-+.Nm ftp
-+command line or as an
-+.Ic open
-+command argument.
-+Once a match is made, the subsequent
-+.Pa .netrc
-+tokens are processed,
-+stopping when the end of file is reached or another
-+.Ic machine
-+or a
-+.Ic default
-+token is encountered.
-+.It Ic default
-+This is the same as
-+.Ic machine
-+.Ar name
-+except that
-+.Ic default
-+matches any name.
-+There can be only one
-+.Ic default
-+token, and it must be after all
-+.Ic machine
-+tokens.
-+This is normally used as:
-+.Pp
-+.Dl default login anonymous password user@site
-+.Pp
-+thereby giving the user
-+.Ar automatic
-+anonymous ftp login to
-+machines not specified in
-+.Pa .netrc .
-+This can be overridden
-+by using the
-+.Fl n
-+flag to disable auto-login.
-+.It Ic login Ar name
-+Identify a user on the remote machine.
-+If this token is present, the auto-login process will initiate
-+a login using the specified
-+.Ar name .
-+.It Ic password Ar string
-+Supply a password.
-+If this token is present, the auto-login process will supply the
-+specified string if the remote server requires a password as part
-+of the login process.
-+Note that if this token is present in the
-+.Pa .netrc
-+file for any user other
-+than
-+.Ar anonymous  ,
-+.Nm ftp
-+will abort the auto-login process if the
-+.Pa .netrc
-+is readable by
-+anyone besides the user.
-+.It Ic account Ar string
-+Supply an additional account password.
-+If this token is present, the auto-login process will supply the
-+specified string if the remote server requires an additional
-+account password, or the auto-login process will initiate an
-+.Dv ACCT
-+command if it does not.
-+.It Ic macdef Ar name
-+Define a macro.
-+This token functions like the
-+.Nm ftp
-+.Ic macdef
-+command functions.
-+A macro is defined with the specified name; its contents begin with the
-+next
-+.Pa .netrc
-+line and continue until a null line (consecutive new-line
-+characters) is encountered.
-+If a macro named
-+.Ic init
-+is defined, it is automatically executed as the last step in the
-+auto-login process.
-+.El
-+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-+.Nm Ftp
-+utilizes the following environment variables.
-+.Bl -tag -width Fl
-+.It Ev HOME
-+For default location of a
-+.Pa .netrc
-+file, if one exists.
-+.It Ev SHELL
-+For default shell.
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr ftpd 8
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm ftp
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-+.Sh BUGS
-+Correct execution of many commands depends upon proper behavior
-+by the remote server.
-+.Pp
-+An error in the treatment of carriage returns
-+in the
-+.Bx 4.2
-+ascii-mode transfer code
-+has been corrected.
-+This correction may result in incorrect transfers of binary files
-+to and from
-+.Bx 4.2
-+servers using the ascii type.
-+Avoid this problem by using the binary image type.
-diff --git a/ftpd/Makefile.am b/ftpd/Makefile.am
-index 861fe61..7096935 100644
---- a/ftpd/Makefile.am
-+++ b/ftpd/Makefile.am
-@@ -28,6 +28,12 @@ ftpd_SOURCES = ftpcmd.y ftpd.c logwtmp.c popen.c pam.c auth.c \
- 
- noinst_HEADERS = extern.h
- 
-+if ENABLE_ftpd
-+man_MANS = ftpd.8
-+endif
-+
-+EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS) ftpcmd.c
-+
- @PATHDEFS_MAKE@
- 
- INCLUDES = -I$(top_srcdir)/lib -I../lib -I$(top_srcdir)/libinetutils 
-@@ -37,5 +43,3 @@ AM_CPPFLAGS = $(PATHDEF_FTPWELCOME) $(PATHDEF_FTPUSERS) \
- 
- LDADD = -L../libinetutils -linetutils $(LIBLS) ../lib/libgnu.a \
-           $(LIBCRYPT) $(LIBWRAP) $(LIBPAM)
--
--EXTRA_DIST = ftpcmd.c
-diff --git a/ftpd/ftpd.8 b/ftpd/ftpd.8
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..e842141
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/ftpd/ftpd.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,300 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1988, 1991, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)ftpd.8	8.3 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 1, 1994
-+.Dt FTPD 8
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm ftpd
-+.Nd
-+Internet File Transfer Protocol server 
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm ftpd
-+.Op Fl dlADq
-+.Op Fl T Ar maxtimeout
-+.Op Fl t Ar timeout
-+.Op Fl a Ar login-name
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Ftpd
-+is the
-+Internet File Transfer Protocol
-+server process.  The server uses the
-+.Tn TCP
-+protocol
-+and listens at the port specified in the
-+.Dq ftp
-+service specification; see
-+.Xr services 5 .
-+.Pp
-+Available options:
-+.Bl -tag -width Ds
-+.It Fl d
-+Debugging information is written to the syslog 
-+using LOG_FTP.
-+.It Fl l
-+Each successful and failed
-+.Xr ftp 1
-+session is logged using syslog with a facility of LOG_FTP.
-+If this option is specified twice, the retrieve (get), store (put), append,
-+delete, make directory, remove directory and rename operations and
-+their filename arguments are also logged.
-+.It Fl A 
-+Only anonymous login is allowed.
-+.It Fl D
-+ftpd enters daemon-mode. That allows ftpd to be run without inetd.
-+.It Fl q
-+Quiet mode. No information about the version of the ftpd is given to the 
-+client.
-+.It Fl T
-+A client may also request a different timeout period;
-+the maximum period allowed may be set to
-+.Ar timeout
-+seconds with the
-+.Fl T
-+option.
-+The default limit is 2 hours.
-+.It Fl t
-+The inactivity timeout period is set to
-+.Ar timeout
-+seconds (the default is 15 minutes).
-+.It Fl a
-+Give anonymous an other 
-+.Ar login-name 
-+(anonymous and ftpd will still work).
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+The file
-+.Pa /etc/nologin
-+can be used to disable ftp access.
-+If the file exists,
-+.Nm
-+displays it and exits.
-+If the file
-+.Pa /etc/ftpwelcome
-+exists,
-+.Nm
-+prints it before issuing the
-+.Dq ready
-+message.
-+If the file
-+.Pa /etc/motd
-+exists,
-+.Nm
-+prints it after a successful login.
-+.Pp
-+The ftp server currently supports the following ftp requests.
-+The case of the requests is ignored.
-+.Bl -column "Request" -offset indent
-+.It Request Ta "Description"
-+.It ABOR Ta "abort previous command"
-+.It ACCT Ta "specify account (ignored)"
-+.It ALLO Ta "allocate storage (vacuously)"
-+.It APPE Ta "append to a file"
-+.It CDUP Ta "change to parent of current working directory"
-+.It CWD Ta "change working directory"
-+.It DELE Ta "delete a file"
-+.It HELP Ta "give help information"
-+.It LIST Ta "give list files in a directory" Pq Dq Li "ls -lgA"
-+.It MKD Ta "make a directory"
-+.It MDTM Ta "show last modification time of file"
-+.It MODE Ta "specify data transfer" Em mode
-+.It NLST Ta "give name list of files in directory"
-+.It NOOP Ta "do nothing"
-+.It PASS Ta "specify password"
-+.It PASV Ta "prepare for server-to-server transfer"
-+.It PORT Ta "specify data connection port"
-+.It PWD Ta "print the current working directory"
-+.It QUIT Ta "terminate session"
-+.It REST Ta "restart incomplete transfer"
-+.It RETR Ta "retrieve a file"
-+.It RMD Ta "remove a directory"
-+.It RNFR Ta "specify rename-from file name"
-+.It RNTO Ta "specify rename-to file name"
-+.It SITE Ta "non-standard commands (see next section)"
-+.It SIZE Ta "return size of file"
-+.It STAT Ta "return status of server"
-+.It STOR Ta "store a file"
-+.It STOU Ta "store a file with a unique name"
-+.It STRU Ta "specify data transfer" Em structure
-+.It SYST Ta "show operating system type of server system"
-+.It TYPE Ta "specify data transfer" Em type
-+.It USER Ta "specify user name"
-+.It XCUP Ta "change to parent of current working directory (deprecated)"
-+.It XCWD Ta "change working directory (deprecated)"
-+.It XMKD Ta "make a directory (deprecated)"
-+.It XPWD Ta "print the current working directory (deprecated)"
-+.It XRMD Ta "remove a directory (deprecated)"
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+The following non-standard or
-+.Tn UNIX
-+specific commands are supported
-+by the
-+SITE request.
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -column Request -offset indent
-+.It Sy Request Ta Sy Description
-+.It UMASK Ta change umask, e.g. ``SITE UMASK 002''
-+.It IDLE Ta set idle-timer, e.g. ``SITE IDLE 60''
-+.It CHMOD Ta change mode of a file, e.g. ``SITE CHMOD 755 filename''
-+.It HELP Ta give help information.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+The remaining ftp requests specified in Internet RFC 959
-+are
-+recognized, but not implemented.
-+MDTM and SIZE are not specified in RFC 959, but will appear in the
-+next updated FTP RFC.
-+.Pp
-+The ftp server will abort an active file transfer only when the
-+ABOR
-+command is preceded by a Telnet "Interrupt Process" (IP)
-+signal and a Telnet "Synch" signal in the command Telnet stream,
-+as described in Internet RFC 959.
-+If a
-+STAT
-+command is received during a data transfer, preceded by a Telnet IP
-+and Synch, transfer status will be returned.
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Ftpd
-+interprets file names according to the
-+.Dq globbing
-+conventions used by
-+.Xr csh 1 .
-+This allows users to utilize the metacharacters
-+.Dq Li \&*?[]{}~ .
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Ftpd
-+authenticates users according to three rules.
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -enum -offset indent
-+.It
-+The login name must be in the password data base,
-+.Pa /etc/passwd ,
-+and not have a null password.
-+In this case a password must be provided by the client before any
-+file operations may be performed.
-+.It
-+The login name must not appear in the file
-+.Pa /etc/ftpusers .
-+.It
-+The user must have a standard shell returned by
-+.Xr getusershell 3 .
-+.It
-+If the user name is
-+.Dq anonymous
-+or
-+.Dq ftp ,
-+an
-+anonymous ftp account must be present in the password
-+file (user
-+.Dq ftp ) .
-+In this case the user is allowed
-+to log in by specifying any password (by convention an email address for
-+the user should be used as the password).
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+In the last case,
-+.Nm ftpd
-+takes special measures to restrict the client's access privileges.
-+The server performs a
-+.Xr chroot 2
-+to the home directory of the
-+.Dq ftp
-+user.
-+In order that system security is not breached, it is recommended
-+that the
-+.Dq ftp
-+subtree be constructed with care, following these rules:
-+.Bl -tag -width "~ftp/pub" -offset indent
-+.It Pa ~ftp
-+Make the home directory owned by
-+.Dq root
-+and unwritable by anyone.
-+.ne 1i
-+.It Pa ~ftp/bin
-+Make this directory owned by
-+.Dq root
-+and unwritable by anyone (mode 555).
-+The program
-+.Xr ls 1
-+must be present to support the list command.
-+This program should be mode 111.
-+.It Pa ~ftp/etc
-+Make this directory owned by
-+.Dq root
-+and unwritable by anyone (mode 555).
-+The files
-+.Xr passwd 5
-+and
-+.Xr group 5
-+must be present for the
-+.Xr ls
-+command to be able to produce owner names rather than numbers.
-+The password field in
-+.Xr passwd
-+is not used, and should not contain real passwords.
-+The file
-+.Pa motd ,
-+if present, will be printed after a successful login.
-+These files should be mode 444.
-+.It Pa ~ftp/pub
-+Make this directory mode 777 and owned by
-+.Dq ftp .
-+Guests
-+can then place files which are to be accessible via the anonymous
-+account in this directory.
-+.El
-+.Sh FILES
-+.Bl -tag -width /etc/ftpwelcome -compact
-+.It Pa /etc/ftpusers
-+List of unwelcome/restricted users.
-+.It Pa /etc/ftpwelcome
-+Welcome notice.
-+.It Pa /etc/motd
-+Welcome notice after login.
-+.It Pa /etc/nologin
-+Displayed and access refused.
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr ftp 1 ,
-+.Xr getusershell 3 ,
-+.Xr syslogd 8
-+.Sh BUGS
-+The server must run as the super-user
-+to create sockets with privileged port numbers.  It maintains
-+an effective user id of the logged in user, reverting to
-+the super-user only when binding addresses to sockets.  The
-+possible security holes have been extensively
-+scrutinized, but are possibly incomplete.
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-diff --git a/whois/whois.1 b/whois/whois.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..7424da8
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/whois/whois.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
-+.TH WHOIS 1 "3 December 1999" "Marco d'Itri" "Debian GNU/Linux"
-+.SH NAME
-+whois \- client for the whois directory service
-+.SH SYNOPSIS
-+.B whois
-+[\~\fB-h\fP\~\fIHOST\fP\~]
-+[\~\fB-p\fP\~ \fIPORT\fP\~]
-+[\~\fB-aCFHlLMmrRSVx\fP\~]
-+[\~\fB-g\fP\~\fISOURCE:FIRST-LAST\fP\~]
-+[\~\fB-i\fP\~\fIATTR\fP\~]
-+[\~\fB-S\fP\~\fISOURCE\fP\~]
-+[\~\fB-T\fP\~\fITYPE\fP\~]
-+.I object
-+
-+.B whois
-+[\~\fI-t\fP\~]
-+[\~\fI-v\fP\~]
-+.I template
-+.B whois
-+[\~\fI-q\fP\~]
-+.I keyword
-+.PP
-+.SH DESCRIPTION
-+\fBwhois\fP searches for an object in a \fIRFC-812\fP database.
-+
-+This version of the whois client tries to guess the right server to
-+ask for the specified object. If no guess can be made it will connect
-+to whois.internic.net for domains,
-+.\" whois.networksolutions.com for nic handles,
-+whois.arin.net for IPv4 addresses and whois.6bone.net for
-+IPv6 addresses.
-+.PP
-+.SH OPTIONS
-+.TP 8
-+.B \-h HOST
-+Connect to HOST.
-+.TP 8
-+.B \-H
-+Do not display the legal disclaimers some registries like to show you.
-+.TP 8
-+.B \-p PORT
-+Connect to PORT.
-+.TP 8
-+.B \-V
-+Be verbose.
-+.TP 8
-+Other options are flags understood by RIPE-like servers.
-+.SH NOTES
-+Please remember that \fIwhois.networksolutions.com\fP by default will
-+only search in the domains database. If you want to search for hostnames,
-+NIC handles or people names you have to prepend the appropriate keyword
-+(\fIHO\fPst, \fIHA\fPndle or \fINA\fPme).
-+.P
-+If the \fI!\fP character is prepended to a NIC handle, the default
-+server becomes \fIwhois.networksolutions.com\fP.
-+.P
-+When querying \fIwhois.arin.net\fP for AS numbers, the program will
-+automatically convert the request in the appropriate format, inserting
-+a space after the string "AS".
-+.P
-+When querying \fIwhois.ncst.ernet.in\fP for a string without spaces, the
-+\fIdomain\fP keyword is prepended.
-+.P
-+When querying \fIwhois.corenic.net\fP, machine readable output is requested.
-+.P
-+RIPE-specific options are ignored when querying non-RIPE servers.
-+.SH ENVIRONMENT
-+.IP LANG
-+When querying \fIwhois.nic.ad.jp\fP english text is requested unless the
-+\fILANG\fP environment variable specifies a Japanese locale.
-+.IP "WHOIS_SERVER"
-+This server will be queried if the program cannot guess where the object
-+is located. If the variable does not exist then
-+\fIwhois.internic.net\fP will be queried.
-+.IP "WHOIS_HIDE"
-+If this variable is defined, legal disclaimers will be hidden even if
-+the \fI-H\fP flag is not used.
-+.SH "SEE ALSO"
-+\fIRFC 812\fP: NICNAME/WHOIS
-+.PP
-+\fIRIPE-157\fP, \fIRIPE-189\fP: RIPE NCC Database Documentation
-+.PP
-+Detailed help on available flags can be found in \fIRIPE-157\fP or in
-+the help file which can be obtained with the command:
-+.IP
-+.B whois -h whois.ripe.net HELP
-+.SH HISTORY
-+This program closely tracks the user interface of the whois client
-+developed at RIPE by Ambrose Magee and others on the base of the
-+original BSD client.
-+I also added support for the protocol extensions developed by David
-+Kessens of QWest for the 6bone server.
-+.SH AUTHOR
-+.B Whois
-+and this man page were written by Marco d'Itri <\fImd@linux.it\fP>
-+and are licensed under the GPL.
-diff --git a/libls/Makefile.am b/libls/Makefile.am
-index b5fe1f5..e8be015 100644
---- a/libls/Makefile.am
-+++ b/libls/Makefile.am
-@@ -26,3 +26,5 @@ libls_a_SOURCES = cmp.c stat_flags.c ls.c print.c util.c fts.c
- noinst_HEADERS = extern.h ls.h fts.h
- 
- INCLUDES=-I$(top_srcdir)/lib -I../lib
-+
-+EXTRA_DIST = ls.1
-diff --git a/libls/ls.1 b/libls/ls.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..04231ea
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/libls/ls.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,446 @@
-+.\"	$OpenBSD: ls.1,v 1.23 2000/03/24 21:41:08 aaron Exp $
-+.\"	$NetBSD: ls.1,v 1.14 1995/12/05 02:44:01 jtc Exp $
-+.\"
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1994
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-+.\" the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)ls.1	8.7 (Berkeley) 7/29/94
-+.\"
-+.Dd July 29, 1994
-+.Dt LS 1
-+.Os
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm ls
-+.Nd list directory contents
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm ls
-+.Op Fl 1ACFLRSTWacdfgiklmnopqrstux
-+.Op Ar file ...
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+For each operand that names a
-+.Ar file
-+of a type other than
-+directory,
-+.Nm
-+displays its name as well as any requested,
-+associated information.
-+For each operand that names a
-+.Ar file
-+of type directory,
-+.Nm
-+displays the names of files contained
-+within that directory, as well as any requested, associated
-+information.
-+.Pp
-+If no operands are given, the contents of the current
-+directory are displayed.
-+If more than one operand is given,
-+non-directory operands are displayed first; directory
-+and non-directory operands are sorted separately and in
-+lexicographical order.
-+.Pp
-+The options are as follows:
-+.Bl -tag -width indent
-+.It Fl A
-+List all entries except for
-+.Dq \&.
-+and
-+.Dq \&.. .
-+Always set for the super-user.
-+.It Fl C
-+Force multi-column output; this is the default when output is to a terminal.
-+.It Fl F
-+Display a slash
-+.Pq Sq /
-+immediately after each pathname that is a directory,
-+an asterisk
-+.Pq Sq \&*
-+after each that is executable,
-+an at sign
-+.Pq Sq @
-+after each symbolic link,
-+a percent sign
-+.Pq Sq %
-+after each whiteout,
-+an equal sign
-+.Pq Sq =
-+after each socket,
-+and a vertical bar
-+.Pq Sq \&|
-+after each that is a FIFO.
-+.It Fl L
-+If argument is a symbolic link, list the file or directory the link references
-+rather than the link itself.
-+.It Fl R
-+Recursively list subdirectories encountered.
-+.It Fl S
-+Sort by size, largest file first.
-+.It Fl T
-+Display complete time information for the file, including
-+month, day, hour, minute, second, and year.
-+This option has no effect unless one of the long format
-+.Pq Fl l , Fl n
-+options is also specified.
-+.It Fl W
-+Display whiteouts when scanning directories.
-+.It Fl a
-+Include directory entries whose names begin with a
-+dot
-+.Pq Sq \&. .
-+.It Fl c
-+Use time file's status was last changed instead of last modification
-+time for sorting
-+.Pq Fl t
-+or printing
-+.Pq Fl l , Fl n .
-+.It Fl d
-+Directories are listed as plain files (not searched recursively) and
-+symbolic links in the argument list are not indirected through.
-+.It Fl f
-+Output is not sorted.
-+.It Fl g
-+Does nothing; kept for compatibility with older versions of
-+.Xr ls 1 .
-+.It Fl i
-+For each file, print its inode number.
-+.It Fl k
-+Modifies the
-+.Fl s
-+option, causing the sizes to be reported in kilobytes.
-+Overrides any value specified by the
-+.Ev BLOCKSIZE
-+environment variable.
-+.It Fl l
-+(The lowercase letter
-+.Dq ell. Ns )
-+List in long format (see below).
-+If the output is to a terminal, a total sum of all file
-+sizes is output on a line before the long listing.
-+.It Fl m
-+Stream output format; list files across the page, separated by commas.
-+.It Fl n
-+List in long format as in
-+.Fl l ,
-+but retain user and group IDs in a numeric format.
-+.It Fl o
-+Include the file flags in a long format
-+.Pq Fl l , Fl n
-+output.
-+.It Fl p
-+Display a slash
-+.Pq Sq \&/
-+immediately after each pathname that is a directory.
-+.It Fl q
-+Force printing of non-graphic characters in file names as
-+the character
-+.Dq ? ;
-+this is the default when output is to a terminal.
-+.It Fl r
-+Reverse the order of the sort to get reverse
-+lexicographical order or the smallest or oldest entries first.
-+.It Fl s
-+Display the number of file system blocks actually used by each file,
-+where partial units are rounded up to the next integer value.
-+Blocks are 512 bytes unless overridden by the
-+.Fl k
-+flag or
-+.Ev BLOCKSIZE
-+environment variable.
-+.It Fl t
-+Sort by time modified (most recently modified
-+first) before sorting the operands in lexicographical
-+order.
-+.It Fl u
-+Use file's last access time
-+instead of last modification time
-+for sorting
-+.Pq Fl t
-+or printing
-+.Pq Fl l , Fl n .
-+.It Fl x
-+Multi-column output sorted across the page rather than down the page.
-+.It Fl \&1
-+(The numeric digit
-+.Dq one. Ns )
-+Force output to be one entry per line.
-+This is the default when
-+output is not to a terminal.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Fl 1 ,
-+.Fl C ,
-+.Fl l ,
-+and
-+.Fl n
-+options all override each other; the last one specified determines
-+the format used.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Fl c
-+and
-+.Fl u
-+options override each other; the last one specified determines
-+the file time used.
-+The
-+.Fl f
-+option overrides any occurrence of either.
-+.Pp
-+By default,
-+.Nm
-+lists one entry per line to standard
-+output; the exceptions are to terminals or when the
-+.Fl C
-+or
-+.Fl m
-+options are specified.
-+.Pp
-+File information is displayed with one or more
-+<blank>s separating the information associated with the
-+.Fl i ,
-+.Fl s ,
-+.Fl l ,
-+and
-+.Fl n
-+options.
-+.Ss The Long Format
-+If the
-+.Fl l
-+or
-+.Fl n
-+options are given, the following information
-+is displayed for each file:
-+mode,
-+number of links,
-+owner,
-+group,
-+size in bytes,
-+time of last modification
-+.Pq Dq mmm dd HH:MM ,
-+and the pathname.
-+In addition, for each directory whose contents are displayed, the first
-+line displayed is the total number of blocks used by the files in the
-+directory.
-+Blocks are 512 bytes unless overridden by the
-+.Fl k
-+option or
-+.Ev BLOCKSIZE
-+environment variable.
-+.Pp
-+If the owner or group name is not a known user or group name, respectively,
-+or the
-+.Fl n
-+option is given, the numeric ID is displayed.
-+.Pp
-+If the file is a character special or block special file,
-+the major and minor device numbers for the file are displayed
-+in the size field.
-+.Pp
-+If the
-+.Fl T
-+option is given, the time of last modification is displayed using the
-+format
-+.Dq mmm dd HH:MM:SS CCYY .
-+.Pp
-+If the file is a symbolic link, the pathname of the
-+linked-to file is preceded by
-+.Dq \-> .
-+.Pp
-+The file mode printed under the
-+.Fl l
-+or
-+.Fl n
-+options consists of the entry type, owner permissions, and group
-+permissions.
-+The entry type character describes the type of file, as follows:
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -tag -width 4n -offset indent -compact
-+.It Sy b
-+block special file
-+.It Sy c
-+character special file
-+.It Sy d
-+directory
-+.It Sy l
-+symbolic link
-+.It Sy s
-+socket link
-+.It Sy p
-+.Tn FIFO
-+.It Sy w
-+whiteout
-+.It Sy \-
-+regular file
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+The next three fields
-+are three characters each:
-+owner permissions,
-+group permissions, and
-+other permissions.
-+Each field has three character positions:
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -enum -offset indent -compact
-+.It
-+If
-+.Sy r ,
-+the file is readable; if
-+.Sy \- ,
-+it is not readable.
-+.It
-+If
-+.Sy w ,
-+the file is writable; if
-+.Sy \- ,
-+it is not writable.
-+.It
-+The first of the following that applies:
-+.Bl -tag -width 4n -offset indent
-+.It Sy S
-+If in the owner permissions, the file is not executable and
-+set-user-ID mode is set.
-+If in the group permissions, the file is not executable
-+and set-group-ID mode is set.
-+.It Sy s
-+If in the owner permissions, the file is executable
-+and set-user-ID mode is set.
-+If in the group permissions, the file is executable
-+and setgroup-ID mode is set.
-+.It Sy x
-+The file is executable or the directory is
-+searchable.
-+.It Sy \-
-+The file is neither readable, writable, executable,
-+nor set-user-ID, nor set-group-ID, nor sticky (see below).
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+These next two apply only to the third character in the last group
-+(other permissions):
-+.Bl -tag -width 4n -offset indent
-+.It Sy T
-+The sticky bit is set
-+(mode
-+.Li 1000 ) ,
-+but neither executable nor searchable (see
-+.Xr chmod 1
-+or
-+.Xr sticky 8 ) .
-+.It Sy t
-+The sticky bit is set (mode
-+.Li 1000 ) ,
-+and is searchable or executable
-+(see
-+.Xr chmod 1
-+or
-+.Xr sticky 8 ) .
-+.El
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+In addition, if the
-+.Fl o
-+option is specified, the file flags (see
-+.Xr chflags 1 )
-+are displayed as comma-separated strings in front of the file size,
-+abbreviated as follows:
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -tag -width 8n -offset indent -compact
-+.It \&-
-+no flags
-+.It uappnd
-+user append-only
-+.It uchg
-+user immutable
-+.It nodump
-+do not dump
-+.It opaque
-+opaque file
-+.It sappnd
-+system append-only
-+.It arch
-+archived
-+.It schg
-+system immutable
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Nm
-+utility exits 0 on success or >0 if an error occurred.
-+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-+The following environment variables affect the execution of
-+.Nm ls :
-+.Bl -tag -width BLOCKSIZE
-+.It Ev BLOCKSIZE
-+If the environment variable
-+.Ev BLOCKSIZE
-+is set, and the
-+.Fl k
-+option is not specified, the block counts
-+(see
-+.Fl s )
-+will be displayed in units of that size block.
-+.It COLUMNS
-+If this variable contains a string representing a
-+decimal integer, it is used as the
-+column position width for displaying
-+multiple-text-column output.
-+The
-+.Nm
-+utility calculates how
-+many pathname text columns to display
-+based on the width provided
-+(see
-+.Fl C ) .
-+.It Ev TZ
-+The timezone to use when displaying dates.
-+See
-+.Xr environ 7
-+for more information.
-+.El
-+.Sh COMPATIBILITY
-+The group field is now automatically included in the long listing for
-+files in order to be compatible with the
-+.St -p1003.2
-+specification.
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr chflags 1 ,
-+.Xr chmod 1 ,
-+.Xr symlink 7 ,
-+.Xr sticky 8
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+An
-+.Nm
-+utility appeared in
-+.At v5 .
-+.Sh STANDARDS
-+The
-+.Nm
-+utility is expected to be a superset of the
-+.St -p1003.2
-+specification.
-diff --git a/ping/Makefile.am b/ping/Makefile.am
-index 33584dd..a67d5bc 100644
---- a/ping/Makefile.am
-+++ b/ping/Makefile.am
-@@ -21,6 +21,12 @@ bin_PROGRAMS = @ping_BUILD@ @ping6_BUILD@
- 
- EXTRA_PROGRAMS = ping ping6
- 
-+if ENABLE_ping
-+man_MANS = ping.8
-+endif
-+
-+EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
-+
- ping_LDADD = -L../libinetutils -linetutils -L../libicmp -licmp ../lib/libgnu.a
- ping6_LDADD = ../lib/libgnu.a -L../libinetutils -linetutils
- INCLUDES = -I$(top_srcdir)/lib -I../lib -I$(top_srcdir)/libicmp \
-@@ -42,3 +48,5 @@ install-ping-hook:
- 	done
- 
- install-exec-hook: @ping_INSTALL_HOOK@
-+
-+# EOF
-diff --git a/ping/ping.8 b/ping/ping.8
-new file mode 100755
-index 0000000..2382365
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/ping/ping.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,328 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
-+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
-+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)ping.8	8.3 (Berkeley) 4/28/95
-+.\"
-+.Dd April 28, 1995
-+.Dt PING 8
-+.Os BSD 4.3
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm ping
-+.Nd send
-+.Tn ICMP ECHO_REQUEST
-+packets to network hosts
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm ping
-+.Op Fl Rdfnqrv
-+.Op Fl c Ar count
-+.Op Fl i Ar wait
-+.Op Fl l Ar preload
-+.Op Fl p Ar pattern
-+.Op Fl s Ar packetsize
-+.Ar host
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Ping
-+uses the
-+.Tn ICMP
-+protocol's mandatory
-+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
-+datagram to elicit an
-+.Tn ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE
-+from a host or gateway.
-+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
-+datagrams (``pings'') have an IP and
-+.Tn ICMP
-+header,
-+followed by a
-+.Dq struct timeval
-+and then an arbitrary number of ``pad'' bytes used to fill out the
-+packet.
-+The options are as follows:
-+.Bl -tag -width Ds
-+.It Fl c Ar count
-+Stop after sending (and receiving)
-+.Ar count
-+.Tn ECHO_RESPONSE
-+packets.
-+.It Fl d
-+Set the
-+.Dv SO_DEBUG
-+option on the socket being used.
-+.It Fl f
-+Flood ping.
-+Outputs packets as fast as they come back or one hundred times per second,
-+whichever is more.
-+For every
-+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
-+sent a period ``.'' is printed, while for every
-+.Tn ECHO_REPLY
-+received a backspace is printed.
-+This provides a rapid display of how many packets are being dropped.
-+Only the super-user may use this option.
-+.Bf -emphasis
-+This can be very hard on a network and should be used with caution.
-+.Ef
-+.It Fl i Ar wait
-+Wait
-+.Ar wait
-+seconds
-+.Em between sending each packet .
-+The default is to wait for one second between each packet.
-+This option is incompatible with the
-+.Fl f
-+option.
-+.It Fl l Ar preload
-+If
-+.Ar preload
-+is specified,
-+.Nm ping
-+sends that many packets as fast as possible before falling into its normal
-+mode of behavior.
-+.It Fl n
-+Numeric output only.
-+No attempt will be made to lookup symbolic names for host addresses.
-+.It Fl p Ar pattern
-+You may specify up to 16 ``pad'' bytes to fill out the packet you send.
-+This is useful for diagnosing data-dependent problems in a network.
-+For example,
-+.Dq Li \-p ff
-+will cause the sent packet to be filled with all
-+ones.
-+.It Fl q
-+Quiet output.
-+Nothing is displayed except the summary lines at startup time and
-+when finished.
-+.It Fl R
-+Record route.
-+Includes the
-+.Tn RECORD_ROUTE
-+option in the
-+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
-+packet and displays
-+the route buffer on returned packets.
-+Note that the IP header is only large enough for nine such routes.
-+Many hosts ignore or discard this option.
-+.It Fl r
-+Bypass the normal routing tables and send directly to a host on an attached
-+network.
-+If the host is not on a directly-attached network, an error is returned.
-+This option can be used to ping a local host through an interface
-+that has no route through it (e.g., after the interface was dropped by
-+.Xr routed 8 ) .
-+.It Fl s Ar packetsize
-+Specifies the number of data bytes to be sent.  
-+The default is 56, which translates into 64
-+.Tn ICMP
-+data bytes when combined
-+with the 8 bytes of
-+.Tn ICMP
-+header data.
-+.It Fl v
-+Verbose output.
-+.Tn ICMP
-+packets other than
-+.Tn ECHO_RESPONSE
-+that are received are listed.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+When using
-+.Nm ping
-+for fault isolation, it should first be run on the local host, to verify
-+that the local network interface is up and running.
-+Then, hosts and gateways further and further away should be ``pinged''.
-+Round-trip times and packet loss statistics are computed.
-+If duplicate packets are received, they are not included in the packet
-+loss calculation, although the round trip time of these packets is used
-+in calculating the minimum/average/maximum round-trip time numbers.
-+When the specified number of packets have been sent (and received) or
-+if the program is terminated with a
-+.Dv SIGINT ,
-+a brief summary is displayed.
-+.Pp
-+This program is intended for use in network testing, measurement and
-+management.
-+Because of the load it can impose on the network, it is unwise to use
-+.Nm ping
-+during normal operations or from automated scripts.
-+.Sh ICMP PACKET DETAILS
-+An IP header without options is 20 bytes.
-+An
-+.Tn ICMP
-+.Tn ECHO_REQUEST
-+packet contains an additional 8 bytes worth
-+of
-+.Tn ICMP
-+header followed by an arbitrary amount of data.
-+When a
-+.Ar packetsize
-+is given, this indicated the size of this extra piece of data (the
-+default is 56).
-+Thus the amount of data received inside of an IP packet of type
-+.Tn ICMP
-+.Tn ECHO_REPLY
-+will always be 8 bytes more than the requested data space
-+(the
-+.Tn ICMP
-+header).
-+.Pp
-+If the data space is at least eight bytes large,
-+.Nm ping
-+uses the first eight bytes of this space to include a timestamp which
-+it uses in the computation of round trip times.
-+If less than eight bytes of pad are specified, no round trip times are
-+given.
-+.Sh DUPLICATE AND DAMAGED PACKETS
-+.Nm Ping
-+will report duplicate and damaged packets.
-+Duplicate packets should never occur, and seem to be caused by
-+inappropriate link-level retransmissions.
-+Duplicates may occur in many situations and are rarely (if ever) a
-+good sign, although the presence of low levels of duplicates may not
-+always be cause for alarm.
-+.Pp
-+Damaged packets are obviously serious cause for alarm and often
-+indicate broken hardware somewhere in the
-+.Nm ping
-+packet's path (in the network or in the hosts).
-+.Sh TRYING DIFFERENT DATA PATTERNS
-+The (inter)network layer should never treat packets differently depending
-+on the data contained in the data portion.
-+Unfortunately, data-dependent problems have been known to sneak into
-+networks and remain undetected for long periods of time.
-+In many cases the particular pattern that will have problems is something
-+that doesn't have sufficient ``transitions'', such as all ones or all
-+zeros, or a pattern right at the edge, such as almost all zeros.
-+It isn't necessarily enough to specify a data pattern of all zeros (for
-+example) on the command line because the pattern that is of interest is
-+at the data link level, and the relationship between what you type and
-+what the controllers transmit can be complicated.
-+.Pp
-+This means that if you have a data-dependent problem you will probably
-+have to do a lot of testing to find it.
-+If you are lucky, you may manage to find a file that either can't be sent
-+across your network or that takes much longer to transfer than other
-+similar length files.
-+You can then examine this file for repeated patterns that you can test
-+using the
-+.Fl p
-+option of
-+.Nm ping .
-+.Sh TTL DETAILS
-+The
-+.Tn TTL
-+value of an IP packet represents the maximum number of IP routers
-+that the packet can go through before being thrown away.
-+In current practice you can expect each router in the Internet to decrement
-+the
-+.Tn TTL
-+field by exactly one.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Tn TCP/IP
-+specification states that the
-+.Tn TTL
-+field for
-+.Tn TCP
-+packets should
-+be set to 60, but many systems use smaller values (4.3
-+.Tn BSD
-+uses 30, 4.2 used
-+15).
-+.Pp
-+The maximum possible value of this field is 255, and most Unix systems set
-+the
-+.Tn TTL
-+field of
-+.Tn ICMP ECHO_REQUEST
-+packets to 255.
-+This is why you will find you can ``ping'' some hosts, but not reach them
-+with
-+.Xr telnet 1
-+or
-+.Xr ftp 1 .
-+.Pp
-+In normal operation ping prints the ttl value from the packet it receives.
-+When a remote system receives a ping packet, it can do one of three things
-+with the
-+.Tn TTL
-+field in its response:
-+.Bl -bullet
-+.It
-+Not change it; this is what Berkeley Unix systems did before the
-+.Bx 4.3 tahoe
-+release.
-+In this case the
-+.Tn TTL
-+value in the received packet will be 255 minus the
-+number of routers in the round-trip path.
-+.It
-+Set it to 255; this is what current Berkeley Unix systems do.
-+In this case the
-+.Tn TTL
-+value in the received packet will be 255 minus the
-+number of routers in the path
-+.Xr from
-+the remote system
-+.Em to
-+the
-+.Nm ping Ns Em ing
-+host.
-+.It
-+Set it to some other value.
-+Some machines use the same value for
-+.Tn ICMP
-+packets that they use for
-+.Tn TCP
-+packets, for example either 30 or 60.
-+Others may use completely wild values.
-+.El
-+.Sh BUGS
-+Many Hosts and Gateways ignore the
-+.Tn RECORD_ROUTE
-+option.
-+.Pp
-+The maximum IP header length is too small for options like
-+.Tn RECORD_ROUTE
-+to
-+be completely useful.
-+There's not much that that can be done about this, however.
-+.Pp
-+Flood pinging is not recommended in general, and flood pinging the
-+broadcast address should only be done under very controlled conditions.
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr netstat 1 ,
-+.Xr ifconfig 8 ,
-+.Xr routed 8
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.3 .
-diff --git a/src/Makefile.am b/src/Makefile.am
-index e19a0ce..c893100 100644
---- a/src/Makefile.am
-+++ b/src/Makefile.am
-@@ -24,6 +24,43 @@ inetdaemon_PROGRAMS =
- bin_PROGRAMS =
- EXTRA_PROGRAMS =
- 
-+man_MANS =
-+
-+if ENABLE_inetd
-+man_MANS += inetd.8
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_logger
-+man_MANS += logger.1
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_rcp
-+man_MANS += rcp.1
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_rexecd
-+man_MANS += rexecd.8
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_rlogin
-+man_MANS += rlogin.1
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_rlogind
-+man_MANS += rlogind.8
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_rsh
-+man_MANS += rsh.1
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_rshd
-+man_MANS += rshd.8
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_syslogd
-+man_MANS += syslog.conf.5 syslogd.8
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_tftp
-+man_MANS += tftp.1
-+endif
-+if ENABLE_tftpd
-+man_MANS += tftpd.8
-+endif
-+
-+EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
- 
- bin_PROGRAMS += @hostname_BUILD@
- hostname_SOURCES = hostname.c
-diff --git a/src/inetd.8 b/src/inetd.8
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..942ab3c
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/inetd.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,439 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993, 1994
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)inetd.8	8.4 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
-+.\"
-+.Dd October 21, 2006
-+.Dt INETD 8
-+.Os BSD 4.4
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm inetd
-+.Nd internet
-+.Dq super-server
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm inetd
-+.Op Fl d
-+.Op Fl R Ar rate
-+.Op Fl -environment
-+.Op Fl -resolve
-+.Op Ar configuration_files ...
-+.Sh WARNING
-+The information in this man page may be inaccurate or incomplete.  The
-+authoritative documentation for the
-+.Nm inetd
-+utility is contained in
-+.Pa inetutils.info
-+document.  To access it from your command line, type
-+.Pp
-+\fBinfo inetd\fR
-+.Pp
-+The online copy of the documentation is available at the following
-+address:
-+.Pp
-+http://www.gnu.org/software/inetutils/manual.
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+The
-+.Nm inetd
-+program
-+should be run at boot time by
-+.Pa /etc/rc
-+(see
-+.Xr rc 8 ) .
-+It then listens for connections on certain
-+internet sockets.  When a connection is found on one
-+of its sockets, it decides what service the socket
-+corresponds to, and invokes a program to service the request.
-+The server program is invoked with the service socket
-+as its standard input, output and error descriptors.
-+After the program is
-+finished,
-+.Nm inetd
-+continues to listen on the socket (except in some cases which
-+will be described below).  Essentially,
-+.Nm inetd
-+allows running one daemon to invoke several others,
-+reducing load on the system.
-+.Pp
-+The options available for
-+.Nm inetd:
-+.Bl -tag -width Ds
-+.It Fl d, -debug
-+Turns on debugging.
-+.It Fl -environment
-+Pass local and remote address data via environment variables. See
-+\fBENVIRONMENT\fP below.
-+.It Fl R, -rate Ar rate
-+Specifies the maximum number of times a service can be invoked
-+in one minute; the default is 1000.
-+.It Fl -resolve
-+Resolve local and remote IP addresses and pass them to the server program
-+via \fBTCPLOCALHOST\fP and \fBTCPREMOTEHOST\fP environment variables. See
-+\fBENVIRONMENT\fP below. This option implies \fB--environment\fP.
-+.It Fl -version
-+Shows the version.
-+.It Fl -help
-+Shows the help.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+Upon execution,
-+.Nm inetd
-+reads its configuration information from a configuration
-+file on the command line, by default,
-+.Pa /etc/inetd.conf and /etc/inetd.d .
-+If the configuration pathname is a directory, all the files in the
-+directory are read like a configuration file. All of the configuration
-+files are read and merged.  There must be an entry for each field in
-+the configuration file, with entries for each field separated by a tab
-+or a space.  Comments are denoted by a ``#'' at the beginning of a
-+line.  The fields of the configuration file are as follows:
-+.Pp
-+.Bd -unfilled -offset indent -compact
-+service name
-+socket type
-+protocol
-+wait/nowait[.max]
-+user
-+server program
-+server program arguments
-+.Ed
-+.Pp
-+There are two types of services that
-+.Nm inetd
-+can start: standard and TCPMUX.
-+A standard service has a well-known port assigned to it;
-+it may be a service that implements an official Internet standard or is a
-+BSD-specific service.
-+As described in
-+.Tn RFC 1078 ,
-+TCPMUX services are nonstandard services that do not have a
-+well-known port assigned to them.
-+They are invoked from
-+.Nm inetd
-+when a program connects to the
-+.Dq tcpmux
-+well-known port and specifies
-+the service name.
-+This feature is useful for adding locally-developed servers.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em service-name
-+entry is the name of a valid service in
-+the file
-+.Pa /etc/services .
-+For
-+.Dq internal
-+services (discussed below), the service
-+name
-+.Em must
-+be the official name of the service (that is, the first entry in
-+.Pa /etc/services ) .
-+For TCPMUX services, the value of the
-+.Em service-name
-+field consists of the string
-+.Dq tcpmux
-+followed by a slash and the
-+locally-chosen service name.
-+The service names listed in
-+.Pa /etc/services
-+and the name
-+.Dq help
-+are reserved.
-+Try to choose unique names for your TCPMUX services by prefixing them with
-+your organization's name and suffixing them with a version number.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em socket-type
-+should be one of
-+.Dq stream ,
-+.Dq dgram ,
-+.Dq raw ,
-+.Dq rdm ,
-+or
-+.Dq seqpacket ,
-+depending on whether the socket is a stream, datagram, raw,
-+reliably delivered message, or sequenced packet socket.
-+TCPMUX services must use
-+.Dq stream .
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em protocol
-+must be a valid protocol as given in
-+.Pa /etc/protocols .
-+Examples might be
-+.Dq tcp
-+or
-+.Dq udp .
-+TCPMUX services must use
-+.Dq tcp .
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em wait/nowait[.max]
-+entry specifies whether the server that is invoked by inetd will take over
-+the socket associated with the service access point, and thus whether
-+.Nm inetd
-+should wait for the server to exit before listening for new service
-+requests.
-+Datagram servers must use
-+.Dq wait ,
-+as they are always invoked with the original datagram socket bound
-+to the specified service address.
-+These servers must read at least one datagram from the socket
-+before exiting.
-+If a datagram server connects
-+to its peer, freeing the socket so
-+.Nm inetd
-+can received further messages on the socket, it is said to be
-+a
-+.Dq multi-threaded
-+server;
-+it should read one datagram from the socket and create a new socket
-+connected to the peer.
-+It should fork, and the parent should then exit
-+to allow
-+.Nm inetd
-+to check for new service requests to spawn new servers.
-+Datagram servers which process all incoming datagrams
-+on a socket and eventually time out are said to be
-+.Dq single-threaded .
-+.Xr Comsat 8 ,
-+.Pq Xr biff 1
-+and
-+.Xr talkd 8
-+are both examples of the latter type of
-+datagram server.
-+.Xr Tftpd 8
-+is an example of a multi-threaded datagram server.
-+.Pp
-+Servers using stream sockets generally are multi-threaded and
-+use the
-+.Dq nowait
-+entry.
-+Connection requests for these services are accepted by
-+.Nm inetd ,
-+and the server is given only the newly-accepted socket connected
-+to a client of the service.
-+Most stream-based services operate in this manner.
-+Stream-based servers that use
-+.Dq wait
-+are started with the listening service socket, and must accept
-+at least one connection request before exiting.
-+Such a server would normally accept and process incoming connection
-+requests until a timeout.
-+TCPMUX services must use
-+.Dq nowait .
-+.Pp
-+The optional
-+.Dq max
-+suffix (separated from
-+.Dq wait
-+or
-+.Dq nowait
-+by a dot) is a decimal number that specifies the maximum number of server
-+instances that may be spawned from
-+.Nm inetd
-+within an interval of 60 seconds.  It overrides the settings of the
-+\fB-R\fP command line option. 
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em user
-+entry should contain the user name of the user as whom the server
-+should run.  This allows for servers to be given less permission
-+than root.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em server-program
-+entry should contain the pathname of the program which is to be
-+executed by
-+.Nm inetd
-+when a request is found on its socket.  If
-+.Nm inetd
-+provides this service internally, this entry should
-+be
-+.Dq internal .
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em server program arguments
-+should be just as arguments
-+normally are, starting with argv[0], which is the name of
-+the program.  If the service is provided internally, the
-+word
-+.Dq internal
-+should take the place of this entry.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Nm inetd
-+program
-+provides several
-+.Dq trivial
-+services internally by use of
-+routines within itself.  These services are
-+.Dq echo ,
-+.Dq discard ,
-+.Dq chargen
-+(character generator),
-+.Dq daytime
-+(human readable time), and
-+.Dq time
-+(machine readable time,
-+in the form of the number of seconds since midnight, January
-+1, 1900).  All of these services are tcp based.  For
-+details of these services, consult the appropriate
-+.Tn RFC
-+from the Network Information Center.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Nm inetd
-+program
-+rereads its configuration file when it receives a hangup signal,
-+.Dv SIGHUP .
-+Services may be added, deleted or modified when the configuration file
-+is reread.
-+.Sh TCPMUX
-+.Pp
-+.Tn RFC 1078
-+describes the TCPMUX protocol:
-+``A TCP client connects to a foreign host on TCP port 1.  It sends the
-+service name followed by a carriage-return line-feed <CRLF>.  The
-+service name is never case sensitive.  The server replies with a
-+single character indicating positive (+) or negative (\-)
-+acknowledgment, immediately followed by an optional message of
-+explanation, terminated with a <CRLF>.  If the reply was positive,
-+the selected protocol begins; otherwise the connection is closed.''
-+The program is passed the TCP connection as file descriptors 0 and 1.
-+.Pp
-+If the TCPMUX service name begins with a ``+'',
-+.Nm inetd
-+returns the positive reply for the program.
-+This allows you to invoke programs that use stdin/stdout
-+without putting any special server code in them.
-+.Pp
-+The special service name
-+.Dq help
-+causes
-+.Nm inetd
-+to list TCPMUX services in
-+.Pa inetd.conf .
-+.ne 1i
-+.Sh "ENVIRONMENT"
-+If a connection is made with a streaming protocol (TCP) and if
-+\fB--environment\fP option has been given, inetd will set
-+the following environment variables before starting the program:
-+.Pp
-+\fBPROTO\fP: always "TCP".
-+.Pp
-+\fBTCPLOCALIP\fP: the local IP address of the interface which accepted the connection.
-+.Pp
-+\fBTCPLOCALPORT\fP: the port number on which the TCP connection was established.
-+.Pp
-+\fBTCPREMOTEIP\fP: the IP address of the remote client.
-+.Pp
-+\fBTCPREMOTEPORT\fP: the port number on the client side of the TCP connection.
-+
-+.Pp
-+In addition, if given the \fB--remote\fP option,
-+.Nm inetd
-+will set the following environment variables:
-+.Pp
-+\fBTCPLOCALHOST\fP: the DNS name of \fITCPLOCALIP\fR.
-+.Pp
-+\fBTCPREMOTEHOST\fP: the DNS name of \fITCPREMOTEIP\fR.
-+
-+.Sh "EXAMPLES"
-+.Pp
-+Here are several example service entries for the various types of services:
-+.Bd -literal
-+ftp           stream  tcp   nowait root  /usr/libexec/ftpd       ftpd -l
-+ntalk         dgram   udp   wait   root  /usr/libexec/ntalkd     ntalkd
-+tcpmux/+date  stream  tcp   nowait guest /bin/date               date
-+tcpmux/phonebook stream tcp nowait guest /usr/local/bin/phonebook phonebook
-+.Ed
-+.Sh "ERROR MESSAGES"
-+The
-+.Nm inetd
-+server
-+logs error messages using
-+.Xr syslog 3 .
-+Important error messages and their explanations are:
-+.Bd -literal
-+\fIservice\fP/\fIprotocol\fP server failing (looping), service terminated.
-+.Ed
-+The number of requests for the specified service in the past minute
-+exceeded the limit. The limit exists to prevent a broken program
-+or a malicious user from swamping the system.
-+This message may occur for several reasons:
-+1) there are lots of hosts requesting the service within a short time period,
-+2) a 'broken' client program is requesting the service too frequently,
-+3) a malicious user is running a program to invoke the service in
-+a 'denial of service' attack, or
-+4) the invoked service program has an error that causes clients
-+to retry quickly.
-+Use the
-+.Op Fl R
-+option,
-+as described above, to change the rate limit.
-+Once the limit is reached, the service will be
-+reenabled automatically in 10 minutes.
-+.sp
-+.Bd -literal
-+\fIservice\fP/\fIprotocol\fP: No such user '\fIuser\fP', service ignored
-+\fIservice\fP/\fIprotocol\fP: getpwnam: \fIuser\fP: No such user
-+.Ed
-+No entry for
-+.Em user
-+exists in the
-+.Pa passwd
-+file. The first message
-+occurs when
-+.Nm inetd
-+(re)reads the configuration file. The second message occurs when the
-+service is invoked.
-+.sp
-+.Bd -literal
-+\fIservice\fP: can't set uid \fInumber\fP
-+\fIservice\fP: can't set gid \fInumber\fP
-+.Ed
-+The user or group ID for the entry's
-+.Em user
-+is invalid.
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr comsat 8 ,
-+.Xr fingerd 8 ,
-+.Xr ftpd 8 ,
-+.Xr rexecd 8 ,
-+.Xr rlogind 8 ,
-+.Xr rshd 8 ,
-+.Xr telnetd 8 ,
-+.Xr tftpd 8
-+.Sh BUGS
-+The environment variables (see \fBENVIRONMENT\fP) are set only for
-+TCP IPv4 nowait connections.
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.3 .
-+TCPMUX is based on code and documentation by Mark Lottor.
-diff --git a/src/logger.1 b/src/logger.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..539fc57
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/logger.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"	@(#)logger.1	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/6/93
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 6, 1993
-+.Dt LOGGER 1
-+.Os BSD 4.3
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm logger
-+.Nd make entries in the system log
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm logger
-+.Op Fl is
-+.Op Fl f Ar file
-+.Op Fl p Ar pri
-+.Op Fl t Ar tag
-+.Op Ar message ...
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Logger
-+provides a shell command interface to the
-+.Xr syslog  3
-+system log module.
-+.Pp
-+Options:
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -tag -width "message"
-+.It Fl i
-+Log the process id of the logger process
-+with each line.
-+.It Fl s
-+Log the message to standard error, as well as the system log.
-+.It Fl f Ar file
-+Log the specified file.
-+.It Fl p Ar pri
-+Enter the message with the specified priority.
-+The priority may be specified numerically or as a ``facility.level''
-+pair.
-+For example, ``\-p local3.info'' logs the message(s) as
-+.Ar info Ns rmational
-+level in the
-+.Ar local3
-+facility.
-+The default is ``user.notice.''
-+.It Fl t Ar tag
-+Mark every line in the log with the specified
-+.Ar tag  .
-+.It Ar message
-+Write the message to log; if not specified, and the
-+.Fl f
-+flag is not
-+provided, standard input is logged.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Nm logger
-+utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs.
-+.Sh EXAMPLES
-+.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
-+logger System rebooted
-+
-+logger \-p local0.notice \-t HOSTIDM \-f /dev/idmc
-+.Ed
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr syslog 3 ,
-+.Xr syslogd 8
-+.Sh STANDARDS
-+The
-+.Nm logger
-+command is expected to be
-+.St -p1003.2
-+compatible.
-diff --git a/src/rcp.1 b/src/rcp.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..6283dbc
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/rcp.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"	@(#)rcp.1	8.1 (Berkeley) 5/31/93
-+.\"
-+.Dd May 31, 1993
-+.Dt RCP 1
-+.Os BSD 4.3r
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm rcp
-+.Nd remote file copy
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm rcp
-+.Op Fl Kpx
-+.Op Fl k Ar realm
-+.Ar file1 file2
-+.Nm rcp
-+.Op Fl Kprx
-+.Op Fl k Ar realm
-+.Ar file ...
-+.Ar directory
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Rcp
-+copies files between machines.  Each
-+.Ar file
-+or
-+.Ar directory
-+argument is either a remote file name of the
-+form ``rname@rhost:path'', or a local file name (containing no `:' characters,
-+or a `/' before any `:'s).
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -tag -width flag
-+.It Fl K
-+The
-+.Fl K
-+option turns off all Kerberos authentication.
-+.It Fl k
-+The
-+.Fl k
-+option requests
-+.Nm rcp
-+to obtain tickets
-+for the remote host in realm
-+.Ar realm
-+instead of the remote host's realm as determined by
-+.Xr krb_realmofhost  3  .
-+.It Fl p
-+The
-+.Fl p
-+option causes
-+.Nm rcp
-+to attempt to preserve (duplicate) in its copies the modification
-+times and modes of the source files, ignoring the
-+.Ar umask  .
-+By default, the mode and owner of
-+.Ar file2
-+are preserved if it already existed; otherwise the mode of the source file
-+modified by the
-+.Xr umask  2
-+on the destination host is used.
-+.It Fl r
-+If any of the source files are directories,
-+.Nm rcp
-+copies each subtree rooted at that name; in this case
-+the destination must be a directory.
-+.It Fl x
-+The
-+.Fl x
-+option turns on
-+.Tn DES
-+encryption for all data passed by
-+.Nm rcp .
-+This may impact response time and
-+.Tn CPU
-+utilization, but provides
-+increased security.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+If
-+.Ar path
-+is not a full path name, it is interpreted relative to
-+the login directory of the specified user
-+.Ar ruser
-+on
-+.Ar rhost  ,
-+or your current user name if no other remote user name is specified.
-+A
-+.Ar path
-+on a remote host may be quoted (using \e, ", or \(aa)
-+so that the metacharacters are interpreted remotely.
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Rcp
-+does not prompt for passwords; it performs remote execution
-+via
-+.Xr rsh  1  ,
-+and requires the same authorization.
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Rcp
-+handles third party copies, where neither source nor target files
-+are on the current machine.
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr cp 1 ,
-+.Xr ftp 1 ,
-+.Xr rsh 1 ,
-+.Xr rlogin 1
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm rcp
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-+The version of
-+.Nm rcp
-+described here
-+has been reimplemented with Kerberos in
-+.Bx 4.3 Reno .
-+.Sh BUGS
-+Doesn't detect all cases where the target of a copy might
-+be a file in cases where only a directory should be legal.
-+.Pp
-+Is confused by any output generated by commands in a
-+.Pa \&.login ,
-+.Pa \&.profile ,
-+or
-+.Pa \&.cshrc
-+file on the remote host.
-+.Pp
-+The destination user and hostname may have to be specified as
-+``rhost.rname'' when the destination machine is running the
-+.Bx 4.2
-+version of
-+.Nm rcp  .
-diff --git a/src/rexecd.8 b/src/rexecd.8
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..0790d3d
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/rexecd.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)rexecd.8	8.3 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 1, 1994
-+.Dt REXECD 8
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm rexecd
-+.Nd remote execution server
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm rexecd
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Rexecd
-+is the server for the
-+.Xr rexec 3
-+routine.  The server provides remote execution facilities
-+with authentication based on user names and
-+passwords.
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Rexecd
-+listens for service requests at the port indicated in
-+the ``exec'' service specification; see
-+.Xr services 5 .
-+When a service request is received the following protocol
-+is initiated:
-+.Bl -enum
-+.It
-+The server reads characters from the socket up
-+to a NUL
-+.Pq Ql \e0
-+byte.  The resultant string is
-+interpreted as an
-+.Tn ASCII
-+number, base 10.
-+.It
-+If the number received in step 1 is non-zero,
-+it is interpreted as the port number of a secondary
-+stream to be used for the
-+.Em stderr .
-+A second connection is then created to the specified
-+port on the client's machine.
-+.It
-+A NUL terminated user name of at most 16 characters
-+is retrieved on the initial socket.
-+.It
-+A NUL terminated, unencrypted password of at most
-+16 characters is retrieved on the initial socket.
-+.It
-+A NUL terminated command to be passed to a
-+shell is retrieved on the initial socket.  The length of
-+the command is limited by the upper bound on the size of
-+the system's argument list.
-+.It
-+.Nm Rexecd
-+then validates the user as is done at login time
-+and, if the authentication was successful, changes
-+to the user's home directory, and establishes the user
-+and group protections of the user.
-+If any of these steps fail the connection is
-+aborted with a diagnostic message returned.
-+.It
-+A NUL byte is returned on the initial socket
-+and the command line is passed to the normal login
-+shell of the user.  The
-+shell inherits the network connections established
-+by
-+.Nm rexecd .
-+.El
-+.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-+Except for the last one listed below,
-+all diagnostic messages are returned on the initial socket,
-+after which any network connections are closed.
-+An error is indicated by a leading byte with a value of
-+1 (0 is returned in step 7 above upon successful completion
-+of all the steps prior to the command execution).
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -tag -width Ds
-+.It Sy username too long
-+The name is
-+longer than 16 characters.
-+.It Sy password too long
-+The password is longer than 16 characters.
-+.It Sy command too long
-+The command line passed exceeds the size of the argument
-+list (as configured into the system).
-+.It Sy Login incorrect.
-+No password file entry for the user name existed.
-+.It Sy Password incorrect.
-+The wrong password was supplied.
-+.ne 1i
-+.It Sy \&No remote directory.
-+The
-+.Xr chdir
-+command to the home directory failed.
-+.It Sy Try again.
-+A
-+.Xr fork
-+by the server failed.
-+.It Sy <shellname>: ...
-+The user's login shell could not be started.
-+This message is returned
-+on the connection associated with the
-+.Em stderr ,
-+and is not preceded by a flag byte.
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr rexec 3
-+.Sh BUGS
-+Indicating ``Login incorrect'' as opposed to ``Password incorrect''
-+is a security breach which allows people to probe a system for users
-+with null passwords.
-+.Pp
-+A facility to allow all data and password exchanges to be encrypted should be
-+present.
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-diff --git a/src/rlogin.1 b/src/rlogin.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..98e6751
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/rlogin.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"	@(#)rlogin.1	8.2 (Berkeley) 4/29/95
-+.\"
-+.Dd April 29, 1995
-+.Dt RLOGIN 1
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm rlogin
-+.Nd remote login
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm rlogin
-+.Op Fl 8EKLdx
-+.Op Fl e Ar char
-+.Op Fl k Ar realm
-+.Op Fl l Ar username
-+.Ar host
-+.Nm rlogin
-+.Op Fl 8EKLdx
-+.Op Fl e Ar char
-+.Op Fl k Ar realm
-+.Ar username@host
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Rlogin
-+starts a terminal session on a remote host
-+.Ar host  .
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Rlogin
-+first attempts to use the Kerberos authorization mechanism, described below.
-+If the remote host does not supporting Kerberos the standard Berkeley
-+.Pa rhosts
-+authorization mechanism is used.
-+The options are as follows:
-+.Bl -tag -width flag
-+.It Fl 8
-+The
-+.Fl 8
-+option allows an eight-bit input data path at all times; otherwise
-+parity bits are stripped except when the remote side's stop and start
-+characters are other than
-+^S/^Q .
-+.It Fl E
-+The
-+.Fl E
-+option stops any character from being recognized as an escape character.
-+When used with the
-+.Fl 8
-+option, this provides a completely transparent connection.
-+.It Fl K
-+The
-+.Fl K
-+option turns off all Kerberos authentication.
-+.It Fl L
-+The
-+.Fl L
-+option allows the rlogin session to be run in ``litout'' (see
-+.Xr tty 4 )
-+mode.
-+.It Fl d
-+The
-+.Fl d
-+option turns on socket debugging (see
-+.Xr setsockopt 2 )
-+on the TCP sockets used for communication with the remote host.
-+.It Fl e
-+The
-+.Fl e
-+option allows user specification of the escape character, which is
-+``~'' by default.
-+This specification may be as a literal character, or as an octal
-+value in the form \ennn.
-+.It Fl k
-+The
-+.FL k
-+option requests rlogin to obtain tickets for the remote host
-+in realm
-+.Ar realm
-+instead of the remote host's realm as determined by
-+.Xr krb_realmofhost  3  .
-+.It Fl x
-+The
-+.Fl x
-+option turns on
-+.Tn DES
-+encryption for all data passed via the
-+rlogin session.
-+This may impact response time and
-+.Tn CPU
-+utilization, but provides
-+increased security.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+A line of the form ``<escape char>.'' disconnects from the remote host.
-+Similarly, the line ``<escape char>^Z'' will suspend the
-+.Nm rlogin
-+session, and ``<escape char><delayed-suspend char>'' suspends the
-+send portion of the rlogin, but allows output from the remote system.
-+By default, the tilde (``~'') character is the escape character, and
-+normally control-Y (``^Y'') is the delayed-suspend character.
-+.Pp
-+All echoing takes place at the remote site, so that (except for delays)
-+the
-+.Nm rlogin
-+is transparent.
-+Flow control via ^S/^Q and flushing of input and output on interrupts
-+are handled properly.
-+.Sh KERBEROS AUTHENTICATION
-+Each user may have a private authorization list in the file
-+.Pa .klogin
-+in their home directory.
-+Each line in this file should contain a Kerberos principal name of the
-+form
-+.Ar principal.instance@realm  .
-+If the originating user is authenticated to one of the principals named
-+in
-+.Pa .klogin ,
-+access is granted to the account.
-+The principal
-+.Ar accountname.@localrealm
-+is granted access if
-+there is no
-+.Pa .klogin
-+file.
-+Otherwise a login and password will be prompted for on the remote machine
-+as in
-+.Xr login  1  .
-+To avoid certain security problems, the
-+.Pa .klogin
-+file must be owned by
-+the remote user.
-+.Pp
-+If Kerberos authentication fails, a warning message is printed and the
-+standard Berkeley
-+.Nm rlogin
-+is used instead.
-+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-+The following environment variable is utilized by
-+.Nm rlogin :
-+.Bl -tag -width TERM
-+.It Ev TERM
-+Determines the user's terminal type.
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr rsh 1 ,
-+.Xr kerberos 3 ,
-+.Xr krb_sendauth 3 ,
-+.Xr krb_realmofhost 3
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm rlogin
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-+.Sh BUGS
-+.Nm Rlogin
-+will be replaced by
-+.Xr telnet  1
-+in the near future.
-+.Pp
-+More of the environment should be propagated.
-diff --git a/src/rlogind.8 b/src/rlogind.8
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..096c75f
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/rlogind.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1989, 1991, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)rlogind.8	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 4, 1993
-+.Dt RLOGIND 8
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm rlogind
-+.Nd remote login server
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm rlogind
-+.Op Fl aln
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Rlogind
-+is the server for the
-+.Xr rlogin 1
-+program.  The server provides a remote login facility
-+with authentication based on privileged port numbers from trusted hosts.
-+.Pp
-+Options supported by
-+.Nm rlogind :
-+.Bl -tag -width Ds
-+.It Fl a
-+Ask hostname for verification.
-+.It Fl l
-+Prevent any authentication based on the user's
-+.Dq Pa .rhosts
-+file, unless the user is logging in as the superuser.
-+.It Fl n
-+Disable keep-alive messages.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Rlogind
-+listens for service requests at the port indicated in
-+the ``login'' service specification; see
-+.Xr services 5 .
-+When a service request is received the following protocol
-+is initiated:
-+.Bl -enum
-+.It
-+The server checks the client's source port.
-+If the port is not in the range 512-1023, the server
-+aborts the connection.
-+.It
-+The server checks the client's source address
-+and requests the corresponding host name (see
-+.Xr gethostbyaddr 3 ,
-+.Xr hosts 5
-+and
-+.Xr named 8 ) .
-+If the hostname cannot be determined,
-+the dot-notation representation of the host address is used.
-+If the hostname is in the same domain as the server (according to
-+the last two components of the domain name),
-+or if the
-+.Fl a
-+option is given,
-+the addresses for the hostname are requested,
-+verifying that the name and address correspond.
-+Normal authentication is bypassed if the address verification fails.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+Once the source port and address have been checked,
-+.Nm rlogind
-+proceeds with the authentication process described in
-+.Xr rshd 8 .
-+It then allocates a pseudo terminal (see
-+.Xr pty 4 ) ,
-+and manipulates file descriptors so that the slave
-+half of the pseudo terminal becomes the
-+.Em stdin ,
-+.Em stdout ,
-+and
-+.Em stderr
-+for a login process.
-+The login process is an instance of the
-+.Xr login 1
-+program, invoked with the
-+.Fl f
-+option if authentication has succeeded.
-+If automatic authentication fails, the user is
-+prompted to log in as if on a standard terminal line.
-+.Pp
-+The parent of the login process manipulates the master side of
-+the pseudo terminal, operating as an intermediary
-+between the login process and the client instance of the
-+.Xr rlogin
-+program.  In normal operation, the packet protocol described
-+in
-+.Xr pty 4
-+is invoked to provide
-+.Ql ^S/^Q
-+type facilities and propagate
-+interrupt signals to the remote programs.  The login process
-+propagates the client terminal's baud rate and terminal type,
-+as found in the environment variable,
-+.Ql Ev TERM ;
-+see
-+.Xr environ 7 .
-+The screen or window size of the terminal is requested from the client,
-+and window size changes from the client are propagated to the pseudo terminal.
-+.Pp
-+Transport-level keepalive messages are enabled unless the
-+.Fl n
-+option is present.
-+The use of keepalive messages allows sessions to be timed out
-+if the client crashes or becomes unreachable.
-+.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-+All initial diagnostic messages are indicated
-+by a leading byte with a value of 1,
-+after which any network connections are closed.
-+If there are no errors before
-+.Xr login
-+is invoked, a null byte is returned as in indication of success.
-+.Bl -tag -width Ds
-+.It Sy Try again.
-+A
-+.Xr fork
-+by the server failed.
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr login 1 ,
-+.Xr ruserok 3 ,
-+.Xr rshd 8
-+.Sh BUGS
-+The authentication procedure used here assumes the integrity
-+of each client machine and the connecting medium.  This is
-+insecure, but is useful in an ``open'' environment.
-+.Pp
-+A facility to allow all data exchanges to be encrypted should be
-+present.
-+.Pp
-+A more extensible protocol should be used.
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-diff --git a/src/rsh.1 b/src/rsh.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..dd9c6bc
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/rsh.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,183 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"	@(#)rsh.1	8.2 (Berkeley) 4/29/95
-+.\"
-+.Dd April 29, 1995
-+.Dt RSH 1
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm rsh
-+.Nd remote shell
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm rsh
-+.Op Fl Kdnx
-+.Op Fl k Ar realm
-+.Op Fl l Ar username
-+.Ar host
-+.Nm rsh
-+.Op Fl Kdnx
-+.Op Fl k Ar realm
-+.Ar username@host
-+.Op command
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Rsh
-+executes
-+.Ar command
-+on
-+.Ar host  .
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Rsh
-+copies its standard input to the remote command, the standard
-+output of the remote command to its standard output, and the
-+standard error of the remote command to its standard error.
-+Interrupt, quit and terminate signals are propagated to the remote
-+command;
-+.Nm rsh
-+normally terminates when the remote command does.
-+The options are as follows:
-+.Bl -tag -width flag
-+.It Fl K
-+The
-+.Fl K
-+option turns off all Kerberos authentication.
-+.It Fl d
-+The
-+.Fl d
-+option turns on socket debugging (using
-+.Xr setsockopt  2  )
-+on the
-+.Tn TCP
-+sockets used for communication with the remote host.
-+.It Fl k
-+The
-+.Fl k
-+option causes
-+.Nm rsh
-+to obtain tickets for the remote host in
-+.Ar realm
-+instead of the remote host's realm as determined by
-+.Xr krb_realmofhost  3  .
-+.It Fl l
-+By default, the remote username is the same as the local username.
-+The
-+.Fl l
-+option or the
-+.Pa username@host
-+format allow the remote name to be specified.
-+Kerberos authentication is used, and authorization is determined
-+as in
-+.Xr rlogin  1  .
-+.It Fl n
-+The
-+.Fl n
-+option redirects input from the special device
-+.Pa /dev/null
-+(see the
-+.Sx BUGS
-+section of this manual page).
-+.It Fl x
-+The
-+.Fl x
-+option turns on
-+.Tn DES
-+encryption for all data exchange.
-+This may introduce a significant delay in response time.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+If no
-+.Ar command
-+is specified, you will be logged in on the remote host using
-+.Xr rlogin  1  .
-+.Pp
-+Shell metacharacters which are not quoted are interpreted on local machine,
-+while quoted metacharacters are interpreted on the remote machine.
-+For example, the command
-+.Pp
-+.Dl rsh otherhost cat remotefile >> localfile
-+.Pp
-+appends the remote file
-+.Ar remotefile
-+to the local file
-+.Ar localfile ,
-+while
-+.Pp
-+.Dl rsh otherhost cat remotefile \&">>\&" other_remotefile
-+.Pp
-+appends
-+.Ar remotefile
-+to
-+.Ar other_remotefile .
-+.\" .Pp
-+.\" Many sites specify a large number of host names as commands in the
-+.\" directory /usr/hosts.
-+.\" If this directory is included in your search path, you can use the
-+.\" shorthand ``host command'' for the longer form ``rsh host command''.
-+.Sh FILES
-+.Bl -tag -width /etc/hosts -compact
-+.It Pa /etc/hosts
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr rlogin 1 ,
-+.Xr kerberos 3 ,
-+.Xr krb_sendauth 3 ,
-+.Xr krb_realmofhost 3
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm rsh
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-+.Sh BUGS
-+If you are using
-+.Xr csh  1
-+and put a
-+.Nm rsh
-+in the background without redirecting its input away from the terminal,
-+it will block even if no reads are posted by the remote command.
-+If no input is desired you should redirect the input of
-+.Nm rsh
-+to
-+.Pa /dev/null
-+using the
-+.Fl n
-+option.
-+.Pp
-+You cannot run an interactive command
-+(like
-+.Xr rogue  6
-+or
-+.Xr vi  1  )
-+using
-+.Nm rsh  ;
-+use
-+.Xr rlogin  1
-+instead.
-+.Pp
-+Stop signals stop the local
-+.Nm rsh
-+process only; this is arguably wrong, but currently hard to fix for reasons
-+too complicated to explain here.
-diff --git a/src/rshd.8 b/src/rshd.8
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..a252e40
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/rshd.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1989, 1991, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)rshd.8	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 4, 1993
-+.Dt RSHD 8
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm rshd
-+.Nd remote shell server
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm rshd
-+.Op Fl alnL
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+The
-+.Nm rshd
-+server
-+is the server for the
-+.Xr rcmd 3
-+routine and, consequently, for the
-+.Xr rsh 1
-+program.  The server provides remote execution facilities
-+with authentication based on privileged port numbers from trusted hosts.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Nm rshd
-+server
-+listens for service requests at the port indicated in
-+the ``cmd'' service specification; see
-+.Xr services 5 .
-+When a service request is received the following protocol
-+is initiated:
-+.Bl -enum
-+.It
-+The server checks the client's source port.
-+If the port is not in the range 512-1023, the server
-+aborts the connection.
-+.It
-+The server reads characters from the socket up
-+to a null (`\e0') byte.  The resultant string is
-+interpreted as an
-+.Tn ASCII
-+number, base 10.
-+.It
-+If the number received in step 2 is non-zero,
-+it is interpreted as the port number of a secondary
-+stream to be used for the
-+.Em stderr .
-+A second connection is then created to the specified
-+port on the client's machine.  The source port of this
-+second connection is also in the range 512-1023.
-+.It
-+The server checks the client's source address
-+and requests the corresponding host name (see
-+.Xr gethostbyaddr 3 ,
-+.Xr hosts 5
-+and
-+.Xr named 8 ) .
-+If the hostname cannot be determined,
-+the dot-notation representation of the host address is used.
-+If the hostname is in the same domain as the server (according to
-+the last two components of the domain name),
-+or if the
-+.Fl a
-+option is given,
-+the addresses for the hostname are requested,
-+verifying that the name and address correspond.
-+If address verification fails, the connection is aborted
-+with the message, ``Host address mismatch.''
-+.It
-+A null terminated user name of at most 16 characters
-+is retrieved on the initial socket.  This user name
-+is interpreted as the user identity on the
-+.Em client Ns 's
-+machine.
-+.It
-+A null terminated user name of at most 16 characters
-+is retrieved on the initial socket.  This user name
-+is interpreted as a user identity to use on the
-+.Sy server Ns 's
-+machine.
-+.It
-+A null terminated command to be passed to a
-+shell is retrieved on the initial socket.  The length of
-+the command is limited by the upper bound on the size of
-+the system's argument list.
-+.It
-+.Nm Rshd
-+then validates the user using
-+.Xr ruserok 3 ,
-+which uses the file
-+.Pa /etc/hosts.equiv
-+and the
-+.Pa .rhosts
-+file found in the user's home directory.  The
-+.Fl l
-+option prevents
-+.Xr ruserok 3
-+from doing any validation based on the user's ``.rhosts'' file,
-+unless the user is the superuser.
-+.It
-+If the file
-+.Pa /etc/nologin
-+exists and the user is not the superuser,
-+the connection is closed.
-+.It
-+A null byte is returned on the initial socket
-+and the command line is passed to the normal login
-+shell of the user.  The
-+shell inherits the network connections established
-+by
-+.Nm rshd .
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+Transport-level keepalive messages are enabled unless the
-+.Fl n
-+option is present.
-+The use of keepalive messages allows sessions to be timed out
-+if the client crashes or becomes unreachable.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Fl L
-+option causes all successful accesses to be logged to
-+.Xr syslogd 8
-+as
-+.Li auth.info
-+messages.
-+.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-+Except for the last one listed below,
-+all diagnostic messages
-+are returned on the initial socket,
-+after which any network connections are closed.
-+An error is indicated by a leading byte with a value of
-+1 (0 is returned in step 10 above upon successful completion
-+of all the steps prior to the execution of the login shell).
-+.Bl -tag -width indent
-+.It Sy Locuser too long.
-+The name of the user on the client's machine is
-+longer than 16 characters.
-+.It Sy Ruser too long.
-+The name of the user on the remote machine is
-+longer than 16 characters.
-+.It Sy Command too long  .
-+The command line passed exceeds the size of the argument
-+list (as configured into the system).
-+.It Sy Login incorrect.
-+No password file entry for the user name existed.
-+.It Sy Remote directory.
-+The
-+.Xr chdir
-+command to the home directory failed.
-+.It Sy Permission denied.
-+The authentication procedure described above failed.
-+.It Sy Can't make pipe.
-+The pipe needed for the
-+.Em stderr ,
-+wasn't created.
-+.It Sy Can't fork; try again.
-+A
-+.Xr fork
-+by the server failed.
-+.It Sy <shellname>: ...
-+The user's login shell could not be started.  This message is returned
-+on the connection associated with the
-+.Em stderr ,
-+and is not preceded by a flag byte.
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr rsh 1 ,
-+.Xr rcmd 3 ,
-+.Xr ruserok 3
-+.Sh BUGS
-+The authentication procedure used here assumes the integrity
-+of each client machine and the connecting medium.  This is
-+insecure, but is useful in an ``open'' environment.
-+.Pp
-+A facility to allow all data exchanges to be encrypted should be
-+present.
-+.Pp
-+A more extensible protocol (such as Telnet) should be used.
-diff --git a/src/syslog.conf.5 b/src/syslog.conf.5
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..81d67e1
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/syslog.conf.5
-@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)syslog.conf.5	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/9/93
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 9, 1993
-+.Dt SYSLOG.CONF 5
-+.Os
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm syslog.conf
-+.Nd
-+.Xr syslogd 8
-+configuration file
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+The
-+.Nm syslog.conf
-+file is the configuration file for the
-+.Xr syslogd 8
-+program.
-+It consists of lines with two fields: the
-+.Em selector
-+field which specifies the types of messages and priorities to which the
-+line applies, and an
-+.Em action
-+field which specifies the action to be taken if a message
-+.Xr syslogd
-+receives matches the selection criteria.
-+The
-+.Em selector
-+field is separated from the
-+.Em action
-+field by one or more tab or space characters. A rule can be splitted in
-+several lines if all lines except the last are terminated with a backslash
-+(``\'').
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em Selectors
-+function
-+are encoded as a
-+.Em facility ,
-+a period (``.''), and a
-+.Em level ,
-+with no intervening white-space.
-+Both the
-+.Em facility
-+and the
-+.Em level
-+are case insensitive.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em facility
-+describes the part of the system generating the message, and is one of
-+the following keywords: auth, authpriv, cron, daemon, kern, lpr, mail,
-+mark, news, syslog, user, uucp and local0 through local7.
-+These keywords (with the exception of mark) correspond to the
-+similar
-+.Dq Dv LOG_
-+values specified to the
-+.Xr openlog 3
-+and
-+.Xr syslog 3
-+library routines.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em level
-+describes the severity of the message, and is a keyword from the
-+following ordered list (higher to lower): emerg, alert, crit, err,
-+warning, notice and debug.
-+These keywords correspond to the
-+similar
-+.Pq Dv LOG_
-+values specified to the
-+.Xr syslog
-+library routine.
-+.Pp
-+See
-+.Xr syslog 3
-+for a further descriptions of both the
-+.Em facility
-+and
-+.Em level
-+keywords and their significance.
-+.Pp
-+If a received message matches the specified
-+.Em facility
-+and is of the specified
-+.Em level
-+.Em (or a higher level) ,
-+the action specified in the
-+.Em action
-+field will be taken.
-+.Pp
-+Multiple
-+.Em selectors
-+may be specified for a single
-+.Em action
-+by separating them with semicolon (``;'') characters.
-+It is important to note, however, that each
-+.Em selector
-+can modify the ones preceding it.
-+.Pp
-+Multiple
-+.Em facilities
-+may be specified for a single
-+.Em level
-+by separating them with comma (``,'') characters.
-+.Pp
-+An asterisk (``*'') can be used to specify all
-+.Em facilities
-+or all
-+.Em levels .
-+.Pp
-+By default, a
-+.Em level
-+applies to all messages with the same or higher
-+.Em level .
-+The equal (``='') character can be prepended to a
-+.Em level
-+to restrict this line of the configuration file to messages
-+with the very same
-+.Em level .
-+.Pp
-+An exclamation mark (``!'') prepended to a
-+.Em level
-+or the asterisk means that this line of the configuration file does
-+.Em not
-+apply to the specified level (and higher ones). In conjunction with
-+the equal sign, you can exclude single
-+.Em levels
-+as well.
-+.Pp
-+The special
-+.Em facility
-+``mark'' receives a message at priority ``info'' every 20 minutes
-+(see
-+.Xr syslogd 8 ) .
-+This is not enabled by a
-+.Em facility
-+field containing an asterisk.
-+.Pp
-+The special
-+.Em level
-+``none'' disables a particular
-+.Em facility .
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Em action
-+field of each line specifies the action to be taken when the
-+.Em selector
-+field selects a message.
-+There are five forms:
-+.Bl -bullet
-+.It
-+A pathname (beginning with a leading slash).
-+Selected messages are appended to the file.
-+.Pp
-+You may prepend a minus (``-'') to the path to omit syncing the file
-+after each message log. This can cause data loss at system crashes, but
-+increases performance for programs which use logging extensively.
-+.It
-+A named pipe (fifo), beginning with a vertical bar (``|'') followed
-+by a pathname. The pipe must be created with
-+.Xr mkfifo 8
-+before syslogd reads its configuration file.
-+This feature is especially useful fo debugging.
-+.It
-+A hostname (preceded by an at (``@'') sign).
-+Selected messages are forwarded to the
-+.Xr syslogd
-+program on the named host.
-+.It
-+A comma separated list of users.
-+Selected messages are written to those users
-+if they are logged in.
-+.It
-+An asterisk.
-+Selected messages are written to all logged-in users.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+Blank lines and lines whose first non-blank character is a hash (``#'')
-+character are ignored.
-+.Sh EXAMPLES
-+.Pp
-+A configuration file might appear as follows:
-+.Bd -literal
-+# Log all kernel messages, authentication messages of
-+# level notice or higher and anything of level err or
-+# higher to the console.
-+# Don't log private authentication messages!
-+*.err;kern.*;auth.notice;authpriv.none	/dev/console
-+
-+# Log anything (except mail) of level info or higher.
-+# Don't log private authentication messages!
-+*.info;mail.none;authpriv.none		/var/log/messages
-+
-+# The authpriv file has restricted access.
-+authpriv.*						/var/log/secure
-+
-+# Log all the mail messages in one place.
-+mail.*							/var/log/maillog
-+
-+# Everybody gets emergency messages, plus log them on another
-+# machine.
-+*.emerg							*
-+*.emerg							@arpa.berkeley.edu
-+
-+# Root and Eric get alert and higher messages.
-+*.alert							root,eric
-+
-+# Save mail and news errors of level err and higher in a
-+# special file.
-+uucp,news.crit						/var/log/spoolerr
-+.Ed
-+.Sh FILES
-+.Bl -tag -width /etc/syslog.conf -compact
-+.It Pa /etc/syslog.conf
-+The
-+.Xr syslogd 8
-+configuration file.
-+.El
-+.Sh BUGS
-+The effects of multiple selectors are sometimes not intuitive.
-+For example ``mail.crit,*.err'' will select ``mail'' facility messages at
-+the level of ``err'' or higher, not at the level of ``crit'' or higher.
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr syslog 3 ,
-+.Xr syslogd 8
-diff --git a/src/syslogd.8 b/src/syslogd.8
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..a1e064e
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/syslogd.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1991, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)syslogd.8	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/6/93
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 6, 1993
-+.Dt SYSLOGD 8
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm syslogd
-+.Nd log systems messages
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm syslogd
-+.Op Fl V
-+.Op Fl a Ar socket
-+.Op Fl d
-+.Op Fl f Ar config_file
-+.Op Fl h
-+.Op Fl l Ar host_list
-+.Op Fl m Ar mark_interval
-+.Op Fl n
-+.Op Fl p Ar log_socket
-+.Op Fl r
-+.Op Fl s Ar domain_list
-+.Op Fl -no-klog
-+.Op Fl -no-unixaf
-+.Op Fl -no-forward
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Syslogd
-+reads and logs messages to the system console, log files, other
-+machines and/or users as specified by its configuration file.
-+The options are as follows:
-+.Bl -tag -width Ds
-+.It Fl V
-+Print version number and exit.
-+.It Fl -help
-+Display help information and exit.
-+.It Fl d
-+Enter debug mode. syslogd does not put itself in the background, does
-+not fork and shows debug information.
-+.It Fl a
-+Specify additional sockets from that syslogd has to listen to.
-+This is needed if you are going to let some daemon run within
-+a chroot()'ed environment. You can specify up to 19 additional
-+sockets.
-+.It \fB-f\fR, \fB--rcfile\fR=\fIFILE\fP
-+Specify the pathname of an alternate configuration file;
-+the default is system specific and displayed in the help output.
-+.It \fB-h\fR, \fB--hop\fR
-+Enable forwarding remote messages. By default syslogd will not
-+forward messages it receives from remote hosts.
-+.It Fl l
-+A colon-seperated lists of hosts which should be considered local;
-+they are logged by their hostnames instead by their FQDN.
-+.It \fB-m\fR, \fB--mark\fR=\fIINTERVAL/fP
-+Select the number of minutes between ``mark'' messages;
-+the default is 20 minutes. Setting it to 0 disables timestamps.
-+.It \fB-n\fR, \fB--no-detach\fR
-+Suppress backgrounding and detachment of the daemon from its
-+controlling terminal.
-+.It \fB-p\fR, \fB--socket\fR=\fIPATH\fP
-+Specify the pathname of an alternate log socket.
-+The default is systemspecific and displayed in the help output.
-+.It \fB-r\fR, \fB--inet\fR
-+Enable to receive remote messages using an internet domain socket.
-+The default is to not receive any messages from the network. Older
-+version always accepted remote messages.
-+.It Fl s
-+A colon-seperated list of domainnames which should be stripped from
-+the FQDNs of hosts when logging.
-+.It Fl -no-klog
-+Do not listen to the kernel log device. This is only supported on
-+systems which define a kernel log device, on all others this is already
-+the default, and the option will be silently ignored.
-+.It Fl -no-unixaf
-+Do not listen to any unix domain socket. This option overrides \-p and \-a.
-+.It Fl -no-forward
-+Do not forward any messages. This overrides \-h.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Syslogd
-+reads its configuration file when it starts up and whenever it
-+receives a hangup signal.
-+For information on the format of the configuration file,
-+see
-+.Xr syslog.conf 5 .
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Syslogd
-+reads messages from the
-+.Tn UNIX
-+domain socket
-+.Pa /dev/log ,
-+from an Internet domain socket specified in
-+.Pa /etc/services ,
-+and from the special device
-+.Pa /dev/klog
-+(to read kernel messages).
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Syslogd
-+creates the file
-+.Pa /var/run/syslog.pid ,
-+and stores its process
-+id there.
-+This can be used to kill or reconfigure
-+.Nm syslogd .
-+.Pp
-+The message sent to
-+.Nm syslogd
-+should consist of a single line.
-+The message can contain a priority code, which should be a preceding
-+decimal number in angle braces, for example,
-+.Sq Aq 5.
-+This priority code should map into the priorities defined in the
-+include file
-+.Aq Pa sys/syslog.h .
-+.Sh FILES
-+.Bl -tag -width /var/run/syslog.pid -compact
-+.It Pa /etc/syslog.conf
-+The configuration file.
-+.It Pa /var/run/syslog.pid
-+The process id of current
-+.Nm syslogd .
-+.It Pa /dev/log
-+Name of the
-+.Tn UNIX
-+domain datagram log socket.
-+.It Pa /dev/klog
-+The kernel log device.
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr logger 1 ,
-+.Xr syslog 3 ,
-+.Xr services 5 ,
-+.Xr syslog.conf 5
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.3 .
-diff --git a/src/tftp.1 b/src/tftp.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..e47a78e
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/tftp.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993, 1994
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)tftp.1	8.2 (Berkeley) 4/18/94
-+.\"
-+.Dd April 18, 1994
-+.Dt TFTP 1
-+.Os BSD 4.3
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm tftp
-+.Nd trivial file transfer program
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm tftp
-+.Op Ar host
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Tftp
-+is the user interface to the Internet
-+.Tn TFTP
-+(Trivial File Transfer Protocol),
-+which allows users to transfer files to and from a remote machine.
-+The remote
-+.Ar host
-+may be specified on the command line, in which case
-+.Nm tftp
-+uses
-+.Ar host
-+as the default host for future transfers (see the
-+.Cm connect
-+command below).
-+.Sh COMMANDS
-+Once
-+.Nm tftp
-+is running, it issues the prompt
-+.LI tftp>
-+and recognizes the following commands:
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -tag -width verbose -compact
-+.It Cm \&? Ar command-name ...
-+Print help information.
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm ascii
-+Shorthand for "mode ascii"
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm binary
-+Shorthand for "mode binary"
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm connect Ar host-name Op Ar port
-+Set the
-+.Ar host
-+(and optionally
-+.Ar port )
-+for transfers.
-+Note that the
-+.Tn TFTP
-+protocol, unlike the
-+.Tn FTP
-+protocol,
-+does not maintain connections between transfers; thus, the
-+.Cm connect
-+command does not actually create a connection,
-+but merely remembers what host is to be used for transfers.
-+You do not have to use the
-+.Cm connect
-+command; the remote host can be specified as part of the
-+.Cm get
-+or
-+.Cm put
-+commands.
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm get Ar filename
-+.It Cm get Ar remotename localname
-+.It Cm get Ar file1 file2 ...  fileN
-+Get a file or set of files from the specified
-+.Ar sources .
-+.Ar Source
-+can be in one of two forms:
-+a filename on the remote host, if the host has already been specified,
-+or a string of the form
-+.Ar hosts:filename
-+to specify both a host and filename at the same time.
-+If the latter form is used,
-+the last hostname specified becomes the default for future transfers.
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm mode Ar transfer-mode
-+Set the mode for transfers;
-+.Ar transfer-mode
-+may be one of
-+.Em ascii
-+or
-+.Em binary .
-+The default is
-+.Em ascii .
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm put Ar file
-+.It Cm put Ar localfile remotefile
-+.It Cm put Ar file1 file2 ... fileN remote-directory
-+Put a file or set of files to the specified
-+remote file or directory.
-+The destination
-+can be in one of two forms:
-+a filename on the remote host, if the host has already been specified,
-+or a string of the form
-+.Ar hosts:filename
-+to specify both a host and filename at the same time.
-+If the latter form is used,
-+the hostname specified becomes the default for future transfers.
-+If the remote-directory form is used, the remote host is
-+assumed to be a
-+.Tn UNIX
-+machine.
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm quit
-+Exit
-+.Nm tftp .
-+An end of file also exits.
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm rexmt Ar retransmission-timeout
-+Set the per-packet retransmission timeout, in seconds.
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm status
-+Show current status.
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm timeout Ar total-transmission-timeout
-+Set the total transmission timeout, in seconds.
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm trace
-+Toggle packet tracing.
-+.Pp
-+.It Cm verbose
-+Toggle verbose mode.
-+.El
-+.Sh BUGS
-+.Pp
-+Because there is no user-login or validation within
-+the
-+.Tn TFTP
-+protocol, the remote site will probably have some
-+sort of file-access restrictions in place.  The
-+exact methods are specific to each site and therefore
-+difficult to document here.
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.3 .
-diff --git a/src/tftpd.8 b/src/tftpd.8
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..ac6a59a
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/src/tftpd.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"	@(#)tftpd.8	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/4/93
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 4, 1993
-+.Dt TFTPD 8
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm tftpd
-+.Nd
-+Internet Trivial File Transfer Protocol server
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm tftpd
-+.Op Fl l
-+.Op Fl n
-+.Op Ar directory ...
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Tftpd
-+is a server which supports the
-+Internet Trivial File Transfer
-+Protocol (\c
-+.Tn RFC 783).
-+The
-+.Tn TFTP
-+server operates
-+at the port indicated in the
-+.Ql tftp
-+service description;
-+see
-+.Xr services 5 .
-+The server is normally started by
-+.Xr inetd 8 .
-+.Pp
-+The use of
-+.Xr tftp 1
-+does not require an account or password on the remote system.
-+Due to the lack of authentication information,
-+.Nm tftpd
-+will allow only publicly readable files to be
-+accessed.
-+Files containing the string ``/\|\fB.\|.\fP\|/'' are not allowed.
-+Files may be written only if they already exist and are publicly writable.
-+Note that this extends the concept of
-+.Dq public
-+to include
-+all users on all hosts that can be reached through the network;
-+this may not be appropriate on all systems, and its implications
-+should be considered before enabling tftp service.
-+The server should have the user ID with the lowest possible privilege.
-+.Pp
-+Access to files may be restricted by invoking
-+.Nm tftpd
-+with a list of directories by including up to 20 pathnames
-+as server program arguments in
-+.Pa /etc/inetd.conf .
-+In this case access is restricted to files whose
-+names are prefixed by the one of the given directories.
-+The given directories are also treated as a search path for
-+relative filename requests.
-+.Pp
-+The options are:
-+.Bl -tag -width Ds
-+.It Fl l
-+Logs all requests using
-+.Xr syslog 3 .
-+.It Fl n
-+Suppresses negative acknowledgement of requests for nonexistent
-+relative filenames.
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr tftp 1 ,
-+.Xr inetd 8
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-diff --git a/talk/Makefile.am b/talk/Makefile.am
-index c618238..4029c5e 100644
---- a/talk/Makefile.am
-+++ b/talk/Makefile.am
-@@ -25,6 +25,12 @@ talk_SOURCES = ctl.c ctl_transact.c display.c get_addrs.c get_names.c init_disp.
- 
- noinst_HEADERS = talk.h talk_ctl.h
- 
-+if ENABLE_talk
-+man_MANS = talk.1
-+endif
-+
-+EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
-+
- INCLUDES = -I$(top_srcdir)/lib -I../lib -I$(top_srcdir)/libinetutils $(NCURSES_INCLUDE)
- 
- LDADD = $(LIBCURSES) -L../libinetutils -linetutils ../lib/libgnu.a
-diff --git a/talk/talk.1 b/talk/talk.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..e636667
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/talk/talk.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)talk.1	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/6/93
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 6, 1993
-+.Dt TALK 1
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm talk
-+.Nd talk to another user
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm talk
-+.Ar person
-+.Op Ar ttyname
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Talk
-+is a visual communication program which copies lines from your
-+terminal to that of another user.
-+.Pp
-+Options available:
-+.Bl -tag -width ttyname
-+.It Ar person
-+If you wish to talk to someone on your own machine, then
-+.Ar person
-+is just the person's login name.  If you wish to talk to a user on
-+another host, then
-+.Ar person
-+is of the form
-+.Ql user@host .
-+.It Ar ttyname
-+If you wish to talk to a user who is logged in more than once, the
-+.Ar ttyname
-+argument may be used to indicate the appropriate terminal
-+name, where
-+.Ar ttyname
-+is of the form
-+.Ql ttyXX .
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+When first called,
-+.Nm talk
-+sends the message
-+.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
-+Message from TalkDaemon@his_machine...
-+talk: connection requested by your_name@your_machine.
-+talk: respond with: talk your_name@your_machine
-+.Ed
-+.Pp
-+to the user you wish to talk to. At this point, the recipient
-+of the message should reply by typing
-+.Pp
-+.Dl talk \ your_name@your_machine
-+.Pp
-+It doesn't matter from which machine the recipient replies, as
-+long as his login-name is the same.  Once communication is established,
-+the two parties may type simultaneously, with their output appearing
-+in separate windows.  Typing control-L
-+.Ql ^L
-+will cause the screen to
-+be reprinted, while your erase, kill, and word kill characters will
-+behave normally.  To exit, just type your interrupt character;
-+.Nm talk
-+then moves the cursor to the bottom of the screen and restores the
-+terminal to its previous state.
-+.Pp
-+Permission to talk may be denied or granted by use of the
-+.Xr mesg 1
-+command.  At the outset talking is allowed.  Certain commands, in
-+particular
-+.Xr nroff 1
-+and
-+.Xr pr 1 ,
-+disallow messages in order to
-+prevent messy output.
-+.Pp
-+.Sh FILES
-+.Bl -tag -width /var/run/utmp -compact
-+.It Pa /etc/hosts
-+to find the recipient's machine
-+.It Pa /var/run/utmp
-+to find the recipient's tty
-+.El
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr mail 1 ,
-+.Xr mesg 1 ,
-+.Xr who 1 ,
-+.Xr write 1
-+.Sh BUGS
-+The version of
-+.Xr talk 1
-+released with
-+.Bx 4.3
-+uses a protocol that
-+is incompatible with the protocol used in the version released with
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-diff --git a/talkd/Makefile.am b/talkd/Makefile.am
-index eea1429..c66be17 100644
---- a/talkd/Makefile.am
-+++ b/talkd/Makefile.am
-@@ -32,6 +32,12 @@ talkd_SOURCES = \
-  talkd.c\
-  intalkd.h
- 
-+if ENABLE_talkd
-+man_MANS = talkd.8
-+endif
-+
-+EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
-+
- @PATHDEFS_MAKE@
- 
- AM_CPPFLAGS = $(PATHDEF_DEV) 
-diff --git a/talkd/talkd.8 b/talkd/talkd.8
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..8169176
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/talkd/talkd.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"     @(#)talkd.8	8.2 (Berkeley) 12/11/93
-+.\"
-+.Dd December 11, 1993
-+.Dt TALKD 8
-+.Os BSD 4.3
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm talkd
-+.Nd remote user communication server
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm talkd
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+.Nm Talkd
-+is the server that notifies a user that someone else wants to
-+initiate a conversation.
-+It acts as a repository of invitations, responding to requests
-+by clients wishing to rendezvous to hold a conversation.
-+In normal operation, a client, the caller,
-+initiates a rendezvous by sending a
-+.Tn CTL_MSG
-+to the server of
-+type
-+.Tn LOOK_UP
-+(see
-+.Aq Pa protocols/talkd.h ) .
-+This causes the server to search its invitation
-+tables to check if an invitation currently exists for the caller
-+(to speak to the callee specified in the message).
-+If the lookup fails,
-+the caller then sends an
-+.Tn ANNOUNCE
-+message causing the server to
-+broadcast an announcement on the callee's login ports requesting contact.
-+When the callee responds, the local server uses the
-+recorded invitation to respond with the appropriate rendezvous
-+address and the caller and callee client programs establish a
-+stream connection through which the conversation takes place.
-+.Sh SEE ALSO
-+.Xr talk 1 ,
-+.Xr write 1
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.3 .
-diff --git a/telnet/Makefile.am b/telnet/Makefile.am
-index 1ea413c..f225804 100644
---- a/telnet/Makefile.am
-+++ b/telnet/Makefile.am
-@@ -26,6 +26,12 @@ telnet_SOURCES = authenc.c commands.c main.c network.c ring.c sys_bsd.c \
- 
- noinst_HEADERS = defines.h externs.h general.h ring.h types.h
- 
-+if ENABLE_telnet
-+man_MANS = telnet.1
-+endif
-+
-+EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
-+
- INCLUDES = -I$(top_srcdir) -I$(top_srcdir)/lib -I../lib -I$(top_srcdir)/libinetutils
- AM_CPPFLAGS=-DTERMCAP -DLINEMODE -DKLUDGELINEMODE -DENV_HACK
- 
-diff --git a/telnet/telnet.1 b/telnet/telnet.1
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..48366e5
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/telnet/telnet.1
-@@ -0,0 +1,1362 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"	@(#)telnet.1	8.6 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 1, 1994
-+.Dt TELNET 1
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm telnet
-+.Nd user interface to the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+protocol
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm telnet
-+.Op Fl 8EFKLacdfrx
-+.Op Fl S Ar tos
-+.Op Fl X Ar authtype
-+.Op Fl e Ar escapechar
-+.Op Fl k Ar realm
-+.Op Fl l Ar user
-+.Op Fl n Ar tracefile
-+.Oo
-+.Ar host
-+.Op port
-+.Oc
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+The
-+.Nm telnet
-+command
-+is used to communicate with another host using the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+protocol.
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is invoked without the
-+.Ar host
-+argument, it enters command mode,
-+indicated by its prompt
-+.Pq Nm telnet\&> .
-+In this mode, it accepts and executes the commands listed below.
-+If it is invoked with arguments, it performs an
-+.Ic open
-+command with those arguments.
-+.Pp
-+Options:
-+.Bl -tag -width indent
-+.It Fl 8
-+Specifies an 8-bit data path.  This causes an attempt to
-+negotiate the
-+.Dv TELNET BINARY
-+option on both input and output.
-+.It Fl E
-+Stops any character from being recognized as an escape character.
-+.It Fl F
-+If Kerberos V5 authentication is being used, the
-+.Fl F
-+option allows the local credentials to be forwarded
-+to the remote system, including any credentials that
-+have already been forwarded into the local environment.
-+.It Fl K
-+Specifies no automatic login to the remote system.
-+.It Fl L
-+Specifies an 8-bit data path on output.  This causes the
-+BINARY option to be negotiated on output.
-+.It Fl S Ar tos
-+Sets the IP type-of-service (TOS) option for the telnet
-+connection to the value
-+.Ar tos,
-+which can be a numeric TOS value
-+or, on systems that support it, a symbolic
-+TOS name found in the /etc/iptos file.
-+.It Fl X Ar atype
-+Disables the
-+.Ar atype
-+type of authentication.
-+.It Fl a
-+Attempt automatic login.
-+Currently, this sends the user name via the
-+.Ev USER
-+variable
-+of the
-+.Ev ENVIRON
-+option if supported by the remote system.
-+The name used is that of the current user as returned by
-+.Xr getlogin 2
-+if it agrees with the current user ID,
-+otherwise it is the name associated with the user ID.
-+.It Fl c
-+Disables the reading of the user's
-+.Pa \&.telnetrc
-+file.  (See the
-+.Ic toggle skiprc
-+command on this man page.)
-+.It Fl d
-+Sets the initial value of the
-+.Ic debug
-+toggle to
-+.Dv TRUE
-+.It Fl e Ar escape char
-+Sets the initial
-+.Nm
-+.Nm telnet
-+escape character to
-+.Ar escape char.
-+If
-+.Ar escape char
-+is omitted, then
-+there will be no escape character.
-+.It Fl f
-+If Kerberos V5 authentication is being used, the
-+.Fl f
-+option allows the local credentials to be forwarded to the remote system.
-+.ne 1i
-+.It Fl k Ar realm
-+If Kerberos authentication is being used, the
-+.Fl k
-+option requests that telnet obtain tickets for the remote host in
-+realm realm instead of the remote host's realm, as determined
-+by
-+.Xr krb_realmofhost 3 .
-+.It Fl l Ar user
-+When connecting to the remote system, if the remote system
-+understands the
-+.Ev ENVIRON
-+option, then
-+.Ar user
-+will be sent to the remote system as the value for the variable USER.
-+This option implies the
-+.Fl a
-+option.
-+This option may also be used with the
-+.Ic open
-+command.
-+.It Fl n Ar tracefile
-+Opens
-+.Ar tracefile
-+for recording trace information.
-+See the
-+.Ic set tracefile
-+command below.
-+.It Fl r
-+Specifies a user interface similar to
-+.Xr rlogin 1 .
-+In this
-+mode, the escape character is set to the tilde (~) character,
-+unless modified by the -e option.
-+.It Fl x
-+Turns on encryption of the data stream if possible.  This
-+option is not available outside of the United States and
-+Canada.
-+.It Ar host
-+Indicates the official name, an alias, or the Internet address
-+of a remote host.
-+.It Ar port
-+Indicates a port number (address of an application).  If a number is
-+not specified, the default
-+.Nm telnet
-+port is used.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+When in rlogin mode, a line of the form ~.  disconnects from the
-+remote host; ~ is the telnet escape character.
-+Similarly, the line ~^Z suspends the telnet session.
-+The line ~^] escapes to the normal telnet escape prompt.
-+.Pp
-+Once a connection has been opened,
-+.Nm telnet
-+will attempt to enable the
-+.Dv TELNET LINEMODE
-+option.
-+If this fails, then
-+.Nm telnet
-+will revert to one of two input modes:
-+either \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq
-+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq
-+depending on what the remote system supports.
-+.Pp
-+When
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+is enabled, character processing is done on the
-+local system, under the control of the remote system.  When input
-+editing or character echoing is to be disabled, the remote system
-+will relay that information.  The remote system will also relay
-+changes to any special characters that happen on the remote
-+system, so that they can take effect on the local system.
-+.Pp
-+In \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq mode, most
-+text typed is immediately sent to the remote host for processing.
-+.Pp
-+In \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode, all text is echoed locally,
-+and (normally) only completed lines are sent to the remote host.
-+The \*(Lqlocal echo character\*(Rq (initially \*(Lq^E\*(Rq) may be used
-+to turn off and on the local echo
-+(this would mostly be used to enter passwords
-+without the password being echoed).
-+.Pp
-+If the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option is enabled, or if the
-+.Ic localchars
-+toggle is
-+.Dv TRUE
-+(the default for \*(Lqold line by line\*(Lq; see below),
-+the user's
-+.Ic quit  ,
-+.Ic intr ,
-+and
-+.Ic flush
-+characters are trapped locally, and sent as
-+.Tn TELNET
-+protocol sequences to the remote side.
-+If
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+has ever been enabled, then the user's
-+.Ic susp
-+and
-+.Ic eof
-+are also sent as
-+.Tn TELNET
-+protocol sequences,
-+and
-+.Ic quit
-+is sent as a
-+.Dv TELNET ABORT
-+instead of
-+.Dv BREAK
-+There are options (see
-+.Ic toggle
-+.Ic autoflush
-+and
-+.Ic toggle
-+.Ic autosynch
-+below)
-+which cause this action to flush subsequent output to the terminal
-+(until the remote host acknowledges the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+sequence) and flush previous terminal input
-+(in the case of
-+.Ic quit
-+and
-+.Ic intr  ) .
-+.Pp
-+While connected to a remote host,
-+.Nm telnet
-+command mode may be entered by typing the
-+.Nm telnet
-+\*(Lqescape character\*(Rq (initially \*(Lq^]\*(Rq).
-+When in command mode, the normal terminal editing conventions are available.
-+.Pp
-+The following
-+.Nm telnet
-+commands are available.
-+Only enough of each command to uniquely identify it need be typed
-+(this is also true for arguments to the
-+.Ic mode  ,
-+.Ic set ,
-+.Ic toggle  ,
-+.Ic unset ,
-+.Ic slc  ,
-+.Ic environ ,
-+and
-+.Ic display
-+commands).
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -tag -width "mode type"
-+.It Ic auth Ar argument ...
-+The auth command manipulates the information sent through the
-+.Dv TELNET AUTHENTICATE
-+option.  Valid arguments for the
-+auth command are as follows:
-+.Bl -tag -width "disable type"
-+.It Ic disable Ar type
-+Disables the specified type of authentication.  To
-+obtain a list of available types, use the
-+.Ic auth disable \&?
-+command.
-+.It Ic enable Ar type
-+Enables the specified type of authentication.  To
-+obtain a list of available types, use the
-+.Ic auth enable \&?
-+command.
-+.It Ic status
-+Lists the current status of the various types of
-+authentication.
-+.El
-+.It Ic close
-+Close a
-+.Tn TELNET
-+session and return to command mode.
-+.It Ic display Ar argument ...
-+Displays all, or some, of the
-+.Ic set
-+and
-+.Ic toggle
-+values (see below).
-+.It Ic encrypt Ar argument ...
-+The encrypt command manipulates the information sent through the
-+.Dv TELNET ENCRYPT
-+option.
-+.Pp
-+Note:  Because of export controls, the
-+.Dv TELNET ENCRYPT
-+option is not supported outside of the United States and Canada.
-+.Pp
-+Valid arguments for the encrypt command are as follows:
-+.Bl -tag -width Ar
-+.It Ic disable Ar type Ic [input|output]
-+Disables the specified type of encryption.  If you
-+omit the input and output, both input and output
-+are disabled.  To obtain a list of available
-+types, use the
-+.Ic encrypt disable \&?
-+command.
-+.It Ic enable Ar type Ic [input|output]
-+Enables the specified type of encryption.  If you
-+omit input and output, both input and output are
-+enabled.  To obtain a list of available types, use the
-+.Ic encrypt enable \&?
-+command.
-+.It Ic input
-+This is the same as the
-+.Ic encrypt start input
-+command.
-+.It Ic -input
-+This is the same as the
-+.Ic encrypt stop input
-+command.
-+.It Ic output
-+This is the same as the
-+.Ic encrypt start output
-+command.
-+.It Ic -output
-+This is the same as the
-+.Ic encrypt stop output
-+command.
-+.It Ic start Ic [input|output]
-+Attempts to start encryption.  If you omit
-+.Ic input
-+and
-+.Ic output,
-+both input and output are enabled.  To
-+obtain a list of available types, use the
-+.Ic encrypt enable \&?
-+command.
-+.It Ic status
-+Lists the current status of encryption.
-+.It Ic stop Ic [input|output]
-+Stops encryption.  If you omit input and output,
-+encryption is on both input and output.
-+.It Ic type Ar type
-+Sets the default type of encryption to be used
-+with later
-+.Ic encrypt start
-+or
-+.Ic encrypt stop
-+commands.
-+.El
-+.It Ic environ Ar arguments...
-+The
-+.Ic environ
-+command is used to manipulate the
-+the variables that my be sent through the
-+.Dv TELNET ENVIRON
-+option.
-+The initial set of variables is taken from the users
-+environment, with only the
-+.Ev DISPLAY
-+and
-+.Ev PRINTER
-+variables being exported by default.
-+The
-+.Ev USER
-+variable is also exported if the
-+.Fl a
-+or
-+.Fl l
-+options are used.
-+.br
-+Valid arguments for the
-+.Ic environ
-+command are:
-+.Bl -tag -width Fl
-+.It Ic define Ar variable value
-+Define the variable
-+.Ar variable
-+to have a value of
-+.Ar value.
-+Any variables defined by this command are automatically exported.
-+The
-+.Ar value
-+may be enclosed in single or double quotes so
-+that tabs and spaces may be included.
-+.It Ic undefine Ar variable
-+Remove
-+.Ar variable
-+from the list of environment variables.
-+.It Ic export Ar variable
-+Mark the variable
-+.Ar variable
-+to be exported to the remote side.
-+.It Ic unexport Ar variable
-+Mark the variable
-+.Ar variable
-+to not be exported unless
-+explicitly asked for by the remote side.
-+.It Ic list
-+List the current set of environment variables.
-+Those marked with a
-+.Cm *
-+will be sent automatically,
-+other variables will only be sent if explicitly requested.
-+.It Ic \&?
-+Prints out help information for the
-+.Ic environ
-+command.
-+.El
-+.It Ic logout
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET LOGOUT
-+option to the remote side.
-+This command is similar to a
-+.Ic close
-+command; however, if the remote side does not support the
-+.Dv LOGOUT
-+option, nothing happens.
-+If, however, the remote side does support the
-+.Dv LOGOUT
-+option, this command should cause the remote side to close the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+connection.
-+If the remote side also supports the concept of
-+suspending a user's session for later reattachment,
-+the logout argument indicates that you
-+should terminate the session immediately.
-+.It Ic mode Ar type
-+.Ar Type
-+is one of several options, depending on the state of the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+session.
-+The remote host is asked for permission to go into the requested mode.
-+If the remote host is capable of entering that mode, the requested
-+mode will be entered.
-+.Bl -tag -width Ar
-+.It Ic character
-+Disable the
-+.Dv TELNET LINEMODE
-+option, or, if the remote side does not understand the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option, then enter \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Lq mode.
-+.It Ic line
-+Enable the
-+.Dv TELNET LINEMODE
-+option, or, if the remote side does not understand the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option, then attempt to enter \*(Lqold-line-by-line\*(Lq mode.
-+.It Ic isig Pq Ic \-isig
-+Attempt to enable (disable) the
-+.Dv TRAPSIG
-+mode of the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option.
-+This requires that the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option be enabled.
-+.It Ic edit Pq Ic \-edit
-+Attempt to enable (disable) the
-+.Dv EDIT
-+mode of the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option.
-+This requires that the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option be enabled.
-+.It Ic softtabs Pq Ic \-softtabs
-+Attempt to enable (disable) the
-+.Dv SOFT_TAB
-+mode of the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option.
-+This requires that the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option be enabled.
-+.ne 1i
-+.It Ic litecho Pq Ic \-litecho
-+Attempt to enable (disable) the
-+.Dv LIT_ECHO
-+mode of the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option.
-+This requires that the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option be enabled.
-+.It Ic \&?
-+Prints out help information for the
-+.Ic mode
-+command.
-+.El
-+.It Xo
-+.Ic open Ar host
-+.Oo Op Fl l
-+.Ar user
-+.Oc Ns Oo Fl
-+.Ar port Oc
-+.Xc
-+Open a connection to the named host.
-+If no port number
-+is specified,
-+.Nm telnet
-+will attempt to contact a
-+.Tn TELNET
-+server at the default port.
-+The host specification may be either a host name (see
-+.Xr hosts  5  )
-+or an Internet address specified in the \*(Lqdot notation\*(Rq (see
-+.Xr inet 3 ) .
-+The
-+.Op Fl l
-+option may be used to specify the user name
-+to be passed to the remote system via the
-+.Ev ENVIRON
-+option.
-+When connecting to a non-standard port,
-+.Nm telnet
-+omits any automatic initiation of
-+.Tn TELNET
-+options.  When the port number is preceded by a minus sign,
-+the initial option negotiation is done.
-+After establishing a connection, the file
-+.Pa \&.telnetrc
-+in the
-+users home directory is opened.  Lines beginning with a # are
-+comment lines.  Blank lines are ignored.  Lines that begin
-+without white space are the start of a machine entry.  The
-+first thing on the line is the name of the machine that is
-+being connected to.  The rest of the line, and successive
-+lines that begin with white space are assumed to be
-+.Nm telnet
-+commands and are processed as if they had been typed
-+in manually to the
-+.Nm telnet
-+command prompt.
-+.It Ic quit
-+Close any open
-+.Tn TELNET
-+session and exit
-+.Nm telnet  .
-+An end of file (in command mode) will also close a session and exit.
-+.It Ic send Ar arguments
-+Sends one or more special character sequences to the remote host.
-+The following are the arguments which may be specified
-+(more than one argument may be specified at a time):
-+.Pp
-+.Bl -tag -width escape
-+.It Ic abort
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET ABORT
-+(Abort
-+processes)
-+sequence.
-+.It Ic ao
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET AO
-+(Abort Output) sequence, which should cause the remote system to flush
-+all output
-+.Em from
-+the remote system
-+.Em to
-+the user's terminal.
-+.It Ic ayt
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET AYT
-+(Are You There)
-+sequence, to which the remote system may or may not choose to respond.
-+.It Ic brk
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET BRK
-+(Break) sequence, which may have significance to the remote
-+system.
-+.It Ic ec
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET EC
-+(Erase Character)
-+sequence, which should cause the remote system to erase the last character
-+entered.
-+.It Ic el
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET EL
-+(Erase Line)
-+sequence, which should cause the remote system to erase the line currently
-+being entered.
-+.It Ic eof
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET EOF
-+(End Of File)
-+sequence.
-+.It Ic eor
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET EOR
-+(End of Record)
-+sequence.
-+.It Ic escape
-+Sends the current
-+.Nm telnet
-+escape character (initially \*(Lq^\*(Rq).
-+.It Ic ga
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET GA
-+(Go Ahead)
-+sequence, which likely has no significance to the remote system.
-+.It Ic getstatus
-+If the remote side supports the
-+.Dv TELNET STATUS
-+command,
-+.Ic getstatus
-+will send the subnegotiation to request that the server send
-+its current option status.
-+.ne 1i
-+.It Ic ip
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET IP
-+(Interrupt Process) sequence, which should cause the remote
-+system to abort the currently running process.
-+.It Ic nop
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET NOP
-+(No OPeration)
-+sequence.
-+.It Ic susp
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET SUSP
-+(SUSPend process)
-+sequence.
-+.It Ic synch
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET SYNCH
-+sequence.
-+This sequence causes the remote system to discard all previously typed
-+(but not yet read) input.
-+This sequence is sent as
-+.Tn TCP
-+urgent
-+data (and may not work if the remote system is a
-+.Bx 4.2
-+system -- if
-+it doesn't work, a lower case \*(Lqr\*(Rq may be echoed on the terminal).
-+.It Ic do Ar cmd
-+.It Ic dont Ar cmd
-+.It Ic will Ar cmd
-+.It Ic wont Ar cmd
-+Sends the
-+.Dv TELNET DO
-+.Ar cmd
-+sequence.
-+.Ar Cmd
-+can be either a decimal number between 0 and 255,
-+or a symbolic name for a specific
-+.Dv TELNET
-+command.
-+.Ar Cmd
-+can also be either
-+.Ic help
-+or
-+.Ic \&?
-+to print out help information, including
-+a list of known symbolic names.
-+.It Ic \&?
-+Prints out help information for the
-+.Ic send
-+command.
-+.El
-+.It Ic set Ar argument value
-+.It Ic unset Ar argument value
-+The
-+.Ic set
-+command will set any one of a number of
-+.Nm telnet
-+variables to a specific value or to
-+.Dv TRUE .
-+The special value
-+.Ic off
-+turns off the function associated with
-+the variable, this is equivalent to using the
-+.Ic unset
-+command.
-+The
-+.Ic unset
-+command will disable or set to
-+.Dv FALSE
-+any of the specified functions.
-+The values of variables may be interrogated with the
-+.Ic display
-+command.
-+The variables which may be set or unset, but not toggled, are
-+listed here.  In addition, any of the variables for the
-+.Ic toggle
-+command may be explicitly set or unset using
-+the
-+.Ic set
-+and
-+.Ic unset
-+commands.
-+.Bl -tag -width escape
-+.It Ic ayt
-+If
-+.Tn TELNET
-+is in localchars mode, or
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+is enabled, and the status character is typed, a
-+.Dv TELNET AYT
-+sequence (see
-+.Ic send ayt
-+preceding) is sent to the
-+remote host.  The initial value for the "Are You There"
-+character is the terminal's status character.
-+.It Ic echo
-+This is the value (initially \*(Lq^E\*(Rq) which, when in
-+\*(Lqline by line\*(Rq mode, toggles between doing local echoing
-+of entered characters (for normal processing), and suppressing
-+echoing of entered characters (for entering, say, a password).
-+.It Ic eof
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is operating in
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode, entering this character
-+as the first character on a line will cause this character to be
-+sent to the remote system.
-+The initial value of the eof character is taken to be the terminal's
-+.Ic eof
-+character.
-+.It Ic erase
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is in
-+.Ic localchars
-+mode (see
-+.Ic toggle
-+.Ic localchars
-+below),
-+.Sy and
-+if
-+.Nm telnet
-+is operating in \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq mode, then when this
-+character is typed, a
-+.Dv TELNET EC
-+sequence (see
-+.Ic send
-+.Ic ec
-+above)
-+is sent to the remote system.
-+The initial value for the erase character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic erase
-+character.
-+.It Ic escape
-+This is the
-+.Nm telnet
-+escape character (initially \*(Lq^[\*(Rq) which causes entry
-+into
-+.Nm telnet
-+command mode (when connected to a remote system).
-+.It Ic flushoutput
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is in
-+.Ic localchars
-+mode (see
-+.Ic toggle
-+.Ic localchars
-+below)
-+and the
-+.Ic flushoutput
-+character is typed, a
-+.Dv TELNET AO
-+sequence (see
-+.Ic send
-+.Ic ao
-+above)
-+is sent to the remote host.
-+The initial value for the flush character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic flush
-+character.
-+.It Ic forw1
-+.It Ic forw2
-+If
-+.Tn TELNET
-+is operating in
-+.Dv LINEMODE ,
-+these are the
-+characters that, when typed, cause partial lines to be
-+forwarded to the remote system.  The initial value for
-+the forwarding characters are taken from the terminal's
-+eol and eol2 characters.
-+.It Ic interrupt
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is in
-+.Ic localchars
-+mode (see
-+.Ic toggle
-+.Ic localchars
-+below)
-+and the
-+.Ic interrupt
-+character is typed, a
-+.Dv TELNET IP
-+sequence (see
-+.Ic send
-+.Ic ip
-+above)
-+is sent to the remote host.
-+The initial value for the interrupt character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic intr
-+character.
-+.It Ic kill
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is in
-+.Ic localchars
-+mode (see
-+.Ic toggle
-+.Ic localchars
-+below),
-+.Ic and
-+if
-+.Nm telnet
-+is operating in \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq mode, then when this
-+character is typed, a
-+.Dv TELNET EL
-+sequence (see
-+.Ic send
-+.Ic el
-+above)
-+is sent to the remote system.
-+The initial value for the kill character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic kill
-+character.
-+.It Ic lnext
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is operating in
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Lq mode, then this character is taken to
-+be the terminal's
-+.Ic lnext
-+character.
-+The initial value for the lnext character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic lnext
-+character.
-+.It Ic quit
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is in
-+.Ic localchars
-+mode (see
-+.Ic toggle
-+.Ic localchars
-+below)
-+and the
-+.Ic quit
-+character is typed, a
-+.Dv TELNET BRK
-+sequence (see
-+.Ic send
-+.Ic brk
-+above)
-+is sent to the remote host.
-+The initial value for the quit character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic quit
-+character.
-+.It Ic reprint
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is operating in
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Lq mode, then this character is taken to
-+be the terminal's
-+.Ic reprint
-+character.
-+The initial value for the reprint character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic reprint
-+character.
-+.It Ic rlogin
-+This is the rlogin escape character.
-+If set, the normal
-+.Tn TELNET
-+escape character is ignored unless it is
-+preceded by this character at the beginning of a line.
-+This character, at the beginning of a line followed by
-+a "."  closes the connection; when followed by a ^Z it
-+suspends the telnet command.  The initial state is to
-+disable the rlogin escape character.
-+.It Ic start
-+If the
-+.Dv TELNET TOGGLE-FLOW-CONTROL
-+option has been enabled,
-+then this character is taken to
-+be the terminal's
-+.Ic start
-+character.
-+The initial value for the kill character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic start
-+character.
-+.It Ic stop
-+If the
-+.Dv TELNET TOGGLE-FLOW-CONTROL
-+option has been enabled,
-+then this character is taken to
-+be the terminal's
-+.Ic stop
-+character.
-+The initial value for the kill character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic stop
-+character.
-+.It Ic susp
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is in
-+.Ic localchars
-+mode, or
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+is enabled, and the
-+.Ic suspend
-+character is typed, a
-+.Dv TELNET SUSP
-+sequence (see
-+.Ic send
-+.Ic susp
-+above)
-+is sent to the remote host.
-+The initial value for the suspend character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic suspend
-+character.
-+.ne 1i
-+.It Ic tracefile
-+This is the file to which the output, caused by
-+.Ic netdata
-+or
-+.Ic option
-+tracing being
-+.Dv TRUE ,
-+will be written.  If it is set to
-+.Dq Fl ,
-+then tracing information will be written to standard output (the default).
-+.It Ic worderase
-+If
-+.Nm telnet
-+is operating in
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+or \*(Lqold line by line\*(Lq mode, then this character is taken to
-+be the terminal's
-+.Ic worderase
-+character.
-+The initial value for the worderase character is taken to be
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic worderase
-+character.
-+.It Ic \&?
-+Displays the legal
-+.Ic set
-+.Pq Ic unset
-+commands.
-+.El
-+.It Ic slc Ar state
-+The
-+.Ic slc
-+command (Set Local Characters) is used to set
-+or change the state of the the special
-+characters when the
-+.Dv TELNET LINEMODE
-+option has
-+been enabled.  Special characters are characters that get
-+mapped to
-+.Tn TELNET
-+commands sequences (like
-+.Ic ip
-+or
-+.Ic quit  )
-+or line editing characters (like
-+.Ic erase
-+and
-+.Ic kill  ) .
-+By default, the local special characters are exported.
-+.Bl -tag -width Fl
-+.It Ic check
-+Verify the current settings for the current special characters.
-+The remote side is requested to send all the current special
-+character settings, and if there are any discrepancies with
-+the local side, the local side will switch to the remote value.
-+.It Ic export
-+Switch to the local defaults for the special characters.  The
-+local default characters are those of the local terminal at
-+the time when
-+.Nm telnet
-+was started.
-+.It Ic import
-+Switch to the remote defaults for the special characters.
-+The remote default characters are those of the remote system
-+at the time when the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+connection was established.
-+.It Ic \&?
-+Prints out help information for the
-+.Ic slc
-+command.
-+.El
-+.It Ic status
-+Show the current status of
-+.Nm telnet  .
-+This includes the peer one is connected to, as well
-+as the current mode.
-+.It Ic toggle Ar arguments ...
-+Toggle (between
-+.Dv TRUE
-+and
-+.Dv FALSE )
-+various flags that control how
-+.Nm telnet
-+responds to events.
-+These flags may be set explicitly to
-+.Dv TRUE
-+or
-+.Dv FALSE
-+using the
-+.Ic set
-+and
-+.Ic unset
-+commands listed above.
-+More than one argument may be specified.
-+The state of these flags may be interrogated with the
-+.Ic display
-+command.
-+Valid arguments are:
-+.Bl -tag -width Ar
-+.It Ic authdebug
-+Turns on debugging information for the authentication code.
-+.It Ic autoflush
-+If
-+.Ic autoflush
-+and
-+.Ic localchars
-+are both
-+.Dv TRUE ,
-+then when the
-+.Ic ao  ,
-+or
-+.Ic quit
-+characters are recognized (and transformed into
-+.Tn TELNET
-+sequences; see
-+.Ic set
-+above for details),
-+.Nm telnet
-+refuses to display any data on the user's terminal
-+until the remote system acknowledges (via a
-+.Dv TELNET TIMING MARK
-+option)
-+that it has processed those
-+.Tn TELNET
-+sequences.
-+The initial value for this toggle is
-+.Dv TRUE
-+if the terminal user had not
-+done an "stty noflsh", otherwise
-+.Dv FALSE
-+(see
-+.Xr stty  1  ) .
-+.It Ic autodecrypt
-+When the
-+.Dv TELNET ENCRYPT
-+option is negotiated, by
-+default the actual encryption (decryption) of the data
-+stream does not start automatically.  The autoencrypt
-+(autodecrypt) command states that encryption of the
-+output (input) stream should be enabled as soon as
-+possible.
-+.sp
-+.Pp
-+Note:  Because of export controls, the
-+.Dv TELNET ENCRYPT
-+option is not supported outside the United States and Canada.
-+.It Ic autologin
-+If the remote side supports the
-+.Dv TELNET AUTHENTICATION
-+option
-+.Tn TELNET
-+attempts to use it to perform automatic authentication.  If the
-+.Dv AUTHENTICATION
-+option is not supported, the user's login
-+name are propagated through the
-+.Dv TELNET ENVIRON
-+option.
-+This command is the same as specifying
-+.Ar a
-+option on the
-+.Ic open
-+command.
-+.It Ic autosynch
-+If
-+.Ic autosynch
-+and
-+.Ic localchars
-+are both
-+.Dv TRUE ,
-+then when either the
-+.Ic intr
-+or
-+.Ic quit
-+characters is typed (see
-+.Ic set
-+above for descriptions of the
-+.Ic intr
-+and
-+.Ic quit
-+characters), the resulting
-+.Tn TELNET
-+sequence sent is followed by the
-+.Dv TELNET SYNCH
-+sequence.
-+This procedure
-+.Ic should
-+cause the remote system to begin throwing away all previously
-+typed input until both of the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+sequences have been read and acted upon.
-+The initial value of this toggle is
-+.Dv FALSE .
-+.It Ic binary
-+Enable or disable the
-+.Dv TELNET BINARY
-+option on both input and output.
-+.It Ic inbinary
-+Enable or disable the
-+.Dv TELNET BINARY
-+option on input.
-+.It Ic outbinary
-+Enable or disable the
-+.Dv TELNET BINARY
-+option on output.
-+.It Ic crlf
-+If this is
-+.Dv TRUE ,
-+then carriage returns will be sent as
-+.Li <CR><LF> .
-+If this is
-+.Dv FALSE ,
-+then carriage returns will be send as
-+.Li <CR><NUL> .
-+The initial value for this toggle is
-+.Dv FALSE .
-+.It Ic crmod
-+Toggle carriage return mode.
-+When this mode is enabled, most carriage return characters received from
-+the remote host will be mapped into a carriage return followed by
-+a line feed.
-+This mode does not affect those characters typed by the user, only
-+those received from the remote host.
-+This mode is not very useful unless the remote host
-+only sends carriage return, but never line feed.
-+The initial value for this toggle is
-+.Dv FALSE .
-+.It Ic debug
-+Toggles socket level debugging (useful only to the
-+.Ic super user  ) .
-+The initial value for this toggle is
-+.Dv FALSE .
-+.It Ic encdebug
-+Turns on debugging information for the encryption code.
-+.It Ic localchars
-+If this is
-+.Dv TRUE ,
-+then the
-+.Ic flush  ,
-+.Ic interrupt ,
-+.Ic quit  ,
-+.Ic erase ,
-+and
-+.Ic kill
-+characters (see
-+.Ic set
-+above) are recognized locally, and transformed into (hopefully) appropriate
-+.Tn TELNET
-+control sequences
-+(respectively
-+.Ic ao  ,
-+.Ic ip ,
-+.Ic brk  ,
-+.Ic ec ,
-+and
-+.Ic el  ;
-+see
-+.Ic send
-+above).
-+The initial value for this toggle is
-+.Dv TRUE
-+in \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode,
-+and
-+.Dv FALSE
-+in \*(Lqcharacter at a time\*(Rq mode.
-+When the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option is enabled, the value of
-+.Ic localchars
-+is ignored, and assumed to always be
-+.Dv TRUE .
-+If
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+has ever been enabled, then
-+.Ic quit
-+is sent as
-+.Ic abort  ,
-+and
-+.Ic eof and
-+.B suspend
-+are sent as
-+.Ic eof and
-+.Ic susp ,
-+see
-+.Ic send
-+above).
-+.It Ic netdata
-+Toggles the display of all network data (in hexadecimal format).
-+The initial value for this toggle is
-+.Dv FALSE .
-+.It Ic options
-+Toggles the display of some internal
-+.Nm telnet
-+protocol processing (having to do with
-+.Tn TELNET
-+options).
-+The initial value for this toggle is
-+.Dv FALSE .
-+.ne 1i
-+.It Ic prettydump
-+When the
-+.Ic netdata
-+toggle is enabled, if
-+.Ic prettydump
-+is enabled the output from the
-+.Ic netdata
-+command will be formatted in a more user readable format.
-+Spaces are put between each character in the output, and the
-+beginning of any
-+.Tn TELNET
-+escape sequence is preceded by a '*' to aid in locating them.
-+.It Ic skiprc
-+When the skiprc toggle is
-+.Dv TRUE ,
-+.Tn TELNET
-+skips the reading of the
-+.Pa \&.telnetrc
-+file in the users home
-+directory when connections are opened.  The initial
-+value for this toggle is
-+.Dv FALSE.
-+.It Ic termdata
-+Toggles the display of all terminal data (in hexadecimal format).
-+The initial value for this toggle is
-+.Dv FALSE .
-+.It Ic verbose_encrypt
-+When the
-+.Ic verbose_encrypt
-+toggle is
-+.Dv TRUE ,
-+.Tn TELNET
-+prints out a message each time encryption is enabled or
-+disabled.  The initial value for this toggle is
-+.Dv FALSE.
-+Note:  Because of export controls, data encryption
-+is not supported outside of the United States and Canada.
-+.It Ic \&?
-+Displays the legal
-+.Ic toggle
-+commands.
-+.El
-+.It Ic z
-+Suspend
-+.Nm telnet  .
-+This command only works when the user is using the
-+.Xr csh  1  .
-+.It Ic \&! Op Ar command
-+Execute a single command in a subshell on the local
-+system.  If
-+.Ic command
-+is omitted, then an interactive
-+subshell is invoked.
-+.It Ic \&? Op Ar command
-+Get help.  With no arguments,
-+.Nm telnet
-+prints a help summary.
-+If a command is specified,
-+.Nm telnet
-+will print the help information for just that command.
-+.El
-+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-+.Nm Telnet
-+uses at least the
-+.Ev HOME ,
-+.Ev SHELL ,
-+.Ev DISPLAY ,
-+and
-+.Ev TERM
-+environment variables.
-+Other environment variables may be propagated
-+to the other side via the
-+.Dv TELNET ENVIRON
-+option.
-+.Sh FILES
-+.Bl -tag -width ~/.telnetrc -compact
-+.It Pa ~/.telnetrc
-+user customized telnet startup values
-+.El
-+.Sh HISTORY
-+The
-+.Nm Telnet
-+command appeared in
-+.Bx 4.2 .
-+.Sh NOTES
-+.Pp
-+On some remote systems, echo has to be turned off manually when in
-+\*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode.
-+.Pp
-+In \*(Lqold line by line\*(Rq mode or
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+the terminal's
-+.Ic eof
-+character is only recognized (and sent to the remote system)
-+when it is the first character on a line.
-diff --git a/telnetd/Makefile.am b/telnetd/Makefile.am
-index 81704fa..746cd10 100644
---- a/telnetd/Makefile.am
-+++ b/telnetd/Makefile.am
-@@ -26,6 +26,12 @@ EXTRA_PROGRAMS = telnetd
- telnetd_SOURCES = telnetd.c pty.c term.c utility.c state.c termstat.c slc.c
- noinst_HEADERS = telnetd.h
- 
-+if ENABLE_telnetd
-+man_MANS = telnetd.8
-+endif
-+
-+EXTRA_DIST = $(man_MANS)
-+
- @PATHDEFS_MAKE@
- 
- AM_CPPFLAGS =  $(PATHDEF_DEV) $(PATHDEF_TTY) $(PATHDEF_LOGIN) 
-@@ -36,3 +42,4 @@ LDADD = -L../libinetutils -linetutils \
-         -L../libtelnet -ltelnet \
-         ../lib/libgnu.a \
- 	$(LIBTERMCAP) $(LIBUTIL) $(LIBCRYPT) $(LIBAUTH)
-+
-diff --git a/telnetd/telnetd.8 b/telnetd/telnetd.8
-new file mode 100644
-index 0000000..05bcf74
---- /dev/null
-+++ b/telnetd/telnetd.8
-@@ -0,0 +1,603 @@
-+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1993
-+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
-+.\"
-+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-+.\" are met:
-+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
-+.\"
-+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-+.\"
-+.\"	@(#)telnetd.8	8.4 (Berkeley) 6/1/94
-+.\"
-+.Dd June 1, 1994
-+.Dt TELNETD 8
-+.Os BSD 4.2
-+.Sh NAME
-+.Nm telnetd
-+.Nd DARPA
-+.Tn TELNET
-+protocol server
-+.Sh SYNOPSIS
-+.Nm /usr/libexec/telnetd
-+.Op Fl BUhlkns
-+.Op Fl D Ar debugmode
-+.Op Fl I Ns Ar initid
-+.Op Fl S Ar tos
-+.Op Fl X Ar authtype
-+.Op Fl a Ar authmode
-+.Op Fl edebug
-+.Op Fl r Ns Ar lowpty-highpty
-+.Op Fl u Ar len
-+.Op Fl debug Op Ar port
-+.Sh DESCRIPTION
-+The
-+.Nm telnetd
-+command is a server which supports the
-+.Tn DARPA
-+standard
-+.Tn TELNET
-+virtual terminal protocol.
-+.Nm Telnetd
-+is normally invoked by the internet server (see
-+.Xr inetd 8 )
-+for requests to connect to the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+port as indicated by the
-+.Pa /etc/services
-+file (see
-+.Xr services 5 ) .
-+The
-+.Fl debug
-+option may be used to start up
-+.Nm telnetd
-+manually, instead of through
-+.Xr inetd 8 .
-+If started up this way,
-+.Ar port
-+may be specified to run
-+.Nm telnetd
-+on an alternate
-+.Tn TCP
-+port number.
-+.Pp
-+The
-+.Nm telnetd
-+command accepts the following options:
-+.Bl -tag -width "-a authmode"
-+.It Fl a Ar authmode
-+This option may be used for specifying what mode should
-+be used for authentication.
-+Note that this option is only useful if
-+.Nm telnetd
-+has been compiled with support for the
-+.Dv AUTHENTICATION
-+option.
-+There are several valid values for
-+.Ar authmode:
-+.Bl -tag -width debug
-+.It debug
-+Turns on authentication debugging code.
-+.It user
-+Only allow connections when the remote user
-+can provide valid authentication information
-+to identify the remote user,
-+and is allowed access to the specified account
-+without providing a password.
-+.It valid
-+Only allow connections when the remote user
-+can provide valid authentication information
-+to identify the remote user.
-+The
-+.Xr login 1
-+command will provide any additional user verification
-+needed if the remote user is not allowed automatic
-+access to the specified account.
-+.It other
-+Only allow connections that supply some authentication information.
-+This option is currently not supported
-+by any of the existing authentication mechanisms,
-+and is thus the same as specifying
-+.Fl a
-+.Cm valid .
-+.It none
-+This is the default state.
-+Authentication information is not required.
-+If no or insufficient authentication information
-+is provided, then the
-+.Xr login 1
-+program will provide the necessary user
-+verification.
-+.It off
-+This disables the authentication code.
-+All user verification will happen through the
-+.Xr login 1
-+program.
-+.El
-+.It Fl B
-+Specifies bftp server mode.  In this mode,
-+.Nm telnetd
-+causes login to start a
-+.Xr bftp 1
-+session rather than the user's
-+normal shell.  In bftp daemon mode normal
-+logins are not supported, and it must be used
-+on a port other than the normal
-+.Tn TELNET
-+port.
-+.It Fl D Ar debugmode
-+This option may be used for debugging purposes.
-+This allows
-+.Nm telnetd
-+to print out debugging information
-+to the connection, allowing the user to see what
-+.Nm telnetd
-+is doing.
-+There are several possible values for
-+.Ar debugmode:
-+.Bl -tag -width exercise
-+.It Cm options
-+Prints information about the negotiation of
-+.Tn TELNET
-+options.
-+.It Cm report
-+Prints the
-+.Cm options
-+information, plus some additional information
-+about what processing is going on.
-+.It Cm netdata
-+Displays the data stream received by
-+.Nm telnetd.
-+.It Cm ptydata
-+Displays data written to the pty.
-+.It Cm exercise
-+Has not been implemented yet.
-+.El
-+.It Fl debug
-+Enables debugging on each socket created by
-+.Nm telnetd
-+(see
-+.Dv SO_DEBUG
-+in
-+.Xr socket 2 ) .
-+.It Fl edebug
-+If
-+.Nm telnetd
-+has been compiled with support for data encryption, then the
-+.Fl edebug
-+option may be used to enable encryption debugging code.
-+.It Fl h
-+Disables the printing of host-specific information before
-+login has been completed.
-+.It Fl I Ar initid
-+This option is only applicable to
-+.Tn UNICOS
-+systems prior to 7.0.
-+It specifies the
-+.Dv ID
-+from
-+.Pa /etc/inittab
-+to use when init starts login sessions.  The default
-+.Dv ID
-+is
-+.Dv fe.
-+.It Fl k
-+This option is only useful if
-+.Nm telnetd
-+has been compiled with both linemode and kludge linemode
-+support.  If the
-+.Fl k
-+option is specified, then if the remote client does not
-+support the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option, then
-+.Nm telnetd
-+will operate in character at a time mode.
-+It will still support kludge linemode, but will only
-+go into kludge linemode if the remote client requests
-+it.
-+(This is done by by the client sending
-+.Dv DONT SUPPRESS-GO-AHEAD
-+and
-+.Dv DONT ECHO . )
-+The
-+.Fl k
-+option is most useful when there are remote clients
-+that do not support kludge linemode, but pass the heuristic
-+(if they respond with
-+.Dv WILL TIMING-MARK
-+in response to a
-+.Dv DO TIMING-MARK)
-+for kludge linemode support.
-+.It Fl l
-+Specifies line mode.  Tries to force clients to use line-
-+at-a-time mode.
-+If the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option is not supported, it will go
-+into kludge linemode.
-+.It Fl n
-+Disable
-+.Dv TCP
-+keep-alives.  Normally
-+.Nm telnetd
-+enables the
-+.Tn TCP
-+keep-alive mechanism to probe connections that
-+have been idle for some period of time to determine
-+if the client is still there, so that idle connections
-+from machines that have crashed or can no longer
-+be reached may be cleaned up.
-+.It Fl r Ar lowpty-highpty
-+This option is only enabled when
-+.Nm telnetd
-+is compiled for
-+.Dv UNICOS.
-+It specifies an inclusive range of pseudo-terminal devices to
-+use.  If the system has sysconf variable
-+.Dv _SC_CRAY_NPTY
-+configured, the default pty search range is 0 to
-+.Dv _SC_CRAY_NPTY;
-+otherwise, the default range is 0 to 128.  Either
-+.Ar lowpty
-+or
-+.Ar highpty
-+may be omitted to allow changing
-+either end of the search range.  If
-+.Ar lowpty
-+is omitted, the - character is still required so that
-+.Nm telnetd
-+can differentiate
-+.Ar highpty
-+from
-+.Ar lowpty .
-+.It Fl s
-+This option is only enabled if
-+.Nm telnetd
-+is compiled with support for
-+.Tn SecurID
-+cards.
-+It causes the
-+.Fl s
-+option to be passed on to
-+.Xr login 1 ,
-+and thus is only useful if
-+.Xr login 1
-+supports the
-+.Fl s
-+flag to indicate that only
-+.Tn SecurID
-+validated logins are allowed, and is
-+usually useful for controlling remote logins
-+from outside of a firewall.
-+.It Fl S Ar tos
-+.It Fl u Ar len
-+This option is used to specify the size of the field
-+in the
-+.Dv utmp
-+structure that holds the remote host name.
-+If the resolved host name is longer than
-+.Ar len ,
-+the dotted decimal value will be used instead.
-+This allows hosts with very long host names that
-+overflow this field to still be uniquely identified.
-+Specifying
-+.Fl u0
-+indicates that only dotted decimal addresses
-+should be put into the
-+.Pa utmp
-+file.
-+.ne 1i
-+.It Fl U
-+This option causes
-+.Nm telnetd
-+to refuse connections from addresses that
-+cannot be mapped back into a symbolic name
-+via the
-+.Xr gethostbyaddr 3
-+routine.
-+.It Fl X Ar authtype
-+This option is only valid if
-+.Nm telnetd
-+has been built with support for the authentication option.
-+It disables the use of
-+.Ar authtype
-+authentication, and
-+can be used to temporarily disable
-+a specific authentication type without having to recompile
-+.Nm telnetd .
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Telnetd
-+operates by allocating a pseudo-terminal device (see
-+.Xr pty 4 )
-+for a client, then creating a login process which has
-+the slave side of the pseudo-terminal as
-+.Dv stdin ,
-+.Dv stdout
-+and
-+.Dv stderr .
-+.Nm Telnetd
-+manipulates the master side of the pseudo-terminal,
-+implementing the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+protocol and passing characters
-+between the remote client and the login process.
-+.Pp
-+When a
-+.Tn TELNET
-+session is started up,
-+.Nm telnetd
-+sends
-+.Tn TELNET
-+options to the client side indicating
-+a willingness to do the
-+following
-+.Tn TELNET
-+options, which are described in more detail below:
-+.Bd -literal -offset indent
-+DO AUTHENTICATION
-+WILL ENCRYPT
-+DO TERMINAL TYPE
-+DO TSPEED
-+DO XDISPLOC
-+DO NEW-ENVIRON
-+DO ENVIRON
-+WILL SUPPRESS GO AHEAD
-+DO ECHO
-+DO LINEMODE
-+DO NAWS
-+WILL STATUS
-+DO LFLOW
-+DO TIMING-MARK
-+.Ed
-+.Pp
-+The pseudo-terminal allocated to the client is configured
-+to operate in \*(lqcooked\*(rq mode, and with
-+.Dv XTABS and
-+.Dv CRMOD
-+enabled (see
-+.Xr tty 4 ) .
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Telnetd
-+has support for enabling locally the following
-+.Tn TELNET
-+options:
-+.Bl -tag -width "DO AUTHENTICATION"
-+.It "WILL ECHO"
-+When the
-+.Dv LINEMODE
-+option is enabled, a
-+.Dv WILL ECHO
-+or
-+.Dv WONT ECHO
-+will be sent to the client to indicate the
-+current state of terminal echoing.
-+When terminal echo is not desired, a
-+.Dv WILL ECHO
-+is sent to indicate that
-+.Tn telnetd
-+will take care of echoing any data that needs to be
-+echoed to the terminal, and then nothing is echoed.
-+When terminal echo is desired, a
-+.Dv WONT ECHO
-+is sent to indicate that
-+.Tn telnetd
-+will not be doing any terminal echoing, so the
-+client should do any terminal echoing that is needed.
-+.It "WILL BINARY"
-+Indicates that the client is willing to send a
-+8 bits of data, rather than the normal 7 bits
-+of the Network Virtual Terminal.
-+.It "WILL SGA"
-+Indicates that it will not be sending
-+.Dv IAC GA,
-+go ahead, commands.
-+.It "WILL STATUS"
-+Indicates a willingness to send the client, upon
-+request, of the current status of all
-+.Tn TELNET
-+options.
-+.It "WILL TIMING-MARK"
-+Whenever a
-+.Dv DO TIMING-MARK
-+command is received, it is always responded
-+to with a
-+.Dv WILL TIMING-MARK
-+.ne 1i
-+.It "WILL LOGOUT"
-+When a
-+.Dv DO LOGOUT
-+is received, a
-+.Dv WILL LOGOUT
-+is sent in response, and the
-+.Tn TELNET
-+session is shut down.
-+.It "WILL ENCRYPT"
-+Only sent if
-+.Nm telnetd
-+is compiled with support for data encryption, and
-+indicates a willingness to decrypt
-+the data stream.
-+.El
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Telnetd
-+has support for enabling remotely the following
-+.Tn TELNET
-+options:
-+.Bl -tag -width "DO AUTHENTICATION"
-+.It "DO BINARY"
-+Sent to indicate that
-+.Tn telnetd
-+is willing to receive an 8 bit data stream.
-+.It "DO LFLOW"
-+Requests that the client handle flow control
-+characters remotely.
-+.It "DO ECHO"
-+This is not really supported, but is sent to identify a 4.2BSD
-+.Xr telnet 1
-+client, which will improperly respond with
-+.Dv WILL ECHO.
-+If a
-+.Dv WILL ECHO
-+is received, a
-+.Dv DONT ECHO
-+will be sent in response.
-+.It "DO TERMINAL-TYPE"
-+Indicates a desire to be able to request the
-+name of the type of terminal that is attached
-+to the client side of the connection.
-+.It "DO SGA"
-+Indicates that it does not need to receive
-+.Dv IAC GA,
-+the go ahead command.
-+.It "DO NAWS"
-+Requests that the client inform the server when
-+the window (display) size changes.
-+.It "DO TERMINAL-SPEED"
-+Indicates a desire to be able to request information
-+about the speed of the serial line to which
-+the client is attached.
-+.It "DO XDISPLOC"
-+Indicates a desire to be able to request the name
-+of the X windows display that is associated with
-+the telnet client.
-+.It "DO NEW-ENVIRON"
-+Indicates a desire to be able to request environment
-+variable information, as described in RFC 1572.
-+.It "DO ENVIRON"
-+Indicates a desire to be able to request environment
-+variable information, as described in RFC 1408.
-+.It "DO LINEMODE"
-+Only sent if
-+.Nm telnetd
-+is compiled with support for linemode, and
-+requests that the client do line by line processing.
-+.It "DO TIMING-MARK"
-+Only sent if
-+.Nm telnetd
-+is compiled with support for both linemode and
-+kludge linemode, and the client responded with
-+.Dv WONT LINEMODE.
-+If the client responds with
-+.Dv WILL TM,
-+the it is assumed that the client supports
-+kludge linemode.
-+Note that the
-+.Op Fl k
-+option can be used to disable this.
-+.It "DO AUTHENTICATION"
-+Only sent if
-+.Nm telnetd
-+is compiled with support for authentication, and
-+indicates a willingness to receive authentication
-+information for automatic login.
-+.It "DO ENCRYPT"
-+Only sent if
-+.Nm telnetd
-+is compiled with support for data encryption, and
-+indicates a willingness to decrypt
-+the data stream.
-+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-+.Sh FILES
-+.Pa /etc/services
-+.br
-+.Pa /etc/inittab
-+(UNICOS systems only)
-+.br
-+.Pa /etc/iptos
-+(if supported)
-+.br
-+.Pa /usr/ucb/bftp
-+(if supported)
-+.Sh "SEE ALSO"
-+.Xr telnet 1 ,
-+.Xr login 1 ,
-+.Xr bftp 1
-+(if supported)
-+.Sh STANDARDS
-+.Bl -tag -compact -width RFC-1572
-+.It Cm RFC-854
-+.Tn TELNET
-+PROTOCOL SPECIFICATION
-+.It Cm RFC-855
-+TELNET OPTION SPECIFICATIONS
-+.It Cm RFC-856
-+TELNET BINARY TRANSMISSION
-+.It Cm RFC-857
-+TELNET ECHO OPTION
-+.It Cm RFC-858
-+TELNET SUPPRESS GO AHEAD OPTION
-+.It Cm RFC-859
-+TELNET STATUS OPTION
-+.It Cm RFC-860
-+TELNET TIMING MARK OPTION
-+.It Cm RFC-861
-+TELNET EXTENDED OPTIONS - LIST OPTION
-+.It Cm RFC-885
-+TELNET END OF RECORD OPTION
-+.It Cm RFC-1073
-+Telnet Window Size Option
-+.It Cm RFC-1079
-+Telnet Terminal Speed Option
-+.It Cm RFC-1091
-+Telnet Terminal-Type Option
-+.It Cm RFC-1096
-+Telnet X Display Location Option
-+.It Cm RFC-1123
-+Requirements for Internet Hosts -- Application and Support
-+.It Cm RFC-1184
-+Telnet Linemode Option
-+.It Cm RFC-1372
-+Telnet Remote Flow Control Option
-+.It Cm RFC-1416
-+Telnet Authentication Option
-+.It Cm RFC-1411
-+Telnet Authentication: Kerberos Version 4
-+.It Cm RFC-1412
-+Telnet Authentication: SPX
-+.It Cm RFC-1571
-+Telnet Environment Option Interoperability Issues
-+.It Cm RFC-1572
-+Telnet Environment Option
-+.Sh BUGS
-+Some
-+.Tn TELNET
-+commands are only partially implemented.
-+.Pp
-+Because of bugs in the original 4.2 BSD
-+.Xr telnet 1 ,
-+.Nm telnetd
-+performs some dubious protocol exchanges to try to discover if the remote
-+client is, in fact, a 4.2 BSD
-+.Xr telnet 1 .
-+.Pp
-+Binary mode
-+has no common interpretation except between similar operating systems
-+(Unix in this case).
-+.Pp
-+The terminal type name received from the remote client is converted to
-+lower case.
-+.Pp
-+.Nm Telnetd
-+never sends
-+.Tn TELNET
-+.Dv IAC GA
-+(go ahead) commands.
--- 
-1.7.1
-
diff --git a/debian/patches/10_syslog_klog_doc.patch b/debian/patches/10_syslog_klog_doc.patch
deleted file mode 100644
index ea93ed8..0000000
--- a/debian/patches/10_syslog_klog_doc.patch
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-Index: b/src/syslogd.8
-===================================================================
---- a/src/syslogd.8
-+++ b/src/syslogd.8
-@@ -116,9 +116,12 @@ domain socket
- .Pa /dev/log ,
- from an Internet domain socket specified in
- .Pa /etc/services ,
--and from the special device
-+and from the one of the special devices
- .Pa /dev/klog
--(to read kernel messages).
-+or
-+.Pa /proc/kmsg
-+depending on the system (to read kernel messages). In a GNU/Linux system
-+it will not parse the System.map and use it to annotate the kernel messages.
- .Pp
- .Nm Syslogd
- creates the file
-@@ -148,7 +151,7 @@ The process id of current
- Name of the
- .Tn UNIX
- domain datagram log socket.
--.It Pa /dev/klog
-+.It Pa /dev/klog, /proc/kmsg
- The kernel log device.
- .El
- .Sh SEE ALSO
diff --git a/debian/patches/51_add_load_confdir_support.patch b/debian/patches/51_add_load_confdir_support.patch
index 28a8850..919b50c 100644
--- a/debian/patches/51_add_load_confdir_support.patch
+++ b/debian/patches/51_add_load_confdir_support.patch
@@ -6,9 +6,8 @@ Subject: [PATCH] Add load_confdir support
 ---
  paths           |    1 
  src/Makefile.am |    2 -
- src/syslogd.8   |    3 ++
  src/syslogd.c   |   57 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-
- 4 files changed, 61 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
+ 3 files changed, 58 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
 
 --- a/paths
 +++ b/paths
@@ -31,18 +30,6 @@ Subject: [PATCH] Add load_confdir support
  
  SUIDMODE = -o root -m 4775
  
---- a/src/syslogd.8
-+++ b/src/syslogd.8
-@@ -70,6 +70,9 @@ sockets.
- .It \fB-f\fR, \fB--rcfile\fR=\fIFILE\fP
- Specify the pathname of an alternate configuration file;
- the default is system specific and displayed in the help output.
-+.It \fB--rcdir\fR=\fIDIR\fP
-+Specify the pathname of an alternate configuration directory;
-+the default is system specific and displayed in the help output.
- .It \fB-h\fR, \fB--hop\fR
- Enable forwarding remote messages. By default syslogd will not
- forward messages it receives from remote hosts.
 --- a/src/syslogd.c
 +++ b/src/syslogd.c
 @@ -108,6 +108,7 @@
diff --git a/debian/patches/53_man_inetd_max_conn.patch b/debian/patches/53_man_inetd_max_conn.patch
deleted file mode 100644
index 1090f87..0000000
--- a/debian/patches/53_man_inetd_max_conn.patch
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-Index: b/src/inetd.8
-===================================================================
---- a/src/inetd.8
-+++ b/src/inetd.8
-@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Pass local and remote address data via e
- \fBENVIRONMENT\fP below.
- .It Fl R, -rate Ar rate
- Specifies the maximum number of times a service can be invoked
--in one minute; the default is 1000.
-+in one minute; the default is 40.
- .It Fl -resolve
- Resolve local and remote IP addresses and pass them to the server program
- via \fBTCPLOCALHOST\fP and \fBTCPREMOTEHOST\fP environment variables. See
-@@ -227,6 +227,21 @@ are both examples of the latter type of
- datagram server.
- .Xr Tftpd 8
- is an example of a multi-threaded datagram server.
-+The optional
-+.Dq max
-+suffix (separated from
-+.Dq wait
-+or
-+.Dq nowait
-+by a dot) specifies the maximum number of times a service can be invoked
-+in one minute; the default is 40.
-+If a service exceeds this limit,
-+.Nm
-+will log the problem
-+and stop servicing requests for the specific service for ten minutes.
-+See also the
-+.Fl R
-+option above.
- .Pp
- Servers using stream sockets generally are multi-threaded and
- use the
diff --git a/debian/patches/54_man_fixes.patch b/debian/patches/54_man_fixes.patch
deleted file mode 100644
index d6076c5..0000000
--- a/debian/patches/54_man_fixes.patch
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
----
- src/inetd.8       |    2 --
- src/syslog.conf.5 |    5 ++---
- telnet/telnet.1   |    2 +-
- telnetd/telnetd.8 |    6 +++++-
- 4 files changed, 8 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-)
-
---- a/src/inetd.8
-+++ b/src/inetd.8
-@@ -367,7 +367,6 @@ the following environment variables befo
- \fBTCPREMOTEIP\fP: the IP address of the remote client.
- .Pp
- \fBTCPREMOTEPORT\fP: the port number on the client side of the TCP connection.
--
- .Pp
- In addition, if given the \fB--remote\fP option,
- .Nm inetd
-@@ -376,7 +375,6 @@ will set the following environment varia
- \fBTCPLOCALHOST\fP: the DNS name of \fITCPLOCALIP\fR.
- .Pp
- \fBTCPREMOTEHOST\fP: the DNS name of \fITCPREMOTEIP\fR.
--
- .Sh "EXAMPLES"
- .Pp
- Here are several example service entries for the various types of services:
---- a/src/syslog.conf.5
-+++ b/src/syslog.conf.5
-@@ -29,12 +29,11 @@
- .\"
- .Dd June 9, 1993
- .Dt SYSLOG.CONF 5
--.Os
-+.Os BSD 4.4
- .Sh NAME
- .Nm syslog.conf
--.Nd
-+.Nd configuration file for
- .Xr syslogd 8
--configuration file
- .Sh DESCRIPTION
- The
- .Nm syslog.conf
---- a/telnetd/telnetd.8
-+++ b/telnetd/telnetd.8
-@@ -370,7 +370,9 @@ DO TIMING-MARK
- .Ed
- .Pp
- The pseudo-terminal allocated to the client is configured
--to operate in \*(lqcooked\*(rq mode, and with
-+to operate in
-+.Dq cooked
-+mode, and with
- .Dv XTABS and
- .Dv CRMOD
- enabled (see
-@@ -515,6 +517,7 @@ Only sent if
- is compiled with support for data encryption, and
- indicates a willingness to decrypt
- the data stream.
-+.El
- .Sh ENVIRONMENT
- .Sh FILES
- .Pa /etc/services
-@@ -577,6 +580,7 @@ Telnet Authentication: SPX
- Telnet Environment Option Interoperability Issues
- .It Cm RFC-1572
- Telnet Environment Option
-+.El
- .Sh BUGS
- Some
- .Tn TELNET
---- a/telnet/telnet.1
-+++ b/telnet/telnet.1
-@@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ is sent as
- .Ic abort  ,
- and
- .Ic eof and
--.B suspend
-+.Ic suspend
- are sent as
- .Ic eof and
- .Ic susp ,
diff --git a/debian/patches/series b/debian/patches/series
index 06ef68f..607f159 100644
--- a/debian/patches/series
+++ b/debian/patches/series
@@ -1,11 +1,8 @@
-01_revert_manpage_removal.patch
+01_disable_useless_man_pages.patch
 02_remove_unused_opie_check.patch
-10_syslog_klog_doc.patch
 22_syslogd_conf.patch
 50_split_load_conffile.patch
 51_add_load_confdir_support.patch
-53_man_inetd_max_conn.patch
-54_man_fixes.patch
 60_inetd_support_argless_services.patch
 61_inetd_listen_on_tcpmux_ports.patch
 62_inetd_change_ipv6_protocol_semantics.patch
diff --git a/debian/rules b/debian/rules
index 6c3320c..e69033d 100755
--- a/debian/rules
+++ b/debian/rules
@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ ifeq ($(DEB_HOST_ARCH_OS),hurd)
 endif
 
 D = $(CURDIR)/debian/tmp
+M = $(CURDIR)/debian/local/man
 mandir = usr/share/man
 man1dir = $(mandir)/man1
 man8dir = $(mandir)/man8
@@ -102,6 +103,10 @@ install: build
 	
 	$(MAKE) install DESTDIR=$(D) SUIDMODE=$(SUIDMODE)
 	
+	# Create man page directories
+	mkdir -p $(D)/$(man1dir)
+	mkdir -p $(D)/$(man8dir)
+	
 	# Move ping to /bin
 	mkdir -p $(D)/bin
 	mv $(D)/usr/bin/ping $(D)/bin/
@@ -112,15 +117,15 @@ install: build
 	
 	# Rename inetd to be able to coexist with not purged netkit-inetd
 	mv $(D)/usr/sbin/inetd $(D)/usr/sbin/inetutils-inetd
-	mv $(D)/$(man8dir)/inetd.8 $(D)/$(man8dir)/inetutils-inetd.8
+	cp $(M)/inetd.8 $(D)/$(man8dir)/inetutils-inetd.8
 	
 	# Needed to enable alternatives
 	mv $(D)/usr/bin/telnet $(D)/usr/bin/inetutils-telnet
-	mv $(D)/$(man1dir)/telnet.1 $(D)/$(man1dir)/inetutils-telnet.1
+	cp $(M)/telnet.1 $(D)/$(man1dir)/inetutils-telnet.1
 	mv $(D)/usr/bin/ftp $(D)/usr/bin/inetutils-ftp
-	mv $(D)/$(man1dir)/ftp.1 $(D)/$(man1dir)/inetutils-ftp.1
+	cp $(M)/ftp.1 $(D)/$(man1dir)/inetutils-ftp.1
 	mv $(D)/usr/bin/talk $(D)/usr/bin/inetutils-talk
-	mv $(D)/$(man1dir)/talk.1 $(D)/$(man1dir)/inetutils-talk.1
+	cp $(M)/talk.1 $(D)/$(man1dir)/inetutils-talk.1
 
 binary-indep:
 # Nothing to do.